Honeywell Galaxy 512, Galaxy 60, Galaxy 8 Programming Manual
Honeywell galaxy 512 is a powerful security system that offers a wide range of features to protect your home or business. With its advanced technology, the Galaxy 512 can be customized to meet your specific needs, providing you with peace of mind and protection.
Advertisement
Advertisement
Galaxy
8/18/60/128/500/504/512
Programming Manual
Honeywell Security
Galaxy Programming Manual
Contents
Table of Contents
Section 2: System Operation ................................................................... 3
Section 3: Setting Options ....................................................................... 7
i
Table of Contents
Galaxy Programming Manual
Section 4: Menu Options 11-19 .............................................................. 13
Section 5: Display Options..................................................................... 17
Section 7: Modify Options ...................................................................... 27
ii
Galaxy Programming Manual
Table of Contents
Option 64 – Assemble Zone (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512) ................................ 151
iii
Table of Contents
Galaxy Programming Manual
Appendix A : Door Control - MAX (MX01) ........................................... A-1
Appendix C: SIA and Contact ID Event Codes ................................... C-1
Appendix D: SIA Event Structure ....................................................... C-1
Appendix E: Event Log Messages ....................................................... D-1
iv
Galaxy Programming Manual
Quick Setup
Section 1: Quick Setup
To quickly set up the Galaxy control panel for programming follow these simple steps:
1.
Connect a 1k Ω (1%) resistor across each of the zones on the panel and RIO (if connected).
2.
Ensure that the tamper return loop — the terminal marked as T on the PCB — is a complete loop.
NOTE: This is factory set as a completed loop with a 0 V return.
3.
Connect a keypad to the AB LINE terminals on the control panel. The Galaxy 128 has two AB lines.
The Galaxy 500, 504 and 512 have four AB LINE terminals. Connect the terminals as follows:
C o n t r o l P a n e l K e y p a d
B
A
+
B
A
+
-
Table 1. Terminal Connections
4.
Connect a 680 Ω End Of Line (EOL) resistor across the A and B terminals of the keypad.
5.
Ensure that the keypad is fitted to the wall (see Installation Manual, II1-0030, Keypad
Installation Procedure, Section 4 ).
6.
Connect the battery before replacing the control panel lid.
7.
Make sure that the backup battery switch on the PCB (MEM BK) is closed.
8.
Connect the mains wiring to the control panel. Do not switch the mains ON.
9.
Replace the control panel lid and secure the fastening screw.
10.
Switch on the mains voltage (230 Va.c. / 50 Hz).
11.
The following sequence of events occur:
• the keypad buzzer and control panel horn (if fitted) activate momentarily,
• flashing ✷✷✷✷✷✷✷✷✷✷✷✷✷✷✷✷ is displayed on the keypad,
• the sounders stop and the keypad displays become blank,
• the green power LED lights,
• the default banner is displayed on the keypad.
GALAXY <Panel Type> <Panel Version>
00:00 SUN 01 JAN
12.
The system is now ready to be programmed. Refer to Section 2: System Operation for programming details.
1
2
Galaxy Programming Manual
Galaxy Programming Manual
Menu options
Section 2: System Operation
Menu Options
General
The Galaxy provides various menu options for modifying the functional performance of the system.
There are two menu structures:
1.
Full Menu — only accessed by default by the Manager code on the Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 and 512 control panels and by the engineer.
2.
Quick Menu — a selection of options from the full menu. The quick menu is the default menu access for all user codes (level 3 and above) as well as the Manager code on the Galaxy 8 and 18 control panels.
The Full Menu
The full menu has a hierarchy of four structures contained within it. Each structure is accessible by an increased level of user code.
The Quick Menu
The quick menu offers level 3 and above users a selection of up to 10 options, numbered 0 – 9. The options available from the quick menu can be modified to the user’s requirement via option
59 = QUICK MENU .
Q u i c k M e n u
0 = O m i t Z o n e s
1 = F o r c e d S e t
2 = C h i m e
3 = D i s p l a y Z o n e s
4 = D i s p l a y L o g
5 = P r i n t
6 = W a l k T e s t
7 = T i m e / D a t e
8 = C o d e s
9 = S u m m e r
L e v e l 3
1 0 = S e t t i n g
1 1 = O m i t Z o n e s
1 2 = T i m e d S e t
1 3 = P a r t S e t
1 4 = F o r c e d S e t
1 5 = C h i m e
1 6 = I n s t a n t S e t
1 7 = I n s t a n t P a r t
1 8 = H o m e S e t
1 9 = A ll S e t
L e v e l 4
2 0 = D i s p l a y
2 1 = D i s p l a y Z o n e s
2 2 = D i s p l a y L o g
2 3 = S y s t e m
2 4 = P r i n t
2 5 = A c c e s s D o o r s
F u l l M e n u
L e v e l 5
3 0 = T e s t
3 1 = W a l k T e s t
3 2 = O u t p u t s
L e v e l 6
4 0 = M o d i f y
4 1 = T i m e / D a t e
4 2 = C o d e s
4 3 = S u m m e r
4 4 = T r a c e
E n g i n e e r
5 0 = E n g i n e e r 1
5 1 = P a r a m e t e r s
5 2 = P r o g r a m Z o n e s
5 3 = P r o g r a m O u t p u t s
5 4 = L i n k s
4
4
5
6
=
=
T i m e r
G r o u p
C o n
O m i t r o l t
5 5 = S o a k
5 6 = C o m m u n i c a t i o n
4 7 = R e m o t e A c c e s s 5 7 = S y s t e m P r i n t
4 8 = E n g .
A c c e s s
4 9 = T i m e l o c k
5 8 = K e y p a d
5 9 = Q u i c k M e n u
E n g i n e e r
6 0 = E n g i n e e r 2
6 1 = D i a g n o s t i c s
6 2 = F u ll T e s t
6 3 = O p t i o n s
6 4 = A s s e m b l e Z o n e
6 5 = T i m e r s
6 6 = P r e C h e c k
6 7 = R e m o t e R e s e t
6 8 = M e n u A c c e s s
Table 2. Quick and Full Menu Options Reference
Menu Access
Only valid codes (level 3 and above) can access the Galaxy menu options. Access to the user options is assigned by the engineer (refer to options 42 = CODES and 68 = MENU ACCESS ). Users cannot view or access options for which they are not authorised; this includes options in the Quick Menu.
NOTE: Menu options 51 – 67 (ENGINEER 1 and ENGINEER 2) can be assigned additional access to user level 3 – 6, by the engineer.
3
Menu Access
Galaxy Programming Manual
There are two methods of selecting menu options:
1.
Direct Access:
Code + ent + option number + ent .
2.
Menu Driven Access:
Code + ent + A (to select menu level) + ent;
A key (to select menu option) + ent .
Direct Access
Entering a valid menu option number while in the menu immediately moves to that option. For example, pressing 52 when the keypad is displaying 22 = DISPLAY LOG moves directly to option
52 = PROGRAM ZONES ; Pressing 8 while accessing the PROGRAM ZONES option moves directly to
8 = Group . The option number entered must be valid for the level of the menu structure that is currently being accessed.
Menu Driven Access
Menu driven access allows the engineer (and users) to enter the menu and, by using the A and B keys, navigate through the available options. The options are accessed by pressing the ent key. If you press and hold the A key it will scroll forward through the options and if you press and hold the B key it will scroll backwards through the options.
Keypad Menu Timeout
Once the user menu has been accessed (irrespective of user level), if there are no keypresses for 2 minutes, then the keypad timeout occurs; the system returns to the banner text.
NOTE: This feature does not apply when the system is in the Walk Test option. If no zones are tested or no keypresses occur for 20 minutes when Walk Test is selected, then the keypad timeout occurs. In
Menu Option 66 (Pre-check ) there is also a 20 minute timeout after the last zone has been activated.
Engineer Mode
To program the Galaxy, the system must be in engineering mode. This allows access to the engineer menu options 50 = ENGINEER 1 and 60 = ENGINEER 2 .
Accessing Engineer Mode (Galaxy 8, 18, 60, 128, 500 & 504)
To access engineer mode, enter the engineer code twice.
Engineer Code + ent + Engineer Code + ent
The default engineer code is 112233 .
The first entry of the code activates a tamper alarm. The second entry of the code cancels this alarm and puts the system into engineer mode; 10 = SETTING, [ENT] TO SELECT is displayed on the keypad. While engineer mode is accessed, all tampers are disabled, however, all constantly alert zone types — PA zone types, 24 Hour , Security , Fire & Mask — remain active.
On accessing engineering mode, any group that is set becomes inaccessible to the engineer. The set groups cannot be assigned to zones, outputs and any other functions permitting group allocation.
NOTE: The Galaxy 60, 128, 500 and 504 can be assigned manager authorised engineer access by adding a # to the engineer code. Engineer access is then gained as described in the following paragraphs.
4
Galaxy Programming Manual
Engineer Menu
Accessing Engineer Mode (Galaxy 512)
User Authorised Access
The default engineer code ( 112233) on the Galaxy 512 is allocated a # . With the # assigned, the engineer code operation is as follows:
1.
Enable Engineer Access:
User Code + ent + 48 + ent + 1 + ent + esc + esc
2.
Access Engineer Mode
Engineer Code + ent
Entry to the engineer mode is authorised by a user with access to menu option 48 = ENGINEER ACCESS .
The user selects this option and presses key 1 to enable engineer access. The engineer code must then be entered within five minutes of the option being enabled. A single entry of the engineer code directly accesses the mode, without activating an engineer tamper alarm. If the code is not entered within the five minute period, the engineer code is invalid and has no effect. Once the engineer mode has been accessed, there is no time limit on the period that the engineer can remain in the mode.
On accessing engineering mode, any group that is set becomes inaccessible to the engineer. The set groups cannot be assigned to zones, outputs and any other functions permitting group allocation.
Galaxy 512 only
The system cannot be set by any user codes while engineer mode is accessed.
Disabling User Authorisation of Engineer Access
The remote code ( User 200 on G60, User 250 on G128, User 500 on G500 and User 999 on G504 and
G512 ) can remove the # from the engineer code. If the # is removed access to engineer mode is gained in the same manner as the Galaxy 8, 18, 60, 128, 500 and 504; the engineer code must be entered twice to gain menu access.
NOTE: The engineer code or remote code can assign the # to the engineer PIN. Only the remote code can remove it.
Exiting from Engineer Mode
To exit from engineer mode and return to the normal banner enter, carry out the following operation:
1.
Return to the engineer banner,
2.
Enter the engineer code,
3.
Press the esc key.
The Galaxy carries out the following checks:
1.
That there are no module or zone tampers. If there are any module or zone tampers the escape procedure is aborted.
2.
That it is communicating with all of the attached modules.
If any modules are reported as missing from the system, the Galaxy prompts the engineer to remove each of the missing modules by pressing the ✴ key. If the engineer does not remove the missing modules, the escape procedure is aborted.
5
User Access
Galaxy Programming Manual
3.
That all of the access doors (controlled by the on-line MAX) are closed. If any of the access doors are open, then the exit procedure is halted until all of the doors are closed.
4 .
That there are no power failures on the galaxy system, such as AC fail, fuse fail or battery fail
Aborting the Exit Engineer Mode Procedure
If the esc key is pressed at any point while engineer mode is being exited, before the normal banner is displayed, the exit procedure is aborted and the system returns to the engineer banner.
Multi User Access
The Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 and 512 allow multi-user access. A maximum of 4, 8, 8, 16 and 16 users respectively can simultaneously carry out tasks on the system.
The Galaxy 8 and 18 only permit single-user access.
6
Galaxy Programming Manual
Setting the System
Section 3: Setting Options
Setting the System
Full Setting
Enter: USER CODE + A
If groups are enabled and the user code has been assigned group choice then the keypad displays the set status of the available groups:
R = Ready
F = Fault (group is unset and at least 1 zone is open
SET A12345678
Groups RRSRSSSS
P = Part Set
S (flashing) = selected for setting
S (steady) = already set
L = Lockout
Pressing the keys for the groups toggles the R ( Ready ) to an S ( set flashing).
SET A12345678
Groups SSRR---
Once the required groups have been selected press the ent key to begin the setting procedure.
If groups are not enabled or the user does not have group choice, entering the user code followed by the A key immediately starts the setting procedure.
TIMED 060
The keypad displays the exit time countdown. At the end of the exit time, or when the setting procedure is terminated by a FINAL or PUSH-SET zone closing, the ENTRY/EXIT HORN outputs and keypad buzzers become silent for 4 seconds, then emit 2 long tones to confirm that the system is set. The message
SYSTEM IS SET appears briefly before the keypad display clears (if all groups are set). Otherwise, it is the customer banner that is displayed.
Part Setting
PART SET 060
Enter: CODE + B
This is identical to the Full Setting procedure, except the keypad display indicates that the system is being
Part Set . Only the zones which have the Part attribute enabled (refer to option 52.5 = PROGRAM
ZONE.Part
), are included.
Cancelling the Setting
The full and part setting routines can be aborted by pressing the esc key (on the keypad used to begin setting) before the system sets.
7
Unsetting the System
Galaxy Programming Manual
Unsetting the System
During the unsetting procedure, initiated by the opening of FINAL or ENTRY zone on a set group, the system is unset by entering the user code followed by the A key.
• If the user does not have group choice, all of the groups assigned to the code are instantly unset.
• If the user has group choice only the group that the FINAL or ENTRY zone is assigned to is unset; all of the other groups remain set. The system displays the set status of the remaining groups and prompts for the required groups to be unset. To unset the required groups press the relevant number keys — the S or P (Set or Part Set) changes to flashing U — and then press the ent key.
Engineer Unsetting (G8, 18, 60, 128, 500 and 504)
The engineer can only unset a system that was set using the engineer code. The engineer code cannot be used to unset a system that was set by a user code.
Keyswitch Setting Options
Zones programmed as KEYSWITCH can be used to full set, part set and unset the system. Refer to option
52 = PROGRAM ZONE .
Setting the System with a Keyswitch
The KEYSWITCH starts the setting procedure of each of the groups assigned to zone. At the end of the exit time, or when the setting procedure is terminated by a FINAL or PUSH-SET zone closing, the ENTRY/
EXIT HORN outputs and keypad buzzers become silent for 4 seconds, then emit 2 long tones to confirm that the system is set.
NOTE: If the KEYSWITCH has its Part attribute enabled (refer to option 52 = PROGRAM ZONE ) then the KEYSWITCH part sets the system.
Unsetting the System with a Keyswitch
Activating the KEYSWITCH when the group that it is assigned to is set instantly unsets the group. All other groups which have been “starred” to the KEYSWITCH are not affected and remain set.
8
Galaxy Programming Manual
Card Setting
Card Setting Options
Setting with Proximity Cards/Tags/Fobs
The Proximity user cards can be used to set and unset the system. This is done by assigning a MAX user card (or fob) with one of the setting options (refer to option 42.1.8 = CODES.User Codes.MAX Function ). When the card is held against a MAX module or keyprox for 5 seconds, the MAX function is activated. For example, if the MAX function assigned is 13 = Part Set , then activating the card held function results in the system being part set.
Unsetting with the Proximity Cards
If any of the groups assigned to the MAX or keyprox are set, then swiping the MAX or keyprox module with a card unsets the groups.
NOTE: The MAX or keyprox module must have common groups to the proximity card user to allow the card held function to be activated.
Cancelling and Resetting Alarms
Following each alarm activation, the alarm must be cancelled and the Galaxy reset. The alarm is cancelled by entry of any valid user code (level 2 and above) assigned to the group that has alarmed or by presentation of a valid proximity card to a reader or keyprox. The alarm sounders, Bell and Strobe outputs are silenced and the keypad displays information on the zones that have been activated during the alarm.
If the user code entered is not of a sufficient level to reset the Galaxy, the keypad displays the message CALL
MANAGER RESET REQUIRED or CALL ENGINEER RESET REQUIRED depending on the type of alarm and level of reset required.
The Galaxy is reset by entering a valid user code assigned to the group that has alarmed, with the appropriate reset level for the type of alarm that has activated — System , Tamper or PA (refer to option 51.6 =
PARAMETERS.System Reset , 51.7 = PARAMETERS.Tamper Reset and 51.22 =
PARAMETERS.PA Reset ). The keypad displays information on the zones that have been activated during the alarm.
NOTE: If a tamper alarm has activated (zone or module) then the system cannot be reset until the tamper condition is restored.
Galaxy 8, 18, 60, 128, 500 and 504
On the next setting of the Galaxy, if any of the zones that were opened during the previous alarm have not closed since the alarm activation, then the system is prevented from setting. The addresses of the open zones are displayed on the keypad; there is no sounder activation. Closing the zones permits the setting procedure to start.
NOTE: This is not the same as open zones being indicated on the keypad; these are accompanied by rapid tones on the Entry/Exit Horn .
9
Setting Features
Galaxy Programming Manual
Setting Features
The Galaxy control panels provide a range of features to assist the user in the setting and unsetting of the system, minimising the possibility of error when carrying out these procedures.
Show Set Status
When Show Status is enabled (refer to option 58.6 = KEYPAD.Show Status ), pressing the ✴ and # keys simultaneously when the normal banner is displayed indicates the group set status.
F = Fault
R = Ready
S = Set
P = Part Set
L = Locked Out
– = Group not assigned to keypad
STATUS 12345678
Groups RRSRLPFP
Group Block
NOTE: The Show Status indicates the set conditions of groups when the system is set (keypad blank) or unset (normal banner). Show Status does not operate while engineer mode is accessed.
Pressing the ✴ and # keys again toggles the display to show the status of the groups individually. To move between each groups, press the ✴ and A or the ✴ and B keys simultaneously.
08:58 TUE 22 NOV
A1U Group A1
Group A1 is unset
Pressing the ✴ and # keys again returns the keypad to the banner display.
Galaxy 500, 504 and 512
The Galaxy 500, 504 and 512 have more than 8 groups; these are displayed on the keypad in blocks of eight groups. Press ✴ and A or ✴ and B keys to display each of the group blocks.
Exit Time
Once the setting routine starts, outputs programmed as Entry/Exit Horn emit a continuous tone. The keypad used to set the system indicates the time, in seconds, remaining before the system sets.
Exit Time Reset
If any zones are open when setting starts or are opened during the setting routine, the sounder begins to pulse rapidly; zones types other than Final , Exit , Entry or Push-Set (and Secure Final or Part Final when acting as a Final ), indicate on the setting keypad the number of zones open. The A or B keys can be used to view the open zone types and addresses. Closing the zones resets and restarts the exit time.
10
Galaxy Programming Manual
Setting Features (cont’d)
Omitted Zones
If zones are omitted when the system starts setting, this is indicated on the keypad. The keypad indicates how many zones are omitted.
Expiry Warning
During the last 25% of the programmed exit time outputs programmed as Entry/Exit Horn begin to pulse rapidly, indicating that time is running short.
System Set Indication
At the end of the exit time the Entry/Exit Horns become silent for four seconds. This allows the door to be locked and secured and gives the detectors time to settle before the system finally sets. Two long tones are emitted to confirm that the system has set. If all groups are set the keypad briefly displays the message SYS-
TEM IS SET before going blank. If any group remain unset the display returns to the banner.
Group Logic Setting Restriction
If Setting Logic has been assigned to a group (refer to 63.1.2 = OPTIONS.Groups.Setting Logic ), the set status of the groups must satisfy the conditions defined in the option to permit the group to set. If the Setting
Logic conditions are not satisfied, then the group cannot set. If multiple groups are being set simultaneously, but one group is restricted due to the programmed Setting Logic , the remainder of the groups set. The restricted group does not set; there is no warning or indication given.
If the programmed Setting Logic results in none of the selected groups being allowed to set, a warning message is displayed on the keypad. This message does not appear if at least one group sets.
2 Groups not set
[<],[>] to view
Entry Time
The system begins the unsetting routine whenever a Final or Entry zone activates. The Entry/Exit Horns pulse slowly indicating that the entry time countdown has started. The user must go directly to the keypad, using the agreed entry route, and unset the system before the entry time expires. When 75% of the entry time has elapsed the Entry/Exit horns pulse rapidly, indicating that time is running short.
Timeout (Slow Entry)
If the entry time expires before a valid code is entered to unset the group, a full alarm occurs. This is recorded in the event log as a Timeout against the group which was in the process of being unset.
Straying from the Entry Route
If, during the entry routine, the user strays from the agreed entry route and activates a zone in a protected area, a full alarm occurs.
11
Setting Features (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
Abort Time
Should the user exceed the entry time or stray from the entry route a full alarm occurs. However the activation of the intruder output can be delayed to allow time for the user to abort the remote signalling.
The Abort Time parameter can also be programmed so that an Intruder alarm is activated immediately the entry time expires or a zone is activated, but entry of any valid code cancels the alarm and deactivates the
Intruder outputs without the need for a system reset.
Abort Setting Message
Zones that are open or opened during the exit period are indicated to the user by a rapid audible tone from the entry/exit horns. The keypad displays the open zones and then prompts the user to abort the setting by pressing the ESC key. This message is designed to prevent users from re-entering the building, closing the open zones, allowing the system to set and trapping the user in the building.
Fail to Set – Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512
An output type (Option 53-Program output 40, Fail Set) is available that activates if a full set has not occurred after a programmed period of time (determined by Option 51-Parameter 35, Fail to Set ) from the start of the setting procedure.
Power Failure While System is Set
When power is restored to the system, following a complete mains (a.c.) and standby battery (d.c.) power failure, the system attempts to return to the set status — full or part — prior to the power failure. The system begins the setting procedure. If there are no zones open that prevent the system from setting, at the end of the programmed exit time, the appropriate groups and parts are set.
12
Galaxy Programming Manual
11 - Omit Zones
Section 4: Menu Options 11-19
Option 11 – Omit Zones (Quick Menu Option 0)
Code + ent + 11 + ent + A or B to select zone + # +
A or B to select zone + # + ..........
ent (to set) or esc (to select another option)
This option allows zones to be temporarily removed (omitted) from the system. Once a zone has been omitted it does not generate an alarm condition (including tamper). The omitted zones are reinstated automatically when the system is unset or manually when the zone omit option is disabled.
On selecting the Omit Zones option, the first zone that has the omit attribute enabled is displayed (refer to option 52 = PROGRAM ZONE ). If there are no omittable zones, then the message NO ENTRIES is displayed.
Press the A or B keys to view other omittable zones. Press the # key to toggle the omit status of the required zone. The display indicates the new omit status.
NOTE: A zone is omitted from the system as soon as it is selected.
This process is continued until all the required zones have been omitted:
• pressing the ent key starts the timed setting routine. The number of zones omitted from the system are displayed during the exit time countdown;
• pressing the esc key returns to the 11 = OMIT ZONES without starting the setting routine.
On returning to the banner (normal or engineer) the keypad displays the message ZONES OMITTED .
Omitted zones remain omitted for one set period only or until they are manually reinstated to the system.
Outputs programmed as Zone Omit (mode programmed as reflex) are activated as soon as the zone is omitted and remains active until the zone is reinstated.
13
11 - Omit Zones (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
Galaxy 512
Code + ent + 11 + ent + A or B to select zone + # + ent (to set) or esc (to select another option)
The Omit Zones option allows a single eligible zone to be omitted from the system. Once a zone has been omitted from the system, it is not possible to view other zones that have the omit attribute enabled until the omitted zone is reinstated (either automatically or manually).
There are five zone types which vary from the standard Omit Zones operation:
• Vibration Zones — if the omitted zone is a Vibration zone, then all zones (in all groups) programmed as this type are block omitted. The Vibration zones remain omitted until they are manually reinstated.
Unsetting the system does not reinstate Vibration zones (vibration zones are also available on the G504).
• ATM1/2/3/4 Zones — a single ATM zone type can be omitted for the duration of the period entered in the ATM Timeout parameter (option 51.39
). The ATM Delay parameter (option 51.38
) determines the delay before ATM zones are omitted following the entry of one of the ten ATM Codes (User 188 –
197). Entry of a code allows the user to omit one of the ATM zone types. Once omitted, the initiating keypad indicates the number of minutes remaining until the selected ATM zones are reintroduced to the system. A warning is given ten and five minutes before the zones are reinstated. The omit time may be extended indefinitely by reentering an ATM Code . Outputs programmed as ATM1/2/3/4 active when the respective ATM zone type is omitted, and remain active until the zone type is reinstated.
Refer to option 52 = PROGRAM ZONES for details on the operation of Vibration and ATM zone types.
Manually Reintroducing Omitted Zones to the System
Selecting the OMIT ZONES option; using the A or B keys, select the omitted zone to be reinstated. Press the # key toggle the omit status of the required zone. The display indicates the new omit status.
Normal Setting with Omitted Zones
Initiate the full or part setting routine. The system starts to set; the display indicates that zones have been omitted. The zone remains omitted until the system is unset (with the exception of Vibration and ATM zones).
14
Galaxy Programming Manual
Options 12 - 16
Option 12 – Timed Set
This option, when entered, starts the setting routine. The Entry/Exit Horns emit the expiry warning using the programmed exit time (0-300 seconds). The system sets at the end of the exit time or earlier if a Final Zone is opened and closed, key 0 is pressed — if programmed as an exit terminator — or if a push-set terminator is operated. The option displays the time remaining until the system sets or the number of open zones preventing the system from setting. Opening a zone during the exit routine resets the exit timer. Pressing the esc key prior to the system setting aborts the setting routine.
NOTE: The factory default setting allows the timed setting routine to be initiated by entering a valid level 3
(or above) user code and pressing the A key. The A key can be reprogrammed by the engineer to perform another function, or to start the setting routine without a code being entered.
Option 13 – Part Set
This option operates exactly as the Timed Set option with the exception that only those zones that have the part attribute enabled (refer to option 52 = PROGRAM ZONES ) are set. All zones have the part attribute enabled by default. Therefore selecting PART SET from the factory will set all zones. The part attribute of the zones must be disabled if they are not to be included in the part set.
NOTE: The factory default setting allows the part setting routine to be initiated by entering a valid level 3 (or above) user code and pressing the B key. The B key can be reprogrammed by the engineer to perform another function, or to start the part setting routine without a code being entered.
Option 14 – Forced Set (Quick Menu Option 1)
Forced Set allows a timed set of the system when there are zones that are open at the point of selecting the option. The open zones must have the omit attribute enabled (refer to option 52 = PROGRAM
ZONES ). This option is only available if the Forced parameter (option 51.26
) is enabled; otherwise, the selection is invalid and the keypad displays the message Option not available .
When the Forced Set option is entered, the keypad displays the number of zones that have been omitted
(manually by option 11 = OMIT ZONES and automatically by the Forced Set ) and the setting routine begins. If there are any open zones that do not have the omit attribute enabled, the keypad displays the number of open zones that are not omittable and prompts the user to view them. The non-omittable zones must be closed before the setting routine can continue.
Option 15 – Chime (Quick Menu Option 2)
The Chime option allows the user to switch the chime facility on and off. Any zones that have the chime attribute enabled (refer to option 52 = PROGRAM ZONES ) momentarily operate Entry/Exit Horns when opened; 2 long tones are emitted.
Option 16 – Instant Set
Selecting this option immediately sets all zones. No sounder or exit time is involved.
NOTE: The zones must be closed to allow the system to set. If any zones are open, then the exit time reset feature (detailed previously) is activated.
15
Options 17 - 19
Galaxy Programming Manual
Option 17 – Instant Part
Selecting this option immediately sets all zones that have the part attribute enabled. No sounder or exit time is involved.
NOTE: The zones must be closed to allow the system to part set. If any zones are open, then the exit time reset feature (detailed previously) is activated.
Option 18 – Home Set
The Home Set option either fully sets or part sets the system. The system is:
• fully set if the exit time is manually terminated via a Final or Push-Set zone operation;
• part set if the exit time is allowed to expire.
Option 19 – All Set (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
All Set allows a timed set of groups assigned to the user code without offering the choice of which groups are to be set. No group choice is offered. The groups that are set when this option is selected is determined by the keypad group restriction (refer to option 58.7 = KEYPADS.Groups
):
• If there is no keypad group restriction then all of the groups assigned to the user are set — as long as there is at least one common group assigned to the keypad.
• If there is a group restriction on the setting keypad, then only the groups that are common to both the user and the keypad on which the menu option is selected are set. For example, a user assigned groups 1, 2, 3, and 4 selecting the All Set option on a keypad assigned groups 2 and 3 will only set groups 2 and 3.
16
Galaxy Programming Manual
21 - Display Zones
Section 5: Display Options
Option 21 – Display Zones (Quick Menu Option 3)
Selecting and entering the Display Zones option shows the first zone on the system. Other zones may be viewed by pressing the A and B keys or by entering the zone number directly.
The top line displays:
• the address;
• the zone function alternating with the status — open, closed, high resistance, low resistance, tamper short or tamper open circuit;
• the group assigned — if the group mode is enabled. Only the zones assigned to the user’s group are displayed.
The bottom line shows:
• the zone descriptor (if used);
• by pressing the # key the bottom line changes to show the circuit resistance in Ohms, if using a hardwired
RIO and the RIO (not zone) voltage, pressing the # key returns the bottom line to the zone descriptor.
A printout of all the zones is available from this option by pressing the ✴ key; pressing the esc key aborts the printout.
NOTE: A serial printer must be connected to the Galaxy panel via a printer interface module or an RS232 interface module.
17
22 - Display Log
Galaxy Programming Manual
Option 22 – Display Log (Quick Menu Option 4)
The Galaxy event log is viewed using this menu option. The number of events that each of the Galaxy panels can store are as follows:
• Galaxy 8
• Galaxy 18
• Galaxy 60
• Galaxy 128
• Galaxy 500
• Galaxy 504
- 250 events
- 500 events
- 500 events
- 500 events
- 1000 events
- 1000 events
• Galaxy 512 - 1000 events
If group mode is enabled (refer to option 63 = OPTIONS ) and the user code has group choice (refer to option 42 = CODES ), then the available groups are displayed for selection. Press the number of the groups to be displayed, the N below the selected group changes to a flashing Y . When all the required groups are selected press the ent key to access the log; only the events in the selected groups are displayed.
Once the event log is accessed, the most recent event is displayed. The B key steps backwards in time through the log, while the A key moves forward in time. Holding down either key quickly steps through the dates until the required date is found. When a selected date is on display the events of that day and previous days can be viewed by repeatedly pressing the B key; events on subsequent days are viewed by repeatedly pressing the A key.
The event log is wrapped round from beginning to end. The message START or END (depending on whether the A key or the B key is being pressed) is briefly displayed when the wraparound is passed through.
The following information is detailed in the event log:
•
•
•
•
• time - time that event occurred; date - day and date that event occurred;
• event - information about the type of event that occurred. Certain events are displayed with a +
(positive — indicating that the event started or was activated) or – (negative — indicating that the event ended or was terminated) symbol;
• user - alternates between the name and number of the user who initiated the event. If the event is one that is not associated with a user code, for example, an alarm activation or a Final zone closing, then no user information is displayed.
Pressing the # key while viewing the log can reveal additional information about certain event types:
User events reveal the keypad, user level and user group involved in the event;
Alarm events reveal the zone descriptor, if programmed.
Walk tested RF zones reveal the measured signal strength of each RF device.
K = Keypad
AB Line
10:24 SUN 01 JAN
K10 L7
Level of User Code
Keypad Address
18
Galaxy Programming Manual
23 - System
NOTES:
1.
Where two identical events occur within 1 second, only one is logged.
2.
Only the first occurrences of high resistance and low resistance events on each day are logged.
Subsequent activations are ignored until midnight of the same day. This is to prevent the log from being filled with high and low resistance activations from a faulty zone.
The event log can be printed while accessing the Display Log option. Pressing the ✴ key while displaying an event starts the printout from the displayed event and goes back to the first event. The esc key aborts the print out.
NOTE: A serial printer must be connected to the Galaxy panel via a printer interface module or an RS232 interface module.
Option 23 – System (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
This option provides a quick overview of the system configuration; two lines of information are displayed at a time - the A and B keys are used to scroll through the entire list:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• Groups
Group status use the A and B keys to scroll through groups A1–8 , B1–8 , C1–8 and D1–8
U = Unset, S = Set, P = Part set and L = Locked-out for each of the groups displayed;
•
NOTE: Enabling the Show Status option (refer to option 58 = KEYPADS ) allows the group set status to be displayed from the normal banner (when the system is set or unset) by pressing the ✴ and # keys simultaneously.
Type Galaxy 8, 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 or 512;
Version
RIOs fitted version of software in Galaxy panel; includes the on-board RIOs;
Codes used
Keypads fitted includes the manager, engineer and remote codes;
1–16 (Galaxy 8, 18, 60 & 128), 1–31 (Galaxy 500, 504 & 512);
Comms modules 1-4 (Telecom, RS232, ISDN, Ethernet);
Printer 0–1 (Printer Interface Module);
Max Modules gives the number of Max/MicroMAX/MAX 3 modules on the system;
Panel location up to 16 characters of text entered in System Text parameter (option 51.15.2
).
19
24 - Print
Galaxy Programming Manual
Option 24 – Print (Quick Menu Option 5)
NOTE: A serial printer must be connected to the Galaxy panel via a printer interface module or an RS232 interface module.
This option allows one of the four listed options to be printed. Only information corresponding to the groups assigned to the user is printed.
1.
Codes – user number and name, level and groups assigned;
NOTE: only the manager can print out the user PINS; the Print Codes parameter (option 51.23
) must be enabled (default is disabled).
2.
Zones – address, function, group (if group mode is enabled), status, descriptor (if assigned), status of the chime, omit and part attributes, the RIO voltage and the zone resistance in Ohms;
3.
Log – all events in the log, starting with the most recent and working backwards;
4.
All – codes, zones and log details respectively.
The required option is selected by pressing the appropriate key 1-4 . The printing begins immediately and can be aborted by pressing esc .
20
Galaxy Programming Manual
25 - Access Doors
Option 25 – Access Doors
NOTE: If the MAX mode has not been enabled (refer to option 63.2 = OPTIONS.MAX) the message No
Entries is displayed on entering this option.
Accessing this option when the MAX mode is enabled and there are MAX modules connected to the system displays the address and descriptor details of the first MAX module on the system. Press the A and B keys to view details of the other MAX modules on the system.
If there are no MAX modules attached to the system the message None Detected is displayed.
The MAX/MicroMAX/MAX 3 log size mirrors the panel event log size. For example, the Galaxy 60 has a
MAX/MicroMAX/MAX 3 log size of 300 events, and the Galaxy 500 has a MAX/MicroMAX/MAX 3 log size of 500 events. Full details of the MAX/MicroMAX/MAX 3 log sizes for each panel type are given in Galaxy
Installation Manual, Appendix B, Panel Comparisons (part number II1-0030).
MAX/MicroMAX/MAX 3 events are transmitted using Contact ID, SIA and Alarm Monitoring formats.
MAX/MicroMAX/MAX 3 events transmitted are listed in the table that follows:
E v e n t
A c c e s s
G r a n t e d
I n v a il d C a r d
C a r d
R e j e c t e d
D e s c r i p t i o n S I A C o d e
C I D
C o d e
T r i g g e r
V a il d c a r v a il d a t e d d p r e s e n t e d a n d
C a r d b e e n p r e s e n t e d h a s p s y s t e m r o g r a m m e d n o t o n t o
V a il d r e j e c t c a r d e d f o r p r e s e n t s o m e e d r e a
, b s o u t n
D G
D D
D K
4 2 1
4 2 2
4 2 2
M A X T A G S
M A X T A G S
M A X T A G S
Table 3. Max/MicroMAX/MAX 3 Events
M o d N o U s e r I D
Y e s
Y e s
Y e s
Y e s
N o
Y e s
Access Log Print and Store Option
The Access Doors (MAX/MicroMAX Log) is printed on-line and stored in the event memory.
The Access Door Log print displays in the format of the Event Log and allows information to be accessed.
The format is as follows:
HH:MM_XXXXXXXXXX_USR_NNN_UUUUUU_MYY_—_ (39 character display)
HH:MM = time in hour:minutes (5 characters). The date will be printed only at the beginning of every day, that is midnight.
XXXXXXXXXX = access message (10 character) Valid, Invalid Vard, Reject Card
USR = User (3 characters)
NNN = User number to which MAX card is assigned (3 characters)
UUUUUU = User descriptor (6 characters)
M = MAX reader address (1 character)
YY = MAX physical address-M10, M24 etc (3 characters)
(dash) = unused character slot
__ (underscore) = this represents a space and is not printed or displayed in the access log.
For example: A valid card read at MicroMAX/MAX 3 30 from the card held by user 020, name Albert, at
13:48 would be:-
13:48 Valid USR 020 Albert M30 –
21
25 - Access Doors (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
Access Door MicroMAX/MAX
3
LED Status
When the access doors option is entered in engineering mode the MAX address can be displayed by pressing the # key. This feature includes displaying the MicroMAX address using the MicroMAX LED format. This is shown in the following Figure graphically for both a MAX and a MicroMAX address as 26.
MicroMAX LEDs Displayed
M A X 2 6
MAX LEDs Displayed
M A X 2 6
Top (unused)
Bottom
Figure 1. LED Status
The line numbers are represented by the top row in MAX and blocks 2 nd and 3 rd from the top in the
MicroMAX and the address numbers are represented by the bottom row of blocks in the MAX and the four bottom blocks in the MicroMAX. The top LED on the MicroMAX is always off in this mode.
The combinations are shown in the following Figure :-
2
3
4
1
Line No.
Module Address
0
4
5
6
1
2
3
7
Figure 2. Line Number/Module Address
Address
The first digit of the two digit number refers to the line that the module is connected to (line 1 on Galaxy 18 &
60, lines 1-2 on Galaxy 128, and lines 1–4 on the Galaxy 500, 504 & 512); the second digit is the physical address number of the MAX module. For example, a MAX module displaying as 25 indicates that the module is on line 2 and is addressed as 5 .
Pressing the # key gives a graphic representation of the MAX address in a binary format. The top two boxes on the top row indicate the line address; the bottom four boxes indicate the physical address.
Descriptor
The descriptor is a maximum of 16 characters entered in the MAX Parameters option ( 63.2.3
)
Engineer Mode
On accessing the Access Doors option in engineering mode, each on-line MAX module displays its address by lighting the appropriate LEDs. To help the engineer identify each of the MAX modules, the keypad displays a graphic representation of the MAX module address. By matching the (LED off) and (LED on) image to the LEDs on the MAX, the engineer can identify each MAX module on the system.
22
Galaxy Programming Manual
25 - Access Doors (cont’d)
MAX/MicroMAX/MAX
3
Log
The MAX log stores proximity card events from the microMAX/MAX 3 card readers.
To display the events in the MAX log, use the A or B keys to select the required MAX address then press the ent key. The first event that occurred on the selected MAX is displayed along with details of the time, date and MAX number.
To view the log press the A key to move forward in time through the events or the B key to move backwards.
Press the esc key to return to the MAX address display. To view the log of another MAX, use the A or B key to select the required address. To escape form the Access Doors option press the esc key.
Time and date of event
02:25 SUN OCT
USR032 Valid
MAX user number Event type
23
24
Galaxy Programming Manual
Galaxy Programming Manual
31 - Walk Test
Section 6: Test Options
Option 31 – Walk Test (Quick Menu Option 6)
The Walk Test option offers two methods of testing zones.
1.
Test All Zones : This option initiates a walk test that includes all zones that have the omit attribute enabled (refer to option 52 = PROGRAM ZONES ). When selected, the walk test starts immediately. The message NO ENTRIES is displayed if all zones are non-omittable when selecting All Zones. Non-omittable zones are not included in this test and remain active throughout the test.
2.
Selected Zones: This test option allows the user to select any zones, irrespective of function type, for walk testing. As many zones as necessary may be added to the list before starting the test. On entering this option the details of the first zone are displayed. Each zone required for test can be selected using the A or B keys or by entering the zone number. Press the # to toggle the test status of each zone in the Walk Test: the test status of the zone changes to TEST if it is included in the test and # = TEST if it is not. When all the required zones have been selected, press the ent key to start the walk test.
Press the ✴ key to include all zones in the Selected Zones walk test, without having to individually select the zones. Once all zones are selected, the # key can be used to remove selected zones from the test.
NOTE: PA, PA Silent, PA Delay, PA Silent Delay and Fire are not included in the test when the ✴ key is used to include all zones.
The response times of the zone circuits are reduced to 60 msecs for the duration of the walk test to facilitate the detection of loose connections or damaged wiring.
Once the walk test has started, opening a zone (or a zone that is open at the start of the test) activates outputs programmed as Entry/Exit Horn . If a single zone is open, the keypad displays the address and function of the zone. If multiple zones are open, then the keypad indicates how many zones are open; the open zones can be viewed by pressing the A or B keys.
NOTE: The Walk Test option does not display the status of the zones. If an open zone is included in the walk test, the Entry/Exit Horn will activate as soon as the test is started and remains active until the zone is closed.
While the walk test is active the message WALK TEST ACTIVE / ESC to abort is displayed; press the # key to view all zones that have been walk tested so far. To return to the walk test press the # key again.
NOTE: RF zones will also record the signal strength in reduced gain mode.
Ending the Walk Test
To terminate the walk test, press the esc key. The test will terminate automatically if no zones are activated for
20 minutes.
The results of the test can be viewed by accessing the event log (refer to option 22 = DISPLAY LOG ). The start of the walk test is indicated by the display WALK TEST + ; each zone that was tested is recorded (the activation of each zone is recorded only once during the test — even if it was opened several times); the end of the test is indicated by WALK TEST – .
25
32 - Outputs
Galaxy Programming Manual
Option 32 – Outputs
Outputs are tested by function: for example, when 01 = BELLS is selected, then all outputs programmed as
Bells are activated. Refer to option 53 = PROGRAM OUTPUT for a full description of each output function.
On selecting the Outputs option, output function type 01 = BELLS is offered for selection. Press the A or B keys to move to the required output function type. Alternatively, the function type number can be entered directly, for example entering 13 selects SECURITY . To test the selected output function press the ent key.
The ent key can be used to toggle the function ON and OFF as required. To escape from the Outputs option, press the esc key.
Users
User codes 5 & 6 only have access to 01 = BELLS and 02 = STROBE of the Output option. Only the engineer has access to all the output types.
26
Galaxy Programming Manual
41 - Time/Date
Section 7: Modify Options
Option 41 – Time/Date (Quick Menu Option 7)
Galaxy 8, 18, 60, 128, 500 & 504
The Time/Date option can be accessed and modified by level 6 codes, the engineer and the remote code.
Galaxy 512
The Time/Date option can be accessed by users, the engineer and the remote code, however, users can only view the current time and date. Only the engineer and the remote code can modify the time and date. If any groups are locked (refer to option 49 = Datelock ), then the time and date cannot be modified.
Modifying the Time and Date
The Time/Date option allows the system time and date to be modified. On entering this option the display prompts for selection A = TIME B = DATE . Press the A key to select the time option; this allows a new time to be entered. The time must be a valid four digit number — in the 24 hour format (hh:mm). The entry, if valid, will be accepted immediately and the display is returned to the selection screen. Press the B key to select the date option; this allows a new date to be entered. The date must be a valid 6 digit number - in the day, month and year format (dd/mm/yy). The date entry, if valid, will be accepted immediately and the display is returned to the selection screen.
NOTE: The time and date can be modified when groups are set.
Adjusting the Clock Speed
Variations in the accuracy of the clock speed can be compensated by pressing the # key while the A = TIME
B = DATE selection screen in the Time/Date menu is displayed. The keypads prompts for the Adjustment/
Week , in seconds, to be entered; the range is 0 – 120 seconds. If the clock requires to gain time, enter the required number of seconds. If the clock requires to lose time, enter the required number of seconds and press the ✴ key; the ✴ retards the clock speed.
27
42 - Codes
Galaxy Programming Manual
Option 42 – Codes (Quick Menu Option 8)
The Codes option is used to assign, modify and delete the codes that allow users to operate and access the system. The Codes option is divided into three sub-menus:
1.
User Codes — sub-divided into up to 10 menus (depending on panel used and whether the group and
MAX mode options are enabled) that determine all of the access information for users who are requiring
PINs. This option also assigns MAX details to user numbers;
2.
PIN Warning — ( Galaxy 128, 500, 504 & 512) determines the warning period given to users prior to the programmed PIN Change date (refer to option 51.42 = PARAMETER.PIN Change );
3.
MAX Users (V3 and earlier) — this option is only available if the MAX mode is enabled. The option is subdivided into 2 menus that assign the MAX card to users who do not have a PIN assigned.
Programming Codes
1 = User Codes 1 = Modify Pin
2 = Modify Level
3 = Modify Name
4 = Time Zone
5 = Temp Code
6 = Modify Groups
(not G8)
7 = MAX Number
8 = MAX Function
9 = MAX Keypad
10 = Forgive
Antipassback
4, 5 or 6 digit pin
1 - 6
6 alpha-numeric characters
0 = Off
1 = Timer A
2 = Timer B
3 = Timer A+B
00-99 days
G18: 1-3
G60: 1-4
G128: 1-8
G500: 1-16
G504: 1-32
G512: 1-32
10 digit number on MAX card or fob number of required menu option address of keypad that MAX function displays on
This function clears passback restrictions
2 = PIN Warning
3 = MAX Users 1 = MAX Number
2 = Groups
1 - 28 days
10 digit number on the MAX card
G18: 1-3
G60: 1-4
G128: 1-8
G500: 1-16
G504: 1-32
G512: 1-32
Figure 3. Programming Codes
28
Galaxy Programming Manual
42 - Codes (cont’d)
Default Codes
The Galaxy system provides 3 default codes: Manager, Engineer and Remote User. Refer to the following
Table:
M a n a g e r E n g i n e e r R e m o t e
G a l a x y N o .
o f C o d e s
D e f a u l t P I N U s e r N o .
D e f a u l t P I N U s e r N o .
D e f a u l t P I N U s e r N o .
5 0 0
5 0 4
5 1 2
8
1 8
6 0
1 2 8
5 0 0
9 9 9
9 9 9
5 0
1 0 0
2 0 0
2 5 0
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
4 9 8
9 9 7
9 9 7
4 8
9 8
1 9 8
2 4 8
1 1 2 2 3 3
1 1 2 2 3 3
1 1 2 2 3 3
1 1 2 2 3 3
1 1 2 2 3 3
1 1 2 2 3 3
# 1 1 2 2 3 3
4 9 9
9 9 8
9 9 8
4 9
9 9
1 9 9
2 4 9
5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
5 4 3 2 1 0
5 0 0
9 9 9
9 9 9
5 0
1 0 0
2 0 0
2 5 0
Table 4. Default Codes
•
•
•
Engineer Code
The engineer code can only modify the engineer PIN; all other engineer User Code options are fixed;
The engineer code cannot assign, modify or delete the manager or user codes;
On accessing engineering mode, any group that is set becomes inaccessible to the engineer. The set groups cannot be assigned to zones, outputs and any other functions permitting group allocation;
NOTE: If the Galaxy 8 is set, then the engineer cannot gain access to engineer mode.
•
•
While engineer mode is accessed, all tampers are disabled, however, all constantly alert zone types — PA zone types, 24 Hour , Security , Fire — remain active.
The engineer banner is shown on all keypads while engineer mode is being accessed; the message ENGINEER MODE is displayed;
(Galaxy 8, 18, 60, 128, 500 & 504)
The first entry of the engineer code activates a tamper alarm. The second entry of the code cancels this alarm and accesses engineer mode.
NOTE: This dual code entry is only valid if the engineer does not have a # assigned against a PIN number.
Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512
The Galaxy 512 engineer code is allocated a # is fixed by default. With the # assigned, entry to the engineer mode must be authorised by a valid level 6 user (refer to option 48 = ENGINEER ACCESS ). The engineer code must then be entered within five minutes of the option being enabled. A single entry of the engineer code directly accesses engineer mode, without activating an engineer tamper alarm; ENGINEER MODE is displayed on the keypad. If the engineer code is not entered within the five minute period, the code is invalid and an Access Denied message is displayed on the keypad. Once the engineer mode has been accessed, there is no time limit on the period that the engineer can remain in the mode.
NOTE: Dual entry of the engineer code in a system requiring user authorisation does not give access to engineer mode.
29
42 - Codes (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
Escaping from Engineer Mode
1.
Return to the engineer banner.
2.
Enter the engineer code
3.
Press the esc key
The Galaxy begins the exit engineer mode procedure by checking the integrity and security of the system:
• CHECKING FOR TAMPERS — if a Smart PSU is connected to the system, the panel calculates that the standby battery connected to it is capable of operating the system for the required period (as entered in the Standby Battery parameter — refer to option 51.37
). The system then verifies that there are no tamper conditions present on the panel, the modules or the zones.
• SYSTEM MODULES — if there are no tamper conditions the Galaxy checks the number of modules connected to the system:
• If no modules have been added or removed, “ NO MODULES ADDED, ESC TO CONTINUE” is displayed. Pressing esc returns the system to the normal banner.
• If modules have been removed they are reported as missing; the engineer is prompted to view the missing modules and to remove them from the system by pressing the ✴ ; a warning is given before the module is removed. Press the ent key to confirm the removal of the module. Once all missing modules are removed, the Galaxy reports the previous and current number of modules connected to the system, before returning to the normal banner.
• If modules have been added, the Galaxy reports the previous and current number of modules connected to the system, before returning to the normal banner.
If the esc key is pressed at any time during the exit engineer mode procedure, the procedure is aborted and the Galaxy returns to the engineer mode. This return may take several seconds to complete.
Galaxy 512
The engineer is prevented from exiting from engineer mode if a PA zone is open.
Manager Code
The manager is authorised to:
• program the User Code options of each of the user codes;
• allocate other codes to the manager level (6);
• modify the manager PIN — the manager PIN cannot be deleted — and assign the MAX features to the code.
NOTE: Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500 & 504 — t he manager PIN can be reset to the default code (1234) by the engineer and remote code using the Reset Mgr ( Manager ) parameter (refer to option 51.21
).
The manager code defaults to group choice when groups are enabled. The manager is able to toggle the group choice option on and off (using the ✴ key) as required.
30
Galaxy Programming Manual
42 - Codes (cont’d)
Galaxy 8 & 18
The manager code defaults to accessing the quick menu (option 0 – 9). Refer to option 59 = Quick Menu .
To access the full menu, assign a ✴ to the manager in the Modify Level option.
Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512
The manager code defaults to accessing the full menu (option 11 – 68). To access the quick menu (options 0 –
9), remove the ✴ assigned to the manager in the Modify Level option.
C o n t r o l P a n e l
G 8
G 1 8
G 6 0
G 1 2 8
G 5 0 0
G 5 0 4
U s e r C o d e s
5 0
1 0 0
2 0 0
2 5 0
5 0 0
9 9 9
G 5 1 2 9 9 9
Table 5. Control Panel/Codes
Programming Codes
1 = User Codes
Enter the Codes option; 1=User Codes is displayed. Press the ent key; details of the first user ( User 001 ) are displayed. Each of the users can be displayed using the A and B keys, or a specific user can be selected by entering the required user number, for example 023, 069. When the required code is displayed, press the ent key to select the user codes modification options; 1=Modify PIN is displayed. The available modification options can be viewed by pressing the A or B keys; press the ent key to select the required option. The options are detailed in the following paragraphs:
31
42 - Codes (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
1 = Modify PIN
The PIN identifies each user to the Galaxy panel and permits the user to operate the system. The Modify
PIN option allows a PIN to be assigned to the user or an existing PIN to be modified. The PIN must be a four, five or six digit number that is unique to the system. If a duplicate PIN is assigned, the message
INVALID SELECTION is displayed; the PIN is not assigned to the user. As each digits is entered it appears on the lower line of the display. Pressing the ✴ key erases the last digit displayed; continued pressing of the ✴ key will erase all of the digits. When the correct PIN has been assigned press the ent key to accept the programming and, if a MAX No. is assigned the display will prompt: delete max no. A = YES, B = NO and return to the previous menu level. When a PIN has been assigned to a user number, a solid box ( ■ ) is displayed on the top line of the user number details screen.
Deleting a PIN
Existing PIN entries can be completely erased by using the ✴ key instead of a digit entry. When there is no
PIN assigned to a user number a hollow square ( ) is displayed on the top line of the user number details screen.
Assigning Dual Codes
To program a user code as a Dual Code press the # key while the Modify PIN option is selected. The # displays at the start of the assigned user PIN ( #1314 ). When a PIN has been assigned as a dual code 2 solid boxes ( ■ ■ ) are displayed on the top line of the user number details screen.
NOTE: The Master manager code can not be assigned as dual.
Dual Codes Operation (Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
Entry of a single dual code can not gain access to the menu, set or unset the system. The message NO AC-
CESS – ADDITIONAL CODE is displayed. A second dual code must be entered within 60 seconds of the first dual code to access the menu, set or unset the system. Dual codes can be different levels, the highest level entered is granted access to the system — whether it is entered first or second.
A single entry of a dual code - without a second dual code entry within 60 seconds - is recorded in the event log as an Illegal Code ; all outputs programmed as Illegal Code are activated.
2 = Modify Level
Dual Focus (V4 and above)
If a MAX number for the same user has a # assigned the dual function only works between the PIN and the
MAX card of the same user.
2=Modify Level
Each user is assigned an access level which determines the menu options available to the user. The programmable levels are from 0 - 6; 7 is assigned to the engineer level — this is fixed and cannot be assigned to user codes; 8 is assigned to the remote code. This is fixed and cannot be assigned to the engineer or user codes, keypad (E) only.
On selecting this option, enter the level to be assigned to the user and press the ent key to accept the programming and return to the previous menu level.
32
Galaxy Programming Manual
42 - Codes (cont’d)
0 †
L e v e l
G u a r d
A c c e s s A v a i l a b i l i t y
E n t e r e d i n t o e v e n t m e m o r y – n o o t h e r o p t i o n
3
4
1 †
2
C
C l e a r a e t n e a k r e r
C a n
C a n o n l y s e t o n l y s e t t h e s y s t e m a n d u n s e t t h e s y s t e m
5
6 ‡
7 ‡
8 ‡
U s e r s
U s e r s
U
M s e a n r s a g e r
M
M
M
M e e e e n n n n u u u u o o o o p p t p p t t t i i o i o o i o n n s n s s n s
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
-
-
-
1
2
3
4
9
9
9
9
E n g i n e e r
R e m o t e
M
M e e n n u u o o p p t t i o i o n s n s
1
1
1
1
-
-
6
6
8
8
†
‡
N o a
T h e c c e s s m a n a t o g e r , o n t h e s y s t e m ) m e n u f u n c t i o n s e n g i n e e r a n d r e h a v e f i x e d l e v e l s m o t e c w h i c h o d c a e s n n
( t o t h e l a s t t h r e e c o d e s b e r e p r o g r a m m e d .
Table 6. User Access Levels
Duress Code (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
If the # key is pressed while the Modify Level option is accessed, then the current user code is assigned as a
Duress Code . Entry of a Duress Code at any time activates any output programmed as Duress (refer to option 53 = OUTPUTS ). There is no limit to the number of codes that can be assigned as Duress Codes .
Entry of any valid user code followed by ## is also a duress code.
Quick Menu
All of the user codes default to the quick menu. This menu is made up of a selection of ten options
(0 – 9) from the full menu options 11 – 68. Access to the quick menu is controlled by the user code level.
Any user can be upgraded from the quick menu to the full menu by assigning a ✴ to the user while the
Modify Level option is accessed. Therefore a user with level ✴ 5 would have access to the full menu from options 11 – 39. No code can access both menus.
The engineer can reprogram the options contained in the quick menu (refer to option 59 = QUICK MENU ).
NOTE: The manager code defaults to the quick menu on the Galaxy 8 and 18 but defaults to the full menu on the Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512.
Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512
The engineer can determine the menu option access level (refer to option 68 = MENU ACCESS ); this allows users to access menu options that their code levels are not, by default, authorised to access.
NOTE: Users can only allocate codes up to the level that they have been assigned. A level 4 user cannot assign a user code as level 5.
33
42 - Codes (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
3 = Modify Name
This option allows a name to be assigned to the user (maximum 6 characters). Each of the user codes default to the name USER . The engineer ( ENG ) and manager ( MGR ) are fixed and cannot be reprogrammed. On selecting the Modify Name option, a section of the alpha-numeric characters that can be assigned to the user name is displayed on the bottom line of the keypad; the cursor flashes on the letter L . Press the ✴ key to erase the characters of the default or previous name. When the previous name has been erased, use the A or
B keys to move the cursor to the first character of the name and press the ent key; the selected character appears on the top line. Continue this process until the name is completed.
The # key moves between upper and lower case characters and the system library. The alpha-numeric characters and library words can be selected by entering the character or word reference number (refer to Appendix B — Library ) or by pressing the A or B keys.
NOTE: The Galaxy 8 does not have a library.
When the user name is completed, press the esc key to accept the programming and return to the previous menu level.
4 = Time Zone (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Time Zone option allows the user access to be restricted to operate only within the periods programmed in Timer A and/or Timer B (refer to option 65 = TIMERS ).
On selecting this option enter the number (0 – 3) of the Time Zone to be assigned to the user and press the ent key to accept the selection and return to the previous menu level.
S e l e c t i o n T i m e r C o d e s R e s t r i c t i o n
0
1
2
3
O F F
( D e f a u l t )
T i m e r A
C o d e s a n d c a r d s a r e a l w a y s o p e r a t i o n a l .
T i m e r B
C o d e s t h e T i m a n e r d
A c a r d s
O N a a r n d e i n o
O F F p e r a t i m t i v e e .
b e t w e e n
C t h o d e e
T s i m a e n r d
B c a r d s
O N a a r n d e
O i n o
F F p e r a t i m t i v e e .
b e t w e e n
T i m e r A + B C t h o d e e
T s i m a e n r d
A c a r d s a n d B a r e
O N i n o p e r a t i v e a n d O F F b e t t i m e .
w e e n
Table 7. Time Zone Restrictions for Users
Codes or cards if programmed do not operate during the assigned time zone ( ON to OFF ). The times assigned to Timer A and Timer B can be viewed using option 45.3 = TIMER CONTROL.View
.
If a user that has been assigned to 1=Timer A , 2=Timer B or 3=Timer A+B attempts access outwith the assigned times, then an Illegal Code event is recorded in the log and any outputs programmed as Illegal
Code are activated.
34
Galaxy Programming Manual
42 - Codes (cont’d)
5 = Temporary Codes (Galaxy 128, 500, 504 & 512)
Temporary Codes allows a PIN to be temporarily allocated to a user. On selecting this option, enter the number of days (0 – 99) that the code is to remain active. The default setting of 0 indicates that the code is permanent. A temporary code expires and is removed from the codes list at midnight after the assigned number of days. A code that has been assigned as a Temporary Code is indicated on the user code display by a ^ between the user number and the user name, for example 001^USER .
NOTE: The manager, engineer, or remote codes cannot be assigned as Temporary Codes .
PIN Change (Galaxy 128, 500, 504 & 512)
If a user is assigned the PIN Change feature in the Temporary Code option, the user must assign a new PIN after a predetermined period — refer to option 51.42 = PARAMETERS.PIN Change — otherwise the user PIN expires and is no longer operational.
To program a user code to prompt for a PIN change select the Temporary Code and press the ✴ key instead of entering a number of days for a temporary code; press the ent key to accept the programming and return to the previous menu level. A code that has been assigned as a PIN Change code is indicated on the used code display with a ✴ between the user number and the user name, for example 001 ✴ USER .
The
Manager, Engineer, or Remote codes cannot be assigned as PIN Change Codes .
If the value entered in the PIN Change parameter is 0 then the code is assigned as a permanent PIN — a warning message is briefly displayed to indicate that a Pin Change will not be requested. However, if PIN
Change is within the range 1 – 12, then the number entered is number of months after which the code must be changed, otherwise it expires.
NOTE: The PIN expires on the first day of the following month.
A notification (1 – 28 days) that the PIN requires to be changed can be assigned using the PIN Warning option (refer to option 42.2) ; this prompts the user to assign a new code whenever the expiring code is entered - except when the system is unsetting - for the number of days in the PIN Warning before the day the
PIN expires. The new PIN must be six digits and must be different from any current PIN including the user’s existing one. The new PIN must be re-entered and, if confirmed, the user is returned to the banner. If the esc key is pressed or the new PIN entered is invalid, the user may continue to use the panel as normal; the next entry of the PIN will prompt for the PIN change.
NOTE: If the user has not assigned a new PIN by the end of the PIN Warning period, then the code is erased on the next unsetting of the system.
6 = Modify Group (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
This option determines the system groups that the user has access to and operational control over. The
Modify Groups option is only available when the group mode is enabled (Galaxy 500, 504 & 512).
The Galaxy 500, 504 and 512 have more than 8 groups; these are displayed on the keypad in blocks of eight groups. Press A or B keys to display each of the group blocks.
Press keys 1 – 8 to assign the relevant groups in each block to the user.
Code has been enabled (refer to option 63.1 = OPTIONS.Groups
); the system defaults to groups disabled.
35
42 - Codes (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
On selecting the Modify Groups option, the groups currently allocated to the user are displayed. All user default to group 1. Pressing the group number toggles the group assigned to the user; pressing 2 and 3 assign groups 2 and 3 to the user; pressing 1 (when group 1 is already assigned) removes group 1 from the user code. To assign group choice to the user, press the ✴ key. When the required groups have been assigned to the user, press the ent key to accept the programming and return to the previous menu level.
Galaxy 500, 504 & 512
The Galaxy 500, 504 and 512 have more than 8 groups; these are displayed on the keypad in blocks of eight groups. Press the A or B key to display each of the group blocks.
Press keys 1 – 8 to assign the relevant groups in each block to the user.
G r o u p B l o c k
A 1 8
B 1 8
C 1 8
P h y s i c a l G r o u p s
1 8
9 1 6
1 7 2 4
D 1 8 2 5 3 2
Table 8. Groups
Group Options
Single Group A user can be assigned to any single group. In this case the level 2 and above user can only access, set and unset the single group.
Multiple Groups Users can be allocated to more than one group in which case access and operation is collective; the user cannot choose to operate on a single or combination of the assigned groups.
Group Choice Users can be allocated more than one group but also have the choice of which of the allocated groups to view , set or unset. Pressing the ✴ key while assigning groups to the user assigns the group choice feature.
NOTES:
1.
The manager, engineer and remote codes have fixed access to all system groups; this cannot be reprogrammed
2.
The manager, engineer and remote codes are assigned group choice by default. The manager can have the group choice feature removed; the engineer and remote codes have fixed group choice.
3.
Users authorised to access Option 42 = CODES , can only assign the groups that have been assigned to their user code; A user who does not have access to group 4, cannot assign group 4 to another user code.
7 = MAX Number
The MAX Number contains one of the following:
• the 10 digit number etched onto the MicroMAX/MAX 3 card/fob/tag
• a number generated by the RF RIO identifying an RF Keyfob button
• the decrypted code of cards/tags self learned into the system for use with the keyprox.
These numbers identify the card/tag/fob to the system and references it to the user it has been assigned to.
36
Galaxy Programming Manual
42 - Codes (cont’d)
Each MAX Number defaults to 0000000000 (ten zero’s):
To enter the required number:
1.
press and hold the B key until the zeros are deleted;
2.
enter the unique 10 digit number laser etched onto the MAX/MicroMAX card/Fob tag or enter the unique RF keyfob button identifier generated by the RF RIO (refer to RF RIO programming instructions II1-0076 for details) or press the A and 1 keys simultaneously of the KeyProx and present the card/fob to the KeyProx reader within 5 seconds. The decrypted number in the card will be self learned onto the Galaxy panel and displayed on the KeyProx.
3.
press the ent key to save the programming and return to the previous menu level.
NOTE: A MAX number can be assigned to a user code that does not have a PIN allocated to it. All other options assigned to this user are valid for the card/fob/tag button programmed.
8 = MAX Function
The card/fob/tag/button can be assigned a single menu option. The user must be authorised to access the menu option assigned to the MAX - either by the user level assigned or menu option 68 = Menu Access .
The default option is Not Used . A new option is assigned by pressing the A or B key until the required option is displayed or by entering the option number directly and then pressing the ent to accept the selection.
9 = MAX Keypad
The menu option assigned to the MAX card can be limited to operate on a single keypad. On selecting this option the display shows ✴✴ , indicating that a keypad has not been specified. To specify a keypad, press the
# key. The address of the first keypad on the system is displayed. Use the A or B key to select the required keypad and press the ent key to accept the selection.
NOTE: The address of the keypad that is currently being used is indicated by a black square flashing over the first digit of the keypad address.
“Card-Held” Operation
The programmed MAX function is activated when either,
•
• the card/fob /tag is held continuously in front of the MAX/MicroMAX/KeyProx reader for 3 seconds or the programmed RF keyfob button is pressed. It should be noted that if button 1 of the RF keyfob is programmed as a setting function, button 2 will automatically become the unset action, as long as button 2 has been programmed for MAX operation on the RF RIO.
If using a MAX/MicroMAX or KeyProx the reader or KeyProx must be assigned a common group to the user. The keypad specified in option 9 = MAX Keypad displays the assigned MAX function.
Assigning Dual Functions to MAX Numbers (V4 and above)
If a card has a # assigned to the number, then any card-held function will only work in conjunction with the
PIN from the same user, provided that the PIN has a # assigned also. The Dual Focus function will work in either order, but if the card is presented first, it will simply enable the PIN to gain access to the normal menu
(see option 42 = Codes for programming).
37
42 - Codes (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
If a user’s card number is assigned a *, then the card becomes Dual access. This means that it will not open the door on its own; it needs another PIN or card as well. If the PIN belonging to the same user has a # assigned, then that PIN must be entered first before access will be granted to that card.
If the PIN has no # assigned, then the card will work only in conjunction with any other Dual Access card that shares one or more groups (see option 42 = Codes for programming).
10 = Forgive Antipassback (V4 and above)
This function if selected clears all antipassback restrictions for the selected user.
2 = PIN Warning (Galaxy 128, 500, 504 & 512)
This option determines the number of days notification before the PIN Change expiry date (refer to option
51.42 = PARAMETERS.PIN Change ) that the user is prompted to assign new code on entry of the expiring PIN. The default period is 28 days, with a programmable range of 1 – 28 . If the user does not assign a new code by the end of the PIN Warning period, then the code is erased on the next unsetting of the system.
NOTE: The PIN Warning ends on the last day of the month, the PIN expires on the first day of the following month.
3 = MAX Users
Note: This option does not apply to V4 and above software.
This option is used to assign additional MAX users to the system without allocating PINs; MAX users are only authorised to operate the Access Control functions of the MAX modules.
Enter the Codes option and select 3=MAX Users . Press the ent key; the first MAX user number (User 501) is displayed. Each of the users can be displayed using the A and B keys, or a specific user can be selected by entering the required user number, for example 223, 469. When the required code is displayed, press the ent key; the 1 = MAX Number option is displayed.
1 = MAX Number
The MAX number assigned to the MAX user identifies the MAX card to the system and references it to the
MAX user.
Each MAX Number defaults to 0000000000 (ten zero’s):
1.
press and hold the B key until the zeros are deleted;
2.
enter the unique 10 digit number laser etched onto the MAX card;
3.
press the ent key to save the programming and return to the previous menu level.
When a MAX number has been assigned to a MAX user number, a solid box ( ■ ) is displayed on the top line of the MAX user number details screen.
2 = Groups
This option assigns group access to the MAX user. The MAX user must be assigned a group that is common to the MAX module to permit the access control functions to operate. If the MAX user does not have access to the group assigned to the module, then the access control functions are denied. The Modify Groups option is only available when the group mode has been enabled (refer to option
63.1 = OPTIONS.Groups
); the system defaults to groups disabled.
38
Galaxy Programming Manual
43 - Summer/44 - Trace
On selecting the Modify Groups option, the groups currently allocated to the user are displayed. All user default to group 1. Pressing the group number toggles the group assigned to the user; pressing 2 and 3 assign groups 2 and 3 to the user; pressing 1 (when group 1 is already assigned) removes group 1 from the user code; press the ent key to accept the programming and return to the previous menu level.
Galaxy 500, 504 & 512
The Galaxy 500, 504 and 512 have more than 8 groups; these are displayed on the keypad in blocks of eight groups. Press A or B keys to display each of the group blocks .
Press keys 1 – 8 to assign the relevant groups in each block to the user.
Option 43 – Summer (Quick Menu Option 9)
The Daylight Savings Time is in accordance with European standards. The Daylight Savings time is described as follows:
On the first day of each year, the British Summer Time (BST) Start date is set to the last Sunday in March and the End date is set to the last Sunday in October.
The operation of the Summer option is as follows: at 01:00 hours (GMT) on the Start date, the system clock advances to 02:00 hours (DST); at 02:00 hours (DST) on the End date, the system clock goes back to
01:00 hours (GMT).
NOTE: The time always changes with reference to GMT. For example, Italy, which is +1 hour would be:
Last Sunday in March - 02.00 to 03.00
Last Sunday in October – 03.00 to 02.00
The Start and End dates can be reprogrammed by authorised user codes. Press the A key to modify the
Start date or the B key select the End date; the new date must be a valid 4 digit number - in the day/month format (dd/mm).
Galaxy 512
The Summer option can only be modified by the engineer or remote codes.
Option 44 – Trace (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
This option provides a record of the most recent alarm activation. The Trace option records the details of the setting and unsetting of the system immediately before and after the alarm activation and the first 5 events occurring during the alarm activation. This information is maintained in the trace until the next alarm activation.
On entering the option pressing the A and B keys steps through each of the 7 trace entries.
Pressing the # key while viewing the Trace option displays additional information about certain events — user events reveal the keypad, user level and current group; alarm events reveal the zone descriptor if programmed.
The currently display trace can be printed out by pressing the ✴ key; pressing the esc key aborts the printout.
NOTE: A serial printer must be connected to the Galaxy panel via a printer interface module or an RS232 interface module.
39
45 - Timer Control
Galaxy Programming Manual
Group Mode
If group mode is enabled (refer to option 63 = OPTIONS ), there is a separate trace for the most recent alarm activation in each of the groups. On selecting the Trace option, a user with group choice (refer to option
42 = CODES ) can view the trace of the assigning groups; press the number of the group to be displayed — the N below the selected group changes to a Y — and then press the ent key.
If more than one group is selected, or the user does not have group choice, then the trace for the group with the most recent alarm activation is displayed.
Option 45 – Timer Control (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
1 = View
This option allows the programmed times in each of the Timers to be viewed:
1.
Timer A;
2.
Timer B;
3.
Autoset (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512);
4.
Lockout (Galaxy 512).
Use the A and B keys to scroll through each of the programmed times.
NOTE: The programmed times cannot be modified using this option.
All of the programmed timers - Timer A , Timer B , Autoset and Timelock - can be printed out using option
57.11 = SYSTEM PRINT.Timers
.
2 = Holidays
This function allows up to ten holiday periods to be allocated. A Start and End date is entered for each holiday period using the 1 = Modify Dates option, and the groups that are affected by the programmed holiday periods are assigned using the 2 = Assign Groups function. The operation of all timers for the assigned groups is suspended during these dates; the last operation of the Timers before the start date remains in operation until the first operation after the end date. For example, a code which has been allocated the
Timer A period in the CODES option ( 42.1.4.1
) will be inoperative during the programmed holiday period if the Timer A is in the On time when the holidays starts.
1 = Modify Dates
On selecting this option, the Start and End dates for holiday period 1 are displayed; an arrow ( > ) points to the Start date. If no dates have been entered for this period, then the display shows ✴✴ / ✴✴ . To program the Start date, press the ent key; the date display changes to >DD/MM< ; enter a valid four digit number and press the ent key to accept the selection; the year is not required, only the day and months (dd/mm).
Press the # key to move to the end date and follow the procedure for programming the Start date. The # key toggles between the Start and End dates for each holiday; the arrow ( > ) indicates which date is currently selected.
To remove a programmed date, press the ✴ key. The date display returns to ✴✴ / ✴✴ .
Use the A or B key to move between the different holiday periods or enter the number of the holiday period
( 1 – 10 ) to be programmed.
40
Galaxy Programming Manual
45 - Timer Control (cont’d)
Galaxy 60, 128, 500 & 504
The holiday periods can be programmed by a valid user.
Galaxy 512
The holiday periods can only be programmed by the engineer. Users can access this option, however, they can only view the programmed holiday dates.
2 = Assign Groups
This function determines which of the groups are affected by the programmed holiday periods.
On selecting the Assign Groups option, the groups currently assigned to the programmed holiday periods are indicated by a Y below the group; an N is displayed below the unassigned groups. All groups default to Y.
Pressing the group number toggles the group status. When the required groups have been assigned to the holidays, press the ent key to accept the programming and return to the previous menu level.
Galaxy 512
The Galaxy 500, 504 and 512 have more than 8 groups; these are displayed on the keypad in blocks of eight groups. Press A or B keys to display each of the group blocks.
Press keys 1 – 8 to assign the relevant groups in each block to the user.
3 = Timers (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500 & 504)
This option allows Timer A and Timer B to be switched on and off as required. If a Timer is set to off, the operation of the Timer is suspended; this option cannot be used to alter the programmed times. Both timers default to 0 = Off . To switch the timers on, select the required timer and change the setting to 1 =On .
The Timer Status can also be altered through menu option 65.1 by the engineer only.
Galaxy 512
This option is not available on the Galaxy 512.
4 = Early Open (Galaxy 512)
If the Early Open option ( 45.4.2
) is enabled, the Lockout OFF time (refer to option 65 = TIMERS ) for the following day is brought forward by the number of minutes (0 – 240) programmed in parameter 44 =
Early Open . This allows the system to be manually unset earlier than normal.
1 = Early Times
This function displays the time that the system can be manually unset on the following day; this time is the
Lockout OFF Time minus the Early Open period and is displayed in the 24 hour format.
If groups have been enabled, the early opening time for each of the groups enabled for early opening in the
Early Open option can be viewed by pressing the A or B keys
This function only displays the early time if the Early Open option is enabled; if this option is disabled or if no groups have been enabled, the message NO ENTRIES is displayed.
41
45 - Timer Control (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
2 = Early Open
Level 6 Users and Engineer when Groups are Disabled
If groups have not been enabled on the system, the programming of the Early Open option is identical for
Level 6 users and the engineer; the option permits early opening to be disabled or enabled:
0 = Disabled (default) — early opening not permitted;
1 = Enabled — early opening permitted.
Select the required status and press the ent key to accept the programming and return to the previous menu.
Engineer Mode with Groups Enabled
If groups have been enabled (option 63 = OPTIONS + early open permitted ), then the groups can be individually enabled to permit early opening.
On selecting the option, the early opening status of the groups is displayed; early opening enabled is indicated by a Y below the group; an N is displayed below the groups that are not programmed to open early. All groups default to N .
NOTE: Only the engineer can enable early opening for individual groups, but global enable must be done first.
5 = Late Work
The Late Work option — if programmed as 1 = ON — authorises an Autoset Extension in advance of the prewarning period (refer to option 65.3 = TIMERS.Autoset
);
NOTE: Additional extensions can be authorised by entry of a valid code during the subsequent autoset prewarning periods.
6 = Weekend Work (Galaxy 504 & 512)
The Weekend Work option allows a valid user code to authorise the system to unset at the weekend. If the
Weekend Day is programmed other than 0 = OFF (default), on the next occurrence of the programmed
Weekend Day , the Timers adopt the times they have on the assigned Pattern day . For example, this allows a Sunday to use the Autoset and Lockout Timers of a Monday.
NOTE: Parameter 41 = Weekend Work must be enabled (default is Disabled ) to allow the Pattern Day option to be programmed by the engineer and the Weekend Day to be selected by the user.
On selecting this option, 1 = Program Days is displayed. Press the ent key; 1 = Weekend Day is displayed. Press ent to select this option, or the A or B keys to move between the available options.
42
Galaxy Programming Manual
45 - Timer Control (cont’d)
1 = Weekend Day
On selecting this option the programmed Weekend Day is displayed; the default is 0 = OFF . Use the A or B keys to select the required day or days and press the ent key to accept the programming and return to the previous menu level:
0 = OFF
1 = SAT
2 = SUN
3 = BOTH (Saturday and Sunday)
The selected Weekend Day remains active for one occurrence only. The Weekend Day returns to the default of OFF immediately following the assigned day. The Weekend Day must be allocated each time the function is required.
2 = Pattern Day
The Pattern Day can only be allocated by the engineer. This option determines the programmed timers that are effective when the Weekend Day option is selected by the user; the timers of the selected Pattern Day are adopted by the days selected for weekend work.
On selecting this option the programmed Pattern Day is displayed; the default is 1 = MON . Use the A or B keys to select the required day or days and press the ent key to accept the programming and return to the previous menu level:
1 = MON
2 = TUE
3 = WED
4 = THU
5 = FRI
43
46 - Group Omit
Galaxy Programming Manual
Option 46 – Group Omit (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500 & 504)
This option allows a level 6 user code to block omit all the omittable zones that are open at the end of the confirm time in a group or multiple groups. All zones in the required groups that have the omit attribute enabled (refer to option 52.4 = PROGRAM ZONES.Omit
) are omitted when this option is selected. Groups can be omitted and reinstated without setting and unsetting the system.
On selecting the Group Omit Option the groups assigned to the user code and keypad are displayed as well as the omit status of each group ( Y below the group indicates that it is omitted, N indicates that it is not omitted). To omit a group, press the required key. The letter beneath the group number changes from N to Y . To reinstate the group press the key to toggle from Y to N .
NOTE: The level 6 user must have group choice to enter Group Omit.
NOTE: The zones in the selected groups are omitted from the system as soon as the group is selected.
On returning to the banner (normal or engineer) the keypad displays the message ZONES OMITTED .
Omitted zones remain omitted for one set period only or until they are manually reinstated to the system.
Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500 & 504
Outputs programmed as Zone Omit (mode programmed as reflex) are activated as soon as the zone is omitted and remains active until the zone is reinstated. If the output mode is programmed as latch, then the
Zone Omit outputs activate when the system is set and remain active until the system is unset — reinstating the omitted zones.
44
Galaxy Programming Manual
47 - Remote Access
Option 47 – Remote Access
1. Service
This option enables level six users to control the access mode of the Galaxy Gold remote servicing software.
There are several options available for increased flexibility and security.
NOTE: This option is only available when the Manager Authorise option has been enabled (refer to option 56.1.12 = COMMUNICATIONS. Telecom.Remote Access ). If the option is not enabled, the keypad displays NO ACCESS - OPTION DISABLED .
0 = Telecoms
0 = Direct Access
On selecting this option, a 40 minute access period is enabled on the Galaxy panel; Galaxy Gold software can directly access the system during this period. Once access to the panel has been gained, it can maintained indefinitely; there is no maximum duration. On terminating the Galaxy Gold connection to the panel, the access period remains valid for an additional 15 minutes.
1 – 5 = Call Back 1 – 5
A maximum of five numbers can be preprogrammed by the engineer (refer to option 56.1.12 =
COMMUNICATIONS.Telecom.Remote Access ). On selecting one of the numbers (1 – 5) followed by the ent key, the Galaxy panel dials out to the preprogrammed telephone number associated with the Call
Back number.
If the number selected does not have a preprogrammed telephone number, the system prompts for a number 1 to be entered. Enter the required telephone number and press the ent key; the panel then dials out to the telephone number entered.
NOTE: The PC that the panel is dialling to must have Galaxy Gold running in the Waiting for Call-Back mode. Refer to the Galaxy Gold User Guide (IU1-057).
1 = ISDN
0 = Direct Access (see Telecoms description)
1 – 5 = Call Back 1 – 5 (see Telecoms description) except menu option is 56.3.09
2 = ETHERNET
0 = Direct Access (see Telecoms description)
1 = Call back IP
On selecting this option the IP address programmed in option 56.4.3.2 ETHERNET MGR AUTHORISE will be called.
2. Send Alarms
Option not available
3. Call Galaxy
Option not available
45
48 - Engineer Access
Galaxy Programming Manual
Option 48 – Engineer Access (Galaxy 512 only)
The engineer code is assigned a # in the PIN by default. This prevents the engineer from accessing engineer mode unless authorised to do so by a valid code. To gain access to the engineer menu a level 6 user must enter their code, and enable the Engineer Access option. This provides a 5 minute period during which a single entry of the engineer code provides access to engineering mode without causing a tamper alarm. Once the engineer mode has been accessed, there is no time limit on the access period.
If the Engineer Mode option has not been enabled, or the code is not entered within the 5 minute period, then the Engineer code is invalid and has no effect.
If the PIN is programmed without the #, the Engineer Access option does not require to be enabled to allow the engineer to gain access to engineer mode. The engineer code requires to be entered twice. The first entry activates a tamper alarm which is cancelled by the second entry.
NOTES:
1.
V1.18 or below: Only the remote code can remove the # from the engineer code. Both the engineer and remote codes can assign the # to the code.
2.
Dual entry of the engineer code in a system requiring user authorisation does not give access to engineer mode.
46
Galaxy Programming Manual
49 - Datelock
Option 49 – Datelock (Galaxy 512)
The Datelock option allows the system to be set and prevented from unsetting until the date and time specified by the user. This option can only be accessed by level 6 user codes with access to all groups. The
Datelock menu option can only be accessed if parameter 40 — Datelock has been enabled.
NOTE: This option can only be selected by level 6 users. The level access Datelock cannot be modified using menu option 68 — Menu Access .
On selecting this option the user is prompted to enter the Date (day, month and year) and the Time (hours and minutes) when the panel will be unlocked. The date and time entered must be valid and also be some time in the future - 31/02/96 will be rejected as an invalid date.
The system then prompts for another code (level 3 or above) to be entered to confirm the Date and Time entered by the level 6 user code. To confirm the time and date press the A key ( A = YES ). To reject the programming press the B key ( B = NO ). If the esc key is pressed or a keypad timeout occurs, the
Datelock is cancelled.
Once the second user has confirmed the Date and Time , the system immediately starts to set. If menu option
66.4 = PRE-CHECK.Forced Check is enabled all of the zones on the system must be verified as being operational by opening and closing each zone. This also activates the Vibtest output to pre-check the operation of all Vibration zones before the system sets. Once set, all codes are locked out until the programmed
Datelock date and time. The system can not be unset manually.
During the Datelock period, all outputs programmed as Lockout are active. Once the programmed
Datelock expires the codes are re-enabled. The system can only be unset by entering any 2 valid codes.
During the Datelock period, the system rearms indefinitely. On rearming, any zone that is currently open or has alarmed twice is omitted whether or not it is omittable.
In the event of an alarm occurring, if the Datelock parameter is set to 2 , entry of 2 valid codes with access to all groups will unset the system before the programmed Datelock period has expired.
NOTE: After a warm start, the system removes any outstanding Datelock period to provide a means of cancelling it.
47
51 - Parameters
Galaxy Programming Manual
Section 8: Engineer 1
Option 51 – Parameters
This option allows the engineer to modify the system functions. Options can be selected using the A or B keys or by entering the two digit parameter number and pressing the ent key. The selected options can then be programmed by using the A key to increase or the B key to decrease the values assigned to the parameter; pressing the ent key accepts the new value and returns to the previous menu level. Any parameters that differ from this procedure are indicated in the following paragraphs. The parameters also prompt the engineer on which keys to press.
For example, press:
• 1 then 6 parameter 16 = Soak Time selected;
• ent currently soak time is displayed along with the programmable range 07 (1–14) days ;
• 08
• ent value of the required soak time, the display shows the new value accept the programming and return to 16 = Soak Time
08 (1–14) days
displayed.
NOTE: Default settings must be changed before programming in Menu Option 55 – Soak.
;
Assigning Parameters to Groups
Several of the parameters allow separate values to be assigned to the groups on the system. If groups have been enabled, the relevant parameters prompt for a group to be selected; when selected, the value is assigned to the group parameter using the procedure outlined in the previous example.
The parameters that permit group selection are indicated in the following paragraphs.
48
Galaxy Programming Manual
51 - Parameters (cont’d)
3 1
3 2
3 3
3 4
2 7
2 8
2 9
3 0
2 3
2 4
2 5
2 6
1 9
2 0
2 1
2 2
1 5
1 6
1 7
1 8
1 1
1 2
1 3
1 4
0 7
0 8
0 9
1 0
0 1
0 2
0 3
0 4
0 5
0 6
4 7
4 8
4 9
5 0
4 3
4 4
4 5
4 6
5 1
5 2
3 9
4 0
4 1
4 2
3 5
3 6
3 7
3 8
P a r a m e t e r
B
B e ll D e l a y
A b o r t T i m e
E x ti T i m e
E n t r y T i m e
S
T a
N o .
R e a r m s
O m ti A ll
K e y ' 0 '
L o c a l P a r t
B a n n e r
P A D e l a y
K
S
E y s
Y t
/ e
S m
S o a k T i m e
R e s t a r t
W
T
S t o p S e t
P a r t A l a r m
P o w e r D e l a y
R e s e t M g .r
P
P
E x ti A l a r m
G l o b a l C o p y
F o r c e d
E a lr y O p e n x c c t D e b o u n c e
O n il n e p ir n t
O n il n e l e v e l
V
D
S h o w A l a r m s
S e c u r e C o d e
C o m f o r t T i m e
F a li T o S e t
B a tt e r y S i z e
S
A
A T M T i m e o u t
D a t e l o c k
W e e k e n d W o r k
P I N C h a n g e
T i m e r A c c e s s
H
Z i t i e y
A e
T o ir m p d a g s n t
M n ll r e l a n h t e
T e e o y d i m e s
C b
D
S m
A
R r e t o y e e e l l e
R
R e d e c a e
T a y s
L u i r i e r e
S e t C o n if r m t m m s s e s e s t ti
R F S t o p S e t v
C o n if r m T i m e e y a
N o .
o f A l a r m s
R F B a t D e l a y e t t n
R F J a m D e l a y l c e
G r o u p s
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9 n o t a v a li a b l e
9 n o t a v a li a b l e
9 n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e
9
9
9
9 n o t a v a li a b l e
9
9
9
9 n o t a v a li a b l e
9 n o t a v a li a b l e
9
9 n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e
9 n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e
9
9 n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e
9 n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
G a l a x y 8
9
9
9
9
9 n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e 9 n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
G a l a x y 1 8
9
9
9
9
9 n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e
9 n o t a v a li a b l e
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9 n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e
9
9
9 n o t a v a li a b l e
9
9
9
9 n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e
9
9 n o t a v a li a b l e
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
G a l a x y 6 0
9
9
9
9
9 n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e
9
9 n o t a v a li a b l e
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9 n o t a v a li a b l e
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
G a l a x y 1 2 8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9 n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e
9
9
9 n o t a v a li a b l e
9
9 n o t a v a li a b l e
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9 n o t a v a li a b l e
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
G a l a x y 5 0 0
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9 n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e
9
9
9 n o t a v a li a b l e
9
9 n o t a v a li a b l e
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
G a l a x y 5 0 4
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9 n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
G a l a x y 5 1 2
9
9
9
9
9
9
9 n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e
9
9
9
9
9
9 n o t a v a li a b l e
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9 n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e
9
9
9
9
9
Table 9A. System Parameters
49
51 - Parameters (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
5 3
5 4
5 5
5 6
5 7
5 8
5 9
6 0
P a r a m e t e r
R F S t o p M o d e
K e y p a d A c c e s s
C
P
S o
F o a u n r c r p t e if e r
T r m o v
R i n s e s e i o t o
B e ll E x t e n d
P o w e r A l a r m n r e n n o o
G r o u p s G a l a x y 8 n o t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e t a v a li a b l e n o t a v a li a b l e
9
9
9
9 n n n o o o t t t a a a v v v a a a li li li a a a b b b l l l e e e
9
9
9
G a l a x y 1 8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
G a l a x y 6 0
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
G a l a x y 1 2 8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
G a l a x y 5 0 0
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
G a l a x y 5 0 4
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
G a l a x y 5 1 2
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Table 9B. System Parameters (cont’d)
50
Galaxy Programming Manual
51 - Parameters (cont’d)
01 = Bell Time
The duration of the Bells output activation is programmable within the range 0–30 minutes; the default is 20 .
Assigning a value of 00 minutes sets the Bell Time to infinity.
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
The Entry/Exit Horn is subject to the Bell Time parameter in both the set and unset conditions.
02 = Bell Delay
The delayed activation of the bell is programmable within the range 0–20 minutes; the default is 0 . The Bell
Delay is overridden by a telecom failure (either a Comms Fail on the Galaxy Telecom Module or by the activation of a Line Fail zone used to monitor a digicom); an alarm condition in either of these conditions results in instant bells activation.
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
03 = Abort Time
The abort time is programmable within the range 0-300 seconds. The Abort Time delays the activation of
Intruder outputs during the unsetting of the system.
The abort time is initiated:
• whenever a zone that is not on the entry route ( Final, Entry and Exit zones) is activated — a user strays from the entry route;
• a valid code is not entered before the entry time expires.
There are two modes of operation for the abort:
1.
Standard abort (required in the UK for DD243 compliance).
2.
Star º abort.
Standard Abort Operation
If the programmed Abort Time is allowed to expire, the Intruder outputs remain active (latched on) until a code authorised to reset the system is entered (refer to parameter 06 = System Reset ).
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
The operation of the Abort feature is described as follows and indicates under what conditions the Abort output will be activated.
Note: to comply with the NACOSS standards NACP 10, the Star Abort operation must not be programmed. To comply with DD243:2002, the abort time must be programmed for 001 secs.
For entry route deviation, the signalling of an intruder alarm is delayed.
If a valid code is entered before the entry time expires:
(1) The intruder is not signaled.
(2) The system does not require a system reset.
If a valid code is not entered before the entry time expires or an entry timeout condition occurs:
(1) The intruder is signaled at the end of the entry time.
(2) The Abort timer starts on expiry of the entry time.
If a valid code is entered within the programmed abort time:
(1) If an abort output/channel is allocated to the alarmed group: a) The Abort signal is sent.
b) The intruder condition is not restored.
c) Intruder restore is not signalled.
51
51 - Parameters (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
(2) If there is no abort output allocated to the alarmed group: a) The intruder condition is restored.
b) Intruder restore is signalled
The system requires a system reset. The panel cannot be set until this occurs.
NOTE: If reduced resets (51.55.3) is enabled, the alarm will be reset by the user code, if the alarm is unconfirmed.
If the Abort time is programmed for 000 seconds, then there is no time restriction on when the entry of a valid code will signal the Abort.
NOTE: 000 seconds equals infinite.
Star º Abort Operation
For entry route deviation, the signalling of an Intruder alarm is immediate, or
For entry timeout conditions, the signalling of an Intruder alarm is immediate:
(1) The Abort timer starts on signalling of the Intruder.
(2) If a valid code is entered within the programmed abort time: a) The intruder condition is restored.
b) Intruder restore is signalled.
c) The system does not require a system reset.
(3) If a valid code is not entered until the programmed abort time expires: a) The Abort output/channel is not activated.
b) The Intruder condition is not restored.
c) Intruder restore is not signalled d) The system does require a system reset.
(4) If the abort time is programmed for *000 seconds, then there is no time restriction on when the entry of a valid code will signal the abort.
04 = Exit Time
This parameter determines the time allowed to leave the premises via the exit route before the system sets.
The Exit Time is programmable within the range 0–300 seconds; the default is 120 seconds.
Infinite Exit Time
Assigning a value of 000 seconds sets the Exit Time to infinity; an Exit terminator activation ( Final or Pushset zone) is required to complete the setting of the system. The infinite Exit Time is normally used with a
Push-set zone to terminate the setting and an Entry zone to start the unsetting procedure.
NOTE: If the system is programmed to Autoset , an Exit Time of 000 causes the system to instantly set
— there is no requirement for a Push-Set zone to be activated.
Setting Multiple Groups
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group. If more than one is group is being set, the longest exit time is adopted for all setting groups.
05 = Entry Time
This parameter determines the entry time allowed to users when unsetting the system. The Entry Time is programmable within the range 0–300 seconds; the default is 120 . Assigning a value of 000 seconds sets the
Entry Time to infinity.
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
52
Galaxy Programming Manual
51 - Parameters (cont’d)
NOTES:
1. A Final zone assigned a ✴ when programming the function will double the programmed Entry
Time for the group it is allocated to.
2. There are no groups in the Galaxy 8
06 = System Reset
This option allows the engineer or the remote code to determine the code level that can reset the system following an intruder alarm. The default level is 6 — manager; the programmable range is:
• 0–5 for the user
• 6 for the manager
• 7 for the engineer
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
NOTE: 1. There are no groups in the Galaxy 8.
2. This option is affected by reduced resets, menu option 51.55.3.
The panel only requests Engineer Level Reset if Intruder, PA or Tamper alarms have been signalled, via the
Telecom Module and appropriate level reset is set to 7. If no signal is transmitted, the reset will automatically reduced to level 6. This feature is only active when the DTMF signalling format is selected.
07 = Tamper Reset
This option allows the engineer or the remote code to determine the code level that can reset the system following a tamper. The default level is 7 — manager; the programmable range is:
• 0–5 for the user
• 6 for the manager
• 7 for the engineer
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
NOTE: 1. There are no groups in the Galaxy 8.
2. This option is affected by reduced resets, menu option (51.55.3)
The panel only requests Engineer Level Reset if Intruder, PA or Tamper alarms have been signalled, via the
Telecom Module and appropriate level reset is set to 7. If no signal is transmitted, the reset will automatically reduced to level 6. This feature is only active when the DTMF signalling format is selected.
08 = No. Re-Arms (Galaxy 8, 18, 60, 128, 500, & 504)
The Number of Re-arms parameter determines the number of times that an armed system can re-arm the bells, following an alarm activation. The default setting is 9 (infinite) with a programmable range of 0 – 9 , where 9 is infinite re-arm. If the option is enabled, then the system re-arms at the end of the programmed confirm time - only if all zones are closed or are open and can be omitted, or if the Omit all force is enabled.
The intruder output remains active until a system re-arm occurs.
53
51 - Parameters (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
Zones that are open at the end of the bell time must be omittable ( Omit attribute enabled); the re-arm will omit these zones. The complete zone circuit, including the tamper facility, is omitted. Refer to menu option 52 =
PROGRAM ZONES for details on enabling the zone omit attribute.
NOTE: If an open zone is not omittable, then the system will not re-arm, unless parameter 09 = Omit All is set to 2.
09 = Omit All (Galaxy 8, 18, 60, 128, 500, & 504)
This option determines if activated zonescan be omitted at re-arm as described above.
0 = Disabled
1 = Omit All When set to 1 (enabled), omits any omittable zones that are open at re-arm. The complete zone circuit including tamper is omitted.
2 = Force. As Omit All but omits zones whether omittable or not.
Refer to menu option 52 = PROGRAM ZONES for details on enabling the zone omit attribute.
Galaxy 512
This option is not available.
10 = Key “0”
Key 0 on the keypad can be assigned to operate as a Push-set zone function; this will terminate the timed setting procedure. When the option is set to 1 ( enabled), pressing key 0 during the exit time completes the setting of the system. The default is 0 (disabled).
NOTE: Key 0 must be pressed only on the keypad used to start the setting procedure.
11 = Local Part
When the Local Part parameter is set to 0 (disabled - default setting) the Intruder outputs are disabled when the system is part set; the programmed bell delay is overridden. This is normally used to prevent the communicator from dialling the Alarm Receiving Centre.
If the Local Part parameter is set to 1 (enabled) the Intruder outputs activate if an alarm condition occurs when the system is part set.
Option 2 ( SIA part off ) is identical to option 1 with the exception that when the alarm format of the telecom module is set to SIA then the part setting and unsetting of the system is not signalled to the ARC.
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
12 = Banner
This option can be used to customise both the top and bottom lines of the banner display. Press 1 to select the top line or 2 to select the bottom line; the display is written using the alpha-numeric assembly method:
• ✴
• # erases characters; selects upper case, lower case or library;
• A B selects alphabet character/words;
• 000–500 selects alphabet character or words;
• ent positions selected characters/words;
54
Galaxy Programming Manual
51 - Parameters (cont’d)
• esc accepts the programming and returns to the previous level; exits from the option.
The banner is displayed whenever any group on the system is unset.
13 = PA Delay
This parameter determines the delay between the activation of a PA Delay or PA Delay Silent zone and the alarm sounding and signalling a PA via the communicator. The PA Delay is programmable within the range 1–
60 seconds; the default is 60 .
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
14 = Key/SW Level
This parameter assigns a code level to zones programmed as Keyswitch . The Keyswitch zone can be used to reset system, tamper and PA alarms - depending on the reset level assigned to each of these parameters.
The default level is 6 - manager; the programmable range is:
• 0–7 for the engineer
• 0–8 for the remote code
15 = System Text
This parameter allows two text strings to be assigned to the system: press 1 to select the System ID or 2 to select the Panel Location .
1.
System ID — 8 character identification of system;
2.
Panel Location — 16 character message of where control is fitted.
The text is written using the alpha-numeric assembly method:
• ✴
• # erases characters; selects upper case, lower case or library;
• A B selects alphabet character/words;
• 000–538 selects alphabet character or words;
• ent positions selected characters/words;
• esc accepts the programming and returns to the previous level; exits from the option.
16 = Soak Time
This parameter determines the number of days that zones can be soak tested for; the programmable range is 1
– 14 days; the default is 7 .
NOTE: Default settings must be changed before programming in Menu Option 55 – Soak.
55
51 - Parameters (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
17 = Restart
This parameter re-configures the system without the need to remove and reconnect the power. The system displays a WARNING!!! ent=RESET SYSTEM , press the ent key to reconfigure the system. The keypad display becomes blank for a few seconds, then displays the message Configuring Please Wait . When configuration is complete the banner returns to the normal display (day mode). The Restart option configures any modules that have been added to the system but gives an alarm if there are any tampers open or if any modules are reported as missing.
NOTE: This parameter exits engineer mode.
NOTE: Outputs are momentarily reset during the restart. If the system has a communications requirement, put it on test before using the restart.
18 = Stop Set
This parameter, when set to 1 (enabled), prevents the system from setting if there is a line fail or a mains fail condition at the time of starting the setting procedure. If the condition is the result of an open Line Fail or AC
Fail zone, then the system can not be set until the zone is closed or omitted. The Stop Set parameter is set to
0 (disabled) by default.
NOTE: Battery Low will also prevent the system from setting.
19 = Part Alarm
When the Part Alarm parameter is set to 1 (enabled — default setting) the Bells and Strobe outputs activate if an alarm condition occurs when the system is part set.
When the Part Alarm parameter is set to 0 (disabled) the Bells and Strobe outputs are disabled when the system is part set.
NOTES:
1. The Horn, Entry/Exit and Intruder outputs are not affected by this parameter.
2. There are no groups in the Galaxy 8
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
20 = Power Delay (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
This parameter determines the delay between the activation of AC Fail outputs following a mains failure to allow the power to return before signalling the fault. The Power Delay is programmable within the range 0–50 minutes; the default is 10 .
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
NOTE: This option is not available on the Galaxy 8. It is set at 10 minutes.
21 = Reset MGR (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
This parameter should only be used if the Master Manager code is lost or must be replaced. On selecting the
Reset MGR parameter, a warning message is displayed: WARNING!!! ENT=Code Change ; press the ent key to erase current code and reset it to the default of 1234 .
Galaxy 504 & 512
The manager code ( User 997 ) can only be reset by the remote code ( User 500 ).
56
Galaxy Programming Manual
51 - Parameters (cont’d)
22 = PA Reset (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
This option allows the engineer or the remote code to determine the code level that can reset the system following a PA activation. The default level is 6 — manager; the programmable range is:
• 0–5 for the user
• 6 for the manager
• 7 for the engineer
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
The panel only requests Engineer Level Reset if Intruder, PA or Tamper alarms have been signalled, via the
Telecom Module and appropriate level reset is set to 7. If no signal is transmitted, the reset will automatically be reduced to level 6. This feature is only active when the DTMF signalling format is selected.
23 = Print Codes (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Print Codes option, when set to 1 (enabled), allows the manager to print a list of the PINS for each of the users. The option defaults to 0 (disabled).
24 = Exit Alarm (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
If the Exit Alarm parameter is set to 1 (enabled), any zone other than Final , Exit , Entry or Push-Set (or
Secure Final or Part Final when acting as a Final ) that is opened during the exit time causes a full alarm condition to be activated. The default is 0 (disabled).
NOTE: This option must be used only when specified.
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
Galaxy 512
If the Exit Alarm parameter is enabled, any zone that is open when the Autoset begins (at the end of the prewarning period) causes an immediate full alarm condition to be activated.
If the Exit Alarm parameter is disabled, any zone open when the Autoset begins (at the end of the prewarning period) results in an “urgent” bleeping from the Entry/Exit Horns . If the open zones are not closed by the end the time assigned in parameter 35 = Fail To Set , a full alarm is activated along with any outputs programmed as Fail-Set .
25 = Global Copy (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Global Copy parameter changes all zones within the selected range to the function of the first zone in the range. On selection of the parameter, a warning message is displayed indicating that the zone functions will be altered — WARNING!!! ENT=ZONE CHANGES : press the ent key to continue or the esc key to abort the programming. The address and function of the first zone on the system are displayed:
• Copy Start: Use the A or B key to select the first zone in the range to be copied and press the ent key.
The function of this zone will be copied to all subsequent zones in the range;
• Copy End: Use the A key to move to the last zone in the range to be copied.
• Press the ent key to copy the zone function to the selected range.
57
51 - Parameters (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
26 = Forced (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500 & 504)
The Forced parameter enables or disables Menu option 14 = FORCED SET . If the parameter is set to 1
(enabled) the user can force the system to set, automatically omitting any omittable zones that are open at the time of setting. If the parameter is set to 0 (disabled), option 14 = FORCED SET is not available to the user; the message Option not available is displayed. The parameter defaults to 0 (disabled).
NOTE: It is recommended that Final , Entry and Push-Set zones have the omit attribute disabled.
27 = CCT Debounce (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500 & 504)
The cct Debounce parameter determines the response time of the zones (how long they must remain open before registering as changing state). The cct Debounce is programmable within the range 20–1000 milliseconds ( 0.02–1 second); the default is 300 msecs. All entries are rounded up to the nearest 20 msecs.
28 = Online Print (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
This parameter is used to select the print mode required when connecting a serial printer to the Galaxy panel; there are two options:
0 = disabled (default): system only prints specific details at the user’s request. The printer can be connected and disconnected at any time as required;
1 = enabled : this option switches the printer to on-line mode and requires that a printer be continuously connected to the system. Events are printed as and when they occur. The events printed are controlled by parameter 29 = Online Level .
NOTE: If Online Print is enabled, the event log and other options will not be printed at the user’s request.
The parameter must be disabled to permit all other print options to operate.
29 = Online Level (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The On-line Level parameter determines the level of events that are printed when parameter 28 = Online
Print is enabled:
0 (default) - basic print (setting, unsetting, alarms);
1 - full print excluding MAX events (setting, unsetting, alarms, modifications, technical details)
2 - full print including MAX events.
3 - MAX events only.
4 - Basic Print plus MAX events.
NOTE: If Online Level is set to 1 (exclude MAX events), then all MAX events in the log are not included in the printout; if 2 (include MAX events) is selected, then the MAX events in the log are included in the print.
58
Galaxy Programming Manual
51 - Parameters (cont’d)
30 = Video (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
This parameter determines the number of activations that must occur on any of the zones programmed as
Video , in a single set period, before a full alarm occurs; there is no time limit on the period between activations. The Video parameter is programmable within the range 1–9 activations; the default is 2 . The
Galaxy 8 is fixed at 2 activations. The Video zones activation counter is reset when the system is unset.
NOTE: The activations of the Video zones are cumulative - the counter is incremented each time any Video zone in the group is activated.
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
31 = Delay Alarm (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
This parameter determines the delay between the activation of an Intruder Delay zone and the alarm sounding or a Log Delay zone being recorded as opening in the event log. The Delay Alarm is programmable within the range 0–3000 seconds; the default is 60 .
If a second Intruder Delay zone opens followed by the first zone closing, the Delay Alarm time continues to count from the activation of the first zone. The Delay Alarm timer is reset only when all delay type zones return to the closed state.
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
32 = Show Alarms (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
If the Show Alarms parameter is enabled, the first alarm activation is immediately displayed on all the keypads when an alarm condition occurs. Normally alarm messages are not displayed until the alarm is cancelled by entry of a valid code.
0 = disabled (default) - alarms displayed only on valid code entry;
1 = enabled - instant display of first alarm activation.
NOTE: This parameter will only function when at least one group is unset.
33 = Secure Code (Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
Once this parameter has been selected, the engineer code is randomly changed each day at 08:00 hours. The service engineer must be informed of the “code of the day” by head office. The random code that is generated is dependent on the local engineer code, therefore each area, company, branch or even system can have a unique secure code.
Either the engineer or remote user code can select the Secure Code parameter. On selecting this parameter the secure code equivalent to the current engineer code must be entered to confirm the selection. Only the remote user code (or a cold start - erasing all programming details) can cancel it.
Select 1 to enable Secure Code , or 0 to disable the parameter; the default is 0 (disabled).
34 = Comfort Time (Galaxy 60, 128, 500 & 504)
The Comfort Time parameter permits a period of time to be allocated when the values assigned to the entry and abort time parameters and the number of wrong code attempts are doubled; the programmable range is
0–14 days; the default is 0 . This allows new or unfamiliar users to become accustomed to the system without causing false alarm activations. At the end of the Comfort Time the system returns all the affected parameters to the programmed values.
NOTE: The Galaxy 8 and 18 are set to 0 days (no comfort time)
59
51 - Parameters (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
35 = Fail to Set (Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
This parameter determines the period of time that a zone must remain open, following the start of the setting procedure, before the Fail Set outputs activate. The programmable range is 0–999 seconds; the default is
360 .
NOTE: The Fail to Set countdown time begins as soon as the setting procedure is started.
NOTE: The Fail to Set time should be approximately 5 seconds longer than the Exit Time (option 04), to allow for the setting period of a set.
This parameter can be assigned a different value for each group.
36 = Battery Size (Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
Enter the size of the standby battery on the Smart PSU that is connected to the Galaxy panel. The programmable range is 0–99 Ah; the default is 0 .
NOTE: The Battery Size ( in Ahr’s ) should only be entered if a Smart PSU is being used to supply power to the Galaxy panel.
37 = Standby Time (Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
Enter the value (in hours) that the system is required to run on standby battery if there is a mains fail. The programmable range is 0–99 hours; the default is 0 .
NOTE: The Standby Time should only be entered if a Smart PSU is being used to supply power to the
Galaxy panel.
The Smart PSU calculates the battery run time from the programmed Battery Size (parameter 36 ) and the load current. If the programmed Standby Time exceeds the calculated battery run time, a STANDBY
TIME LOW message is displayed on the keypad on attempting to exit engineer mode. Exiting engineer mode is prevented until a Standby Time that is less than the calculated battery time is entered or a larger battery is installed in the system and the new battery size is entered in the Battery Size parameter.
38 = ATM Delay (Galaxy 512)
This parameter determines the period of time before the selected ATM zone type is omitted following the entry of one of the ATM codes ( User 188–197 ). The programmable range is 0–30 minutes; the default
ATM Delay is 5 .
39 = ATM Timeout (Galaxy 512)
This parameter determines the period of time that the selected ATM zone type is omitted following the entry of one of the ATM codes ( Users 188–197 ). The programmable range is 1–90 minutes; the default ATM
Timeout is 30 .
60
Galaxy Programming Manual
51 - Parameters (cont’d)
40 = Datelock (Galaxy 512)
This parameter is used to enable or disable menu option 49 = DATELOCK; the parameter can be set to one of the three following options:
0 = Disabled (default setting): the Datelock menu option is not available to the user; the
message Option not available is displayed.
1 = Enabled : the Datelock prevents the system from being manually unset until the Lockout
time has expired (refer to option 65 = TIMERS );
2 = Dual Unlock : following an alarm activation, two level 2 (or above) codes, assigned to all
groups, can unset the system before the Lockout time expires.
41 = Weekend Work (Galaxy 500, 504 & 512)
This parameter is used to enable or disable menu option 45.6 = TIMER CONTROL.Weekend Work . If the parameter is set to 1 , the engineer can assign a Pattern Day and the user can authorise Weekend Working . If the parameter is set to 0 (disabled — default setting), the message Option not available is displayed on selecting the Weekend Work menu option.
42 = PIN Change (Galaxy 128, 500, 504 & 512)
This parameter defines the expiry period of user codes allocated the PIN Change attribute (refer to option 42
= CODES ). The PIN Change parameter is programmable within the range 0–12 months; the default is 0 .
The user PIN must be changed before the assigned PIN Change month ends. On entering the expiring user code a warning that the code is due to expire and a prompt to assign a new code is given to the user. The period of this warning message is determined by the PIN Warning option (refer to menu option 42.2 =
CODES. PIN Warning ).
The default value is 0 - this means that although codes have been allocated the expiry attribute, they do not expire.
43 = Timer Access
Option not available.
44 = Early Open (Galaxy 512)
This parameter determines the number of minutes before the Lockout OFF time that the system can be manually unset when the Early Open option (refer to menu option 45 = TIMERS ) is switched on. The
Early Open parameter is programmable within the range 0–240 minutes; the default is 0 .
45 = High Security (Galaxy 60, 128, 500, & 504)
This option allows RIO zones to be monitored for Constant Voltage Tampers. A constant voltage tamper is activated if a zone detector is replaced by a constant voltage source, for example, battery. This feature is automatic for the Galaxy 512 and is selectable as an option for the Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500 and 504. Only
RIO zones are affected by this feature. The hardware on the Galaxy 8, 18 and 60 does not support this feature for on-board zones.
The High Security feature is disabled by default in the RIO, so must be turned on by the panel for this feature to be activated. The feature can be turned on from the panel via Parameter 45 (High Security). The default value for this parameter is disabled. If enabled, all RIOs on the system are affected.
This feature is only supported by RIOs rev 1.2 and above and Smart PSUs rev 0.7 and above.
61
51 - Parameters (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
46 = Zone resistance (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
RIOs rev 1.2 and Smart PSUs rev 0.7 and above allow the zones to be programmed, with different resistance ranges for zone status activation. This feature allows selection of End Of Line or Double Balanced zone resistance types. The on-board zones can also be modified using this feature.
The “EOL/Dbl. Bal.” resistance types are selectable from this option. The default value is Double Balanced.
The Table that follows shows the resistance windows for each type:
Z o n e S t a t u s
T a m p e r S / C
L o w R e s i s t a n c e
N o r m a l
D o u b l e B a l a n c e d
R a n g e
0 8 0 0
8 0 0 9 0 0
9 0 0 1 2 0 0
E O L R a n g e
0 8 0 0
8 0 0 9 0 0
9 0 0 1 2 0 0
H i g h R e s i s t a n c e 1 2 0 0 1 3 0 0
A l a r m 1 3 0 0 1 2 0 0 0
T a m p e r O / C 1 2 0 0 0 -
α
Table 10. Zone Resistance
1 2 0 0 1 3 0 0
1 3 0 0 -
α
-
47 = Set Confirm
Option not available
48 = Maximum Number of Alarms (Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
This option allows the user to program the maximum number of alarms, per group, which may be transmitted to an Alarm Receiving Centre in any set period. The selectable values are 0-10 where 0 is unlimited.
Fire and PA alarms are not restricted by this parameter.
This feature only affects Contact ID, SIA and Microtech communication formats.
49 = Confirm Time
This option is the maximum time between two separate zones for a confirmed alarm to be generated up to a maximum of 99 minutes, which is equivalent to the complete set period, with a default of 30 minutes.
50 = RF Bat Delay
This option allows a warning to be given at the Galaxy panel if an RF low battery is detected. An additional option is given at the panel that allows a delay up to a maximum of 100 hours (default) before a signal of RF
BAT LOW is sent to the ARC.
51 = RF Jam Delay
This option allows the RF RIO to send an RF jam signal to the Galaxy panel if it detects interference for 30 seconds. If the interference is continuously present for 5 minutes (default), the signal is transmitted to central station. The programmable range is 0 - 30 minutes.
62
Galaxy Programming Manual
51 - Parameters (cont’d)
52 = RF Stop Set
If this option is enabled, the setting is prevented if all supervised devices have not signalled to the receiver in the stop set period prior to setting. This is selectable from 0 - 250 minutes. The default is 20 minutes.
53 = RF Stop Mode
This option controls if and how an RF fault prevents the panel from being set. There are three options:
0 = Disabled: An RF fault will not prevent setting
1 = Warning: If there is a failure the user will get a warning but can continue to set.
2 = Auto Check: If there is a failure the system cannot be set until the zone(s) have been activated.
54 = Keypad Access
This option allows the keypad to unset the system. There are two options:
1 = Always
2 = Except Entry: Except when entry time is running. This ensures that users are unsetting using a fob or
MAX tag (portable device)
55 = Confirm
This option controls how confirmed alarms are generated. It controls the operation of confirm outputs plus the signalling of confirmed alarms. There are three options:
1 = Operation: This option controls when confirmed alarms can be triggered. An entry timeout alarm will never contribute to a confirmed alarm. Here are three options:
1 = Before Entry (UK) . Confirmed alarms can be triggered before starting entry time only.
2 = Except entry . Confirmed alarms can be triggered any time except during the entry delay period.
3 = Always (EU) . Confirmed alarms are always enabled.
2 = Entry Timeout: This option controls whether exit type zones can cause confirmed alarms, after an entry timeout.
0 = Disable Exits . Exit type zones will only cause unconfirmed intruder alarms. They will not contribute to the two activations required for a confirmed alarm.
1 = Enable Exits . After the expiry of the entry delay, activation of an exit type zone will be identical to an intruder zone.
3 = Reduce Reset : This option allows user reset following an unconfirmed alarm.
0 = Off . Full system reset is required for any intruder alarm.
1 = On Unconfirmed . The system can be reset by user, if the alarm is unconfirmed. If the alarm is classed as unconfirmed, a full system reset will be required.
56 = Force Restore
This option dictates when intruder restore signals are transmitted.
1 = Unset/Unconfirm: On unset or at the end of the confirmed time if the alarm is not confirmed.
2 = System Reset: Sent when the system is fully reset.
57 = Bell Extend
This parameter extends the bell time if he system cannot rearm. For example , if the zone is still open and cannot be omitted.
63
51 - Parameters (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
58 = Power Alarm
For NF-a2p approval. Activates Bells, Strobe and Horn when system is set if there is an AC fail.
59 = Part Zone
For NF-a2p approval. When enabled, the part setting has a unique setting tone. Setting tone is on 2 secs, off
0.1 sec.
60 = Supervision
This parameter has two sub options:
1 = Silent Alarm.
If enabled, it stops Supervision alarms from activating sounders when set.
2 = Debounce.
This extends the normal 2 hour delay for supervision by a further 24 hours.
64
Galaxy Programming Manual
52 - Program Zones
Option 52 – Program Zones
This option is used by the engineer to modify the programming of the zones on the system. The option also allows the attributes of the zone to be changed. The programmable options are shown in the Table that follows:
6
7
4
5
1
2
3
8
N o t e :
A t t r i b u t e s D e s c r i p t i o n
F u n c it o n
D e s c ir p t o r
C h i m e a s s i g n z o n e t y p e
1 6 c h a r a c t e r ( m a x .
) a l p h a n u m e ir c d e s c ir p it o n e n a b l e d = m o m e n t a r li y c h i m e e ff e c t fi z o n e o p e n e d w h li e u n s e t
O m ti
P a r t
R e s p .
T i m e
C u s t o m S I A e e n a
M
S n a o d e b l e b l e d l e fi y c t d =
= z o z o n e c i r c u
S I A ti n e d e v e i c n c l e b n t a o n b u d e d u n e c e o it m i n m i e tt e d p a r t s e t it n g o f s y
G r o u p a s s i g n z o n e t o a s i n g l e g r o u p o n t h e
G r o u
( r e f e r p t s o o n l y o p it a p o n p e
6 3 a r
.
1 fi
= t h e G r o u p o p it o n i s
O P T I O N S .
G r o u p s ) .
e n a b l e d s y s t e m s t e m
Table 11. Zone Attributes
Selecting Zones
On entering the option, the first zone on the system is displayed; the zone address, function and group assigned are displayed on the top line, the descriptor is displayed on the bottom line. Pressing the # key toggles the descriptor to reveal the status of the chime, omit and part attributes. If the attribute is enabled, the initial attribute letter is displayed, if it is disabled, a dash (–) is shown. For example, chime, part and omit enabled display as COP , if omit is disabled the display would be C – P .
From the display of the first zone, any zone on the system can be displayed by pressing the A or B keys or by entering the address of a specific zone.
NOTE: For direct zone address selection the Galaxy 8, 18 and 60 only require the last 2 digits of the zone address to be entered; the Galaxy 128,500, 504 and 512 require a 4 digit address to be entered.
The zone is selected for programming by pressing the ent key; the first zone programming attribute 1=Function is displayed.
Attributes
The attributes can be stepped through by pressing the A or B keys or directly selected by pressing the attribute number ( 1–8 ). Once the required attribute is on display, press the ent key to gain access for modification.
Once the attribute has been assigned press the ent key to save the programming and return to the attribute selection level.
Pressing the esc key at any time when assigning attributes 1 and 3–8 to a zone aborts the programming and returns to the attribute selection level. Pressing the esc key when assigning a descriptor to a zone saves the assigned alphanumeric text and returns to the attribute selection level.
65
52 - Program Zones (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
1 = Function
Entering the Function attribute displays the address and the current function of the selected zone along with the zone function reference number. The zone functions can be stepped through, forwards or backwards, using the A and B keys. Alternatively a zone function can be directly selected by entering the zone function reference number, for example, entering the 19 displays zone function 19 = FIRE .
Once the required zone function is displayed, it is assigned to the zone by pressing the ent key.
2 = Descriptor
Each zone can be assigned with an alpha-numeric descriptor of up to 16 characters. This descriptor is assembled from the character set and/or library options. On selecting the Descriptor attribute, the currently assigned descriptor (blank by default) is displayed on the top line - an underscore shows where the next character will be positioned, and a selection of the alphabet is shown on the bottom line - the cursor flashes on the letter L .
Press the ✴ key to erase the characters already assigned to the descriptor.
The A or B keys can be used to move the alphabet left or right until the required character is positioned underneath the flashing cursor. When the required character is in position press the ent key to copy the character to the descriptor in the top line. Repeat this procedure to assemble the required zone descriptor.
Text Case and Library
On entering the Descriptor attribute the alpha-numeric characters are all presented in upper case. Pressing the # key toggles the characters to lower case.
Pressing the # key when the lower case alphanumeric characters are displayed toggles to the library words.
The words can be viewed using the A or B keys or directly selected using the reference number - refer to
Appendix A - Library . When the required word is displayed, press the ent key to copy it to the descriptor.
NOTE: Library words are a maximum of 12 characters and upper case only.
3 = Chime
If the Chime attribute is set to 1 (enabled) the zone will chime momentarily whenever it is opened while the system is unset. The Chime attribute defaults to 0 (disabled) for all zone functions.
The A or B keys can be used to toggle the status of the Chime attribute — pressing 1 or 0 will also select the required status; press the ent key to accept the programming.
NOTE: The Chime option (full menu option 15 , quick menu option 2 ) must be enabled if the zones are to chime when opened.
4 = Omit
If the Omit attribute is set to 1 (enabled) the zone can be omitted from the system by using one of the omit functions ( 11 = OMIT ZONES , 14 = FORCED SET , 46 = GROUP OMIT ). The Omit attribute defaults to 0 (disabled) for all zone functions.
66
Galaxy Programming Manual
52 - Program Zones (cont’d)
The A or B keys can be used to toggle the status of the Omit attribute - pressing 1 or 0 will also select the required status; press the ent key to accept the programming.
Galaxy 512
Only 1 zone can be omitted at any one time on the Galaxy 512. The only exception to this is the Vibration zone function; selecting a single Vibration zone automatically omits all Vibration zones on the system irrespective of the group that each is assigned to.
5 = Part
If the Part attribute is set to 1 (enabled) the zone will be included in the setting procedure when one of the part setting options is used to set the system ( 13 = PART SET , 17 = INSTANT PART ). The Part attribute defaults to 1 (enabled) for all zone functions except zones programmed as 09 = Keyswitch .
The A or B keys can be used to toggle the status of the Part attribute - pressing 1 or 0 will also select the required status; press the ent key to accept the programming.
6 = Resp. Time
This function is only applicable to zones on RIO rev 1.2 and Smart PSU rev 0.7 and above.
This option allows the user to select , either Fast (10ms), System (default value programmed in 51 – Parameters, Option 27) or Slow (750ms), for each zone.
7 = Custom SIA
This option allows a different SIA mnemonic to be allocated to the selected zone. The default is the standard
SIA mnemonic for the zone type selection. The default mnemonic can be reselected by pressing the ✴ key.
The Table that follows shows the list of available customisable mnemonics:
1 3
1 4
1 5
1 6
1 7
1 8
6
7
8
9
1 0
1 1
N o
1
2
3
4
5
1 2
E v e n t t e x t
D e f a u tl
A T / R P o w e r
B A / R B u r g l a r y
D G / D A c c e s s
F A / R F i r e
G A / R G a s
H A / R H o l d u p
K A / R H e a t
L T / R L i n e F a li
M A / R M e d i c a l
P A / R P a n i c
Q A / R A s s i s t
R O / C R e l a y
S A / R S p ir n k rl
T A / R T a m p e r
W A / R W a t e r
Y T / R B a tt e r y
Z A / R F r e e z e r
D e s c r i p t i o n A l a r m C l o s e d O m i t U n o m i t
A C T r o u b l e , A C R e s t o r a l
B u r g l a r y A l a r m , B u r g l a r y R e s t o r a l
A c c e s s G r a n t e d , A c c e s s D e n i e d
F i r e A l a r m , F i r e R e s t o r a l
G a s A l a r m , G a s R e s t o r a l
H o l d u p A l a r m , H o l d u p R e s t o r a l
H e a t A l a r m , H e a t R e s t o r a l
L i n e T r o u b l e , L i n e R e s t o r a l
M e d i c a l A l a r m , M e d i c a l R e s t o r a l
P a n i c A l a r m , P a n i c R e s t o r a l
E m e r g e n c y
R e s t o r a l
A l a r m , E m e r g e n c y
R e l a y O p e n , R e l a y C l o s e d
S p ir n k l e r A l a r m , S p ir n k l e r R e s t o r a l
T a m p e r A l a r m , T a m p e r R e s t o r a l
W a t e r A l a r m , W a t e r R e s t o r a l
B a tt e r y A l a r m , B a tt e r y R e s t o r a l
F r e e z e r A l a r m , F r e e z e r R e s t o r a l
Q A
R O
S A
T A
W A
Y T
Z A
G R
H R
K R
L R
A R
B R
D D
F R
M R
P R
A T
B A
D G
F A
G A
H A
K A
L T
M A
P A
Q R
R C
S R
T R
W R
Y R
Z R
G B
H B
K B
B B
B B
B B
B B
F B
M B
P B
Q B
B B
S B
T B
W B
B B
Z B
Q U
B U
S U
T U
W U
B U
Z U
Table 12. Customisable Mnemonics
G U
H U
K U
B U
B U
B U
B U
F U
M U
P U
T r o u b
G T
H T
K T
B T
B T
B T
D T
F T
M T
P T
Q T
B T
S T
B T
W T
B T
Z T
T r .
R e s
G J
H J
K J
B J
B J
B J
D J
F J
M J
P J
Q J
B J
S J
B J
W J
B J
Z J
T e s t
G X
B X
B X
B X
B X
B X
B X
F X
B X
B X
B X
B X
B X
T X
B X
B X
B X
T a m p
T A
T A
T A
T A
T A
T A
T A
T A
T A
T A
T A
T A
T A
T A
T A
T A
T A
67
52 - Program Zones (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
8 = Group (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
NOTE: The Groups attribute is only available if groups have been enabled on the system (refer to option 63
= OPTIONS ).
The Group attribute allows the zone to be assigned to a single group on the system. All zones default to
Group A1 .
On selecting the Group attribute, the group that the zone is currently assigned to is displayed. All zones default to group A1 . Press the number of the group that the zone is to be reassigned to and press the ent key.
Galaxy 500, 504 & 512
The Galaxy 500, 504 and 512 panels have 16, 32 and 32 groups respectively; these are displayed on the keypad in blocks of eight groups, sub-divided into A, B, C and D:
Use the A or B key to select the required group ( A1–D8 ). When the end of a block is reached, the next block of eight groups is displayed; use keys 1–8 to assign the relevant group in the current block to the zone; press the ent key to accept the selection.
Star ( ✴ ) Group Function
Certain zone functions have an additional Group attribute feature that allows the other groups to be affected by their operation. This feature is assigned by pressing the ✴ key when allocating the group to the zone.
On pressing the ✴ key the display indicates the group currently assigned to the zone and prompts for other groups to be added, for example 1 ✴ 1 – – – – – – – , pressing 4 and 7 assigns 1 ✴ 1 – – 4 – – 7 – .
Final, Secure Final, Part Final Keyswitch and Push Set Zones
If the star ✴ group feature is assigned a zone programmed as Final , Secure Final , Part Final or Push Set , then closing the zone when setting multiple groups terminates the setting procedure for all groups assigned to the zone.
Refer to the zone functions for further information on the operation of these zone functions.
Exit Zones
The star ✴ group feature can be assigned to a zone programmed as Exit . This allows an Exit zone to be activated in a group which is not currently being unset without activating an Intruder alarm condition.
Refer to the zone functions for further information on the operation of this zone function.
System Alarms
The Galaxy panels have tamper and alarm monitoring circuits which are not programmable. These circuits maintain the integrity of the system and all correspond to Group A1 .
Z o n e A l a r m D e s c r i p t i o n
0 0 0 1
0 0 0 2
0 0 0 3
C U B A T T
C U A C
L I D T A M P E R
C o n t r o l u n i t b a t t e r y l o w
C o n t r o l u n i t A C f a i l
C o n t r o l u n i t il d t a m p e r
0 0 0 4 A U X T A M P E R C o n t r o l u n i t t a m p e r r e t u r n
Table 13. Control Panel Alarms
68
Galaxy Programming Manual
52 - Program Zones (cont’d)
2 0
2 1
2 2
2 3
1 7
1 8
1 9
2 4
2 5
2 6
1 4
1 5
1 6
1 0
1 1
1 2
1 3
0 7
0 8
0 9
0 4
0 5
0 6
Z o n e F u n c t i o n
0 1
0 2
0 3 I
F i
E n t n a x i t r u l d e r
2 4 H o u r s
S e c u r i t y
D u a l
E n t r y
P u s h S e t
K e y s w i t c h
S e c u r e F i n a l
P a r t F i n a l
P a r t E n t r y
P A
P A S i l e n t
P A D e l a y
P A D e l a y S i l e n t
L i n k
S p a r e
F i r e
T a m p e r
B e ll T a m p e r
B e a m P a i r
B a t t e r y L o w
L i n e F a i l
A C F a i l
L o g
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
G a l a x y 8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
G a l a x y 6 0
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
G a l a x y 1 8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
G a l a x y 1 2 8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
G a l a x y 5 0 4
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
G a l a x y 5 0 0
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
G a l a x y 5 1 2
9
9
9
9
9
Table 14A. Available Zone Functions per Galaxy Panel
69
52 - Program Zones (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
4 6
4 7
4 8
4 9
5 0
5 1
5 2
4 3
4 4
4 5
4 0
4 1
4 2
3 7
3 8
3 9
3 4
3 5
3 6
Z o n e F u n c t i o n
2 7 R e m o t e A c c e s s
3 1
3 2
3 3
2 8
2 9
3 0
V
V
L i d i d o g
S e t e o e o
I n t r u d e
D
C u s t o r
E x
L o g
D e l a m A
C u s t o m B
E x i t g u a r d
M a s k i t y e l a y
U
P
K r
A e g y e
U s n n w t i s t e c
N o t U s e d
N o t U s e d
N o t U s e d t h R e s e t
N
N
N o o o t t t
U
U
U s s s e e e d d d
N o t U s e d
V i b r a t i o n
A T M 1
A T M 2
A T M 3
A T M 4
A l a r m E x t e n d
G a l a x y 8
9
9
9
9
9
9 n o t a v a i l a b l e n o t a v a i l a b l e
9
9
9
9
9
9
G a l a x y 1 8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
G a l a x y 6 0
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
G a l a x y 1 2 8 G a l a x y 5 0 0
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
G a l a x y 5 0 4
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
G a l a x y 5 1 2
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Table 14B. Available Zone Functions per Galaxy Panel (contd.)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
70
Galaxy Programming Manual
52 - Program Zones (cont’d)
01 Final
Zones programmed as Final initiate the unsetting procedure and terminate setting procedure; opening the
Final zone when the system or group is set starts the entry timer; opening and then closing the Final zone during the exit procedure sets the system or assigned groups, providing all the zones are closed. The opening
( + ) and closing ( – ) of Final zones during the setting and unsetting procedures are recorded in the event log.
Pressing the ✴ key when programming a Final zone doubles the entry time of the group.
Opening a Final zone during the exit time is not reported on the keypad as an open zone; the Entry/Exit
Horns bleep rapidly to indicate that the zone is open.
NOTE: The termination feature of a Final zone can be extended to terminate the setting of multiple groups by pressing the ✴ key when assigning a group to the zone. Refer to the Star ✴ Group Function .
02 Exit
Zones that protect the entry and exit routes are programmed as Exit . During the setting and unsetting procedures Exit zones have a non-alarm operation. If the Exit zone is activated while the system is set - without the unsetting of the group being initiated - an Intruder alarm condition is activated.
Opening an Exit zone during the exit time is not reported on the keypad as an open zone; the Entry/Exit
Horns bleep rapidly to indicate that the zone is open.
NOTE: The Exit zone can be assigned to multiple groups by pressing the ✴ key when assigning a group to the zone. This allows an Exit zone to be activated in a group which is not currently being unset without activating an Intruder alarm. Refer to the Star ✴ Group Function .
03 Intruder
The Intruder function is inactive when the system is unset. When the system is set, activation of an Intruder zone causes a full alarm activation that requires to be reset with a code authorised for System Reset - refer to option 51.6 = PARAMETERS.System Reset and option
51.55.3 = PARAMETERS.Confirm.Reduce Reset.
All zones (except zone 1001 and 1002 on the Galaxy 8, 18 & 60) are programmed as Intruder by default; this includes the zones on RIOs that are added to the system at a later date.
04 24 Hours
The 24 Hours zone function is continuously operational. In the unset state, activation of the zone function generates a local alarm condition (the Intruder outputs are not activated). If the zone is activated while the system is set, the 24 Hours function operates the same as an Intruder function and results in a full alarm condition. The 24 Hours zone function requires a system reset following an activation in both the set and unset conditions.
05 Security
The operation of the Security zone function is identical to the 24 Hours zone function, except a Security zone activation in the unset generates a local alarm ( Horn outputs activated) that does not require a system reset; any valid code (level 2 or above) cancels the alarm and resets the system. An activation in the set state generates a full alarm that requires a system reset. The activation ( + ) and restoration (–) of Security zones is recorded in the event log.
71
52 - Program Zones (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
06 Dual (Double Knock)
The operation of the Dual (Double Knock) function is identical to the Intruder function, with the exception that an alarm condition is activated only when there have been two activations from any Dual zones (assigned to the same group) within a 20 minute period while the system is set.
07 Entry
This function initiates the unsetting procedure in the same way as a Final zone. However, during the setting routine an Entry zone operates as an Exit zone type. This function is normally used in conjunction with a
Push Set zone, which acts as the exit terminator for the setting procedure.
Pressing the ✴ key when programming an Entry zone doubles the entry time of the group.
Opening an Entry zone during the exit time is not reported on the keypad as an open zone; the Entry/Exit
Horns bleep rapidly to indicate that the zone is open.
08 Push Set
This zone function is used to terminate the setting routine. The system sets when the Push Set zone, usually a push button, is activated. The Entry/Exit Horn stops immediately the button is pressed; the system sets after four seconds, allowing the doors to settle to the closed state. The Push Set zone remains inactive until the next setting routine.
NOTE: The Push Set zone can be either 1k Ω going to 2k Ω or 2k Ω to 1k Ω - refer to Installation Manual
(II1-0027), System Architecture for wiring details. The first time that the Push Set is used to terminate the setting, the button will require to be pressed twice; the first press identifies the normal status of the button to the system.
Activating a Push Set zone during the exit time is not reported on the keypad as an open zone; the Entry/
Exit Horns bleep rapidly to indicate that the zone is open.
NOTE: The termination feature of a Final zone can be extended to terminate the setting of multiple groups by pressing the ✴ key when assigning a group to the zone. Refer to the Star ✴ Group Function .
09 Keyswitch
The Keyswitch function allows a zone to be used as an on/off switch for the system or assigned groups.
Operating a Keyswitch zone when the system is unset starts the timed full setting routine, therefore the exit time is applicable. The system sets when the exit time expires or a Final or Push Set is activated.
NOTE: Assigning a # to the keyswitch zone function will cause the Instant setting routine to be activated. In this case the exit time is not applicable. If a Keyswitch Zone has its omit attribute enabled, activation of the Keyswitch will force set the assigned groups. Only zones with the omit attribute enabled will be omitted.
If a keyswitch zone type (9) is operated twice (i.e. set/unset) during the exit time of an autoset then the autoset is cancelled.
Operating a keyswitch zone type during the pre-warn period of an autoset will start a Force Set. If you then activate the switch again (i.e. unset with keyswitch) before the panel sets, the pre-warn continues on the autoset.
NOTE: When the keyswitch is activated the second time to take panel back into pre-warn, it can be up to
10 seconds before the pre-warn tones at the keypad start up again.
72
Galaxy Programming Manual
52 - Program Zones (cont’d)
If the system is set, operating a Keyswitch immediately unsets the assigned groups; there is no entry time countdown.
The Part attribute of the Keyswitch function defaults to 0 (disabled); the standard Keyswitch function full sets the system. To part set the system using the Keyswitch , the Part attribute must be enabled.
NOTE: The operation of a Keyswitch zone can be extended to the setting and unsetting of multiple groups by pressing the ✴ key when assigning a group to the zone. Refer to the Star ✴ Group Function .
The standard programming of the Keyswitch function requires a momentary change from 1k Ω to 2k Ω to both set and unset the system. If the Keyswitch connected has a latching mechanism, press the ✴ key when assigning the function; the display indicates 09= ✴ KEYSWITCH has been assigned. The
✴ Keyswitch operation is as follows: 1k Ω to 2k Ω sets the system; 2k Ω to 1k Ω unsets the system.
The Keyswitch function can also be programmed to reset alarms - refer to option 51.14 =
PARAMETERS.Keyswitch Level . If the Keyswitch is assigned a sufficient level to reset the alarm condition, the alarm is cancelled and immediately reset when the Keyswitch is used to unset the system following an alarm activation.
NOTE: The activated zones are not displayed on the keypad when a Keyswitch is used to reset the alarm.
10 Secure Final
This zone has dual functionality depending on whether the system is set or unset. When the system is setting, set or unsetting the operation is identical to the Final zone function. When the system is unset the operation is identical to the Security zone function.
Pressing the ✴ key when programming a Secure Final zone doubles the entry time of the group.
Opening a Secure Final zone during the exit time is not reported on the keypad as an open zone; the Entry/
Exit Horns bleep rapidly to indicate that the zone is open.
The termination feature of a Secure Final zone can be extended to terminate the setting of multiple groups by pressing the ✴ key when assigning a group to the zone. Refer to the Star ✴ Group Function .
11 Part Final
This zone has dual functionality depending on whether the system is full set or part set. When the system is full set the zone operation is identical to the Final zone function. When the system is part set the zone operation is identical to the Intruder zone function.
Pressing the ✴ key when programming a Part Final zone doubles the entry time of the group.
Opening a Part Final zone during the exit time is not reported on the keypad as an open zone; the Entry/Exit
Horns bleep rapidly to indicate that the zone is open.
12 Part Entry
This zone has dual functionality depending on whether the system is full set or part set. When the system is full set the zone operation is identical to the Exit zone function. When the system is part set the zone operation is identical to the Entry zone function.
Pressing the ✴ key when programming a Part Entry zone doubles the entry time of the group.
73
52 - Program Zones (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
13 PA
The PA (Personal Attack) function is continuously operational. Activation of this zone type overrides the Bell
Delay parameter and causes an instant full alarm condition that requires to be reset with a code authorised for
PA Reset — refer to Option 51 – PARAMETERS, 22 = PA Reset ; the Intruder outputs are not activated by PA zones.
NOTES
1.
If a PA zone is open, it is indicated on the keypad whenever a valid code is entered. The group that the open PA is assigned to cannot be set until it is closed.
2. Galaxy 512 only — engineer mode cannot be exited if a PA zone is open.
14 PA Silent
The PA Silent function is identical to the PA function, with the exception that there is no audible or visual indication of the activation; that is, no bells or strobes are activated. Only the PA output (normally channel 2 on the digital communicator) signals the alarm. The activation ( + ) and restoral (–) of PA Silent zones is recorded in the event log.
NOTES
1.
At the time of setting, any PA Silent zones that are currently open are reported to the user.
2.
The tamper facility on the PA zone remains active while engineer mode is accessed.
3. Galaxy 128, 500, 504 & 512 — engineer mode cannot be exited if a PA Silent zone is open.
15 PA Delay
The PA Delay function is identical to the PA function, with the exception that the PA output activation can be delayed for up to 60 seconds; this is determined by option 51.13 = PARAMETER.PA Delay . During the period of delay the Entry/Exit Horns activate to remind the user that the PA delay is counting down; entering a valid code or closing the PA Delay zone aborts the alarm.
NOTES
1.
If a PA Delay zone is open, it is indicated on the keypad whenever a valid code is entered. The group that the open PA Delay is assigned to cannot be set until it is closed.
2.
The tamper facility on the PA zone remains active while engineer mode is accessed.
3. Galaxy 512 only — engineer mode cannot be exited if a PA Delay zone is open.
16 PA Delay Silent
The PA Delay Silent function is identical to the PA Delay function, with the exception that there is no audible or visual indication of the activation; that is, no bells or strobes are activated. Only the PA output (normally channel 2 on the digital communicator) signals the alarm. The activation ( + ) and restoral (–) of PA Delay
Silent zones are recorded in the event log.
NOTES
1.
At the time of setting, any PA Delay Silent zones that are currently open are reported to the user.
2.
The tamper facility on the PA zone remains active while engineer mode is accessed.
3. Galaxy 512 only — engineer mode cannot be exited if a PA Delay Silent zone is open.
74
Galaxy Programming Manual
52 - Program Zones (cont’d)
17 Link
This zone type has no operational function; it is designed to be used as a source of a link - refer to option 54 =
LINKS . The activation ( + ) and de-activation (–) of Link zones is recorded in the event log.
NOTE: option 54 = LINKS is not available on the Galaxy 8.
18 Spare
The Spare function allows any zones that are not being used to be ignored by the system; the resistance readings from the circuit - including the tamper conditions - do not activate an alarm condition.
NOTE: It is recommended that all unused zones are programmed as Spare and that a 1k Ω 1% resistor is connected across each of these zones.
19 Fire
The Fire function is continuously operational. When activated, a FIRE zone overrides the Bell Delay parameter and activates an instant alarm ( Bell , Strobe and Fire ). The keypad buzzer and control panel horn output, if fitted, emit an interrupted tone (one second on, 0.5 seconds OFF), easily distinguishable from all other alarm conditions. Any valid code entry cancels the Fire activation.
20 Tamper
The Tamper function is continuously operational. When a Tamper zone is activated (1k Ω to 2k Ω ), a tamper alarm is generated; this requires to be reset by a code authorised for Tamper Reset - refer to option 51.7 =
PARAMETERS.Tamper Reset . If a tamper condition (open or short circuit) occurs, a tamper alarm is also generated.
21 Bell Tamper
This function is identical to the operation of the Tamper function but is dedicated to bells, sirens and other modules or output devices requiring tamper protection.
22 Beam Pair
This function is only operational when two consecutively addressed zones programmed as Beam Pair are open in the set condition; the activation is identical to the Intruder function. The system cannot set if a single
Beam Pair is open.
NOTE: Beam Pair zones must be consecutively addressed; the first Beam Pair zone must have an even number address, the second Beam Pair must have the next address (an odd number). For example, valid Beam Pair addresses are 1036 & 1037 , 2018 & 2031 - in this case, RIO 202 has not been connected, therefore zone 2031 is the next address to 2018 .
23 Battery Low
This function is used to monitor the voltage output of a standby battery connected to a power supply. The activation ( + ) and de-activation (–) of Battery Low zones is recorded in the event log.
75
52 - Program Zones (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
24 Line Fail
The Line Fail function is used to monitor the telephone line that a remote signalling device is connected to for communications failure.
When the system is in the unset state, the first activation of a Line Fail zone causes a local alarm and the message TELECOM FAILURE is displayed, subsequent Line Fail activations do not sound the local alarm; the only indication is the keypad display.
When the system is set, activation of the Line Fail zone overrides the Bell Delay parameter; on unsetting the system a local alarm is generated and the keypad gives an indication that Line Fail zone has activated. If an alarm condition occurs while the Line Fail is active, an instant full alarm is generated.
If the Line Fail zone is active at the point of setting, a warning message is displayed; the user can choose to continue or abort the setting procedure. It is also possible to prevent the system setting if the Line Fail is active by enabling the Stop Set parameter (option 51.18
).
25 AC Fail
This function is used to monitor a remote power supply. In the event of a power failure the AC Fail zone is activated; the activation ( + ) and de-activation (–) of the zone is recorded in the event log.
26 Log
This zone type has no operational function; it is designed to record the activation of a zone in both the set and unset state. The activation ( + ) and de-activation (–) of Log zones is recorded in the event log.
27 Remote Access
This function is used to disable remote servicing of the Galaxy panel. When the Remote Access zone is active the Galaxy Gold software is prevented from gaining access to the Galaxy panel.
28 Video
This function is identical to the Intruder function, with the exception that the cumulative number of activations from Video zones, before a full alarm is generated, is programmable. The number of activations required is determined by the Video parameter (option 51.30
); the range is 1–9 (Galaxy 8 is fixed at 2 activations). The activation count is incremented when any Video zone in the group activates; the count is reset to zero when the group is unset.
29 Video Exit
The Video Exit function is identical to the Video function, with the exception that the user can activate the zone during setting and unsetting without incrementing the Video activations count. The Video output is not activated during setting and unsetting.
76
Galaxy Programming Manual
52 - Program Zones (cont’d)
30 Intruder Delay
The Intruder Delay function is identical to the Intruder function, with the exception that the full alarm activation can be delayed for up to 50 minutes (0–3000 seconds); this is determined by the Delay Alarm parameter (option 51.31
). The Intruder Delay zone must remain open for the period of the Delay Alarm parameter; while the zone is open the Entry/Exit Horns activate to remind the user that the Delay Alarm is counting down. Unsetting the system or closing the Intruder Delay zone aborts the alarm and resets the timer.
If a second Intruder Delay zone opens followed by the first zone closing, the Delay Alarm time continues to count from the activation of the first zone. The Delay Alarm timer is reset only when all delay type zones return to the closed state.
NOTE: On the Galaxy 8 the Delay Alarm parameter (option 51:31 ) is set to 1 minute and can not be changed.
31 Log Delay
The Log Delay function operation is identical to the Log function, with the exception that the recording of the zone activation can be delayed for up to 50 minutes (0–3000 seconds); this is determined by the Delay
Alarm parameter (option 51.31
). Closing the Log Delay zone resets the timer and aborts the recording of the event in the log.
32 Set Log
The Set Log function is identical to the Log function, with the exception that zone activations are only recorded in the event log during the set period.
33 Custom A
The Custom A function allows a zone to be assembled. The functionality of the zone; when it activates; the outputs activated; if it sets or unsets the systems; if it logs, are assigned using menu option 64 = ASSEMBLE
ZONE . Once the Custom A zone has been created, it can be assigned to as many zones as required.
34 Custom B
This function is identical in operation and assembly to Custom A .
77
52 - Program Zones (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
35 = Exit Guard
The Exitguard function allows a zone to be used to omit other zones on the system. This is useful for permitting access via doors programmed as 24 Hours or Security .
The Exitguard zone must be the source of a link (refer to option 54 = LINKS ); the destination of the
Exitguard link is either a zone address or an output type.
When opened, the Exitguard omits the zone entered as the link destination; an alarm is not activated if the
Exitguard zone is open while a zone that it is omitting is open. If the destination zone is opened while the
Exitguard zone is closed, an alarm activation occurs; opening the Exitguard omits the zone and silences the output types assigned to the link destination. Closing the Exitguard zone while the destination zone is still open does not result in an alarm activation; closing the destination zone deactivates the link and returns the zone to its normal operation.
NOTE: The Exitguard function cannot be used as a link source to activate a link destination output.
Programming Example: • Zone 1014 = An on/off keyswitch programmed as Exitguard .
• Zone 1015 = A door contact programmed as Security .
• Output type Link A = An output wired to a local horn and programmed as Link
A .
NOTE: Exit Guard guard zones do not omit zones open when the exit guard zone is activated , even if they are subsequently closed.
Operation: The Security door contact ( 1015 ) can be omitted at any time by operating the Exitguard keyswitch (1014). If the door (1015) is opened without first being omitted, then the Link A horn activates and needs to be reset by operating the keyswitch (1014).
L i n k
1
2
3
S o u r c e
Z o n e = 1 0 1 4
Z o n e = 1 0 1 5
Z o n e = 1 0 1 4
D e s t i n a t i o n
Z o n e = 1 0 1 5
O u t p u t = L i n k A
O u t p u t = L i n k A
Table 15. Exit Guard Zones
36 Mask
The Mask function is designed to be used with detectors capable of reporting that their field of view has been blocked or masked. The Mask function is identical to the Security function, with the exception that the
Mask output is activated instead of Security .
37 Urgent
The Urgent function is continuously operational; it is identical to the Intruder function, with the exception that it activates a full alarm condition (including the Intruder outputs) in any set or unset condition.
78
Galaxy Programming Manual
52 - Program Zones (cont’d)
38 PA Unset
This PA Unset function is identical to the PA Silent function, with the exception that it is only operational when the system is unset; the function is inactive when the group is set.
39 Keyswitch Reset
The Keyswitch Reset function allows alarms to be cancelled and the system to rearm without unsetting the
Galaxy. The level of reset authorisation is determined by the Keyswitch Level (option 51.14
). The level required to reset Intruder , PA and Tamper alarms is determined by the System Reset , Tamper Reset and PA Reset parameters (option 51.06
, 51.07 and 51.22
) respectively.
This function is designed to permit a remote signal, for example REDCare’s Return Path Signalling feature, to reset the system following an alarm condition.
47 Vibration (Galaxy 504 & 512)
The Vibration function is continuously operational and is designed for use with vault sensors. Vibration zones can be block omitted using menu option 11 = Omit Zones . If the zone selected to be omitted from the system is a Vibration zone , then all zones programmed with this function are omitted.
NOTES
1.
All Vibration zones in all groups are omitted when any Vibration zone is omitted. The user code does not have to have access to all of the groups.
2. Vibration zones remain omitted until a single Vibration zone is manually reinstated. The unsetting of the system does not reinstate omitted Vibration zones.
48-51 ATM-1, ATM-2, ATM-3 & ATM-4 (Galaxy 512 only)
The Galaxy 512 has four ATM (Automatic Teller Machine) zone types. These zone functions are continuously operational and are designed for the special maintenance and restocking requirements of ATM’s.
A single ATM zone type can be omitted for the duration of the period entered in the ATM Timeout parameter (option 51.39
). The ATM Delay parameter (option 51.38
) determines the delay before the selected
ATM zones are omitted once selected by an ATM code ( User 188–197 ). Each of the zones ATM-1 to
ATM-4 zones activates a corresponding ATM output.
NOTE: The relevant ATM outputs are activated as soon as the ATM zone is selected, not when the ATM
Delay expires.
79
52 - Program Zones (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
On entering an ATM code, the system prompts for one of the ATM zone types to be selected; to select the
ATM zone type to be omitted use the A or B key or enter the number of the ATM zone type. Once the zone is selected, the keypad indicates the DELAY ACCESS - the number of minutes remaining until the ATM zones are omitted. Once the zone is omitted, the initiating keypad indicates the ACCESS TIMEOUT - the number of minutes remaining until the selected ATM zones are reintroduced to the system. The Entry/Exit
Horns sound a warning ten and five minutes before the zones are reinstated.
The omitted ATM zone type can be reinstated at any time, or the omit period can be extended by the ATM user code. Enter the ATM code and press the ent key; the system prompts for 1 = RESET ACCESS or 2
= ABORT ACCESS . Press 1 to restart the ATM Timeout or 2 to reinstate the omitted ATM’s .
NOTE: Only one ATM zone type may be omitted at any time.
52 Alarm Extend (G18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Alarm Extend function is identical to the Urgent function, with the exception that if the zone is open (and has not been previously omitted) at the end of the bell duration (refer to option 51.1 = PARAMETERS.Bell
Time ) it immediately activates another full alarm condition. Alarm Extend zones can only be omitted by option 11 = OMIT ZONES .
80
Galaxy Programming Manual
53 - Program Outputs
Option 53 – Program Outputs
This option is used by the engineer to modify the programming of the outputs on the system. The option also allows the attributes of the outputs to be changed. The programmable options are:
1
A t t r i b u t e s
O u t p u t F u n c it o n
D e s c r i p t i o n
A s s i g n o u t p u t t y p e
2
3
4
O u t p u t M o d e
O u t p u t P o l a r ti y
O u t p u t G r o u p s
1
2
3
=
=
=
L
R a t c h e lf e x
-
P u l s e
r f e o q
( 0 0 1 ll u i o
r e w
3 s s
0 a v c
0 0 a il d it v a c it s e c s o d o n
) e s t t o a a c t it r v e u s a s t o e f t e s z o n e s f o r p r o g r a m m e d p e ir o d
0
1
=
=
P O S
N E G -
1 2
0 V
V g g o i n g o i n g t o t o 0
1 2
V
V i n i n a c a c it it v a v a it it o o n n
A s s i g n g r o u p s t o t h e o u t p u t
(
N o t e : r e f e r t
G r o o u o p p it s o n o n l y
6 3 a p
.
1 p e
= a r
O P fi
T I t h e G
O N S .
r o
G u p r o o u p p it s ) .
o n i s e n a b l e d
Table 16. Output Attributes
Selecting Outputs
On entering the option, the first output on the system is displayed; the output address, function and mode are displayed on the top line, the polarity and assigned groups are displayed on the bottom line.
From the display of the first output, any output on the system can be displayed by pressing the A or B keys or by entering the address of a specific output.
NOTE: For direct output address selection the Galaxy 8, 18 and 60 only require the last 2 digits of the zone address to be entered; the Galaxy 128, 500, 504 and 512 require a 4 digit address to be entered.
The output is selected for programming by pressing the ent key; the first output programming attribute 1=Op
Function is displayed.
81
53 - Program Outputs (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
Keypad Outputs
The keypad outputs are fully programmable. The address of the keypad output is the keypad address prefixed with a star, for example the output for keypad 06 is ✳ 06 . The function of keypad outputs default to
Entry/Exit Horn .
The valid addresses of the keypads on each of the panels and the respective output addresses are indicated in the following table:
P a n e l L i n e A d d r e s s O u t p u t A d d r e s s
8 , 1 8 & 6 0
1 2 8
5 0 0 , 5 0 4 & 5 1 2 S 3
1
2
3
1
S 3
1
2
0 – 9 & A – F
C , E
0 – 2 , B , D & F
0 – 6 & F
C , E
0 – 2 , B , D & F
0 – 6 & F
0 – 6 & F
* 0 0 –
* 1 6
* 1 0 –
* 2 0 –
* 1 6
* 1 0 –
* 2 0 –
* 3 0 –
* 1 5 ( N o t e 1 )
* 1 8 ( N o t e 2 )
* 1 2 ( N o t e 3 )
* 2 6 &
* 1 5
* 2 9
* 1 7
* 1 8 ( N o t e 2 )
* 1 2 ( N o t e 3 ) * 1 5
* 2 6 &
* 3 6 &
* 2 9
* 3 9
* 1 7
* 1 9 ( N o t e 2 )
* 1 9 ( N o t e 2 )
4 0 – 6 & F * 4 0 – * 4 6 & * 4 9
Table 17. Addresses of Valid Keypad Outputs
NOTE 1: G8, 18 and 60 :On Line 1, keypad addresses B, C, D and E are not available if the Ethernet,
ISDN, RS232 or Telecom modules respectively are fitted.
NOTE 2: G128, 500, 504 and 512 :- On Line S3, keypad addresses C and E are not available if the
ISDN or Telecom modules are fitted.
NOTE 3: G128, 500, 504 and 512 :- On Line 1, keypad addresses B, D and F are not available if the
Ethernet, RS232 module and engineer keypad respectively are fitted, but can be used for keypads if these modules are not connected.
Control Horn ( ✳ 99)
The control unit horn output - addressed as ✴ 99 - is fully programmable.
NOTE: The Galaxy 8 does not have an on-board horn output.
Attributes
The attributes can be stepped through by pressing the A or B keys or directly selected by pressing the attribute number ( 1–4 ). Once the required attribute is on display, press the ent key to gain access for modification.
Once the attribute has been assigned press the ent key to save the programming and return to the attribute selection level. Pressing the esc key at any time when assigning attributes aborts the programming and returns to the attribute selection level.
1 = Output Function
Entering the Output Function attribute displays the address and the current function of the selected output along with the output function reference number. The output functions can be stepped through, forwards or backwards, using the A and B keys. Alternatively, a function can be directly selected by entering the function reference number, for example, entering 16 displays output function 16 = FIRE .
Once the required output function is displayed, it is assigned to the output by pressing the ent key.
82
Galaxy Programming Manual
53 - Program Outputs (cont’d)
2 = Output Mode
Each output function defaults to a specific, logical output mode. However, the output mode of each function can be modified to meet special requirements: when reprogrammed, the new mode applies to all outputs assigned to that function. The output modes are:
1 = Latch: the output remains active until a valid code is entered.
2 = Reflex: the output follows the activity of the triggering event, for example, the Set output follows the setting and unsetting of the group.
3 = Pulse: the output remains active for the programmed pulse time 1-3000 seconds (50 mins).
Programming the Output Mode
Select the required mode using the A or B keys or by selecting the number 1 – 3 . Once the required mode is on selected, press the ent key to accept the programming. If assigning the Pulse output mode, enter the pulse time (001 – 3000 seconds) and press the ent key.
3 = Output Polarity
The Output Polarity determines the normal operational state of the output. All outputs are referred to having positive ( 0 = POS ) or negative ( 1 = NEG ) polarity. An output programmed as positive polarity is 12 V in the normal condition and goes to 0 V when activated. A negative polarity output goes from the normal condition of 0 V to 12 V in the active state. All outputs except SET (09) default to positive output mode.
NOTE: The Switch DC output is a positive polarity output, however, the normal condition is 0 V, going to
12 V when activated. The output mode is normally Pulse .
4 = Output Groups (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
NOTE: The Groups attribute is only available if groups have been enabled on the system (refer to option 63
= OPTIONS ).
The Group attribute allows the output to be assigned to the groups on the system; an output can be assigned to more than one group. All outputs default to all groups on the system.
On selecting the Output Groups attribute, the groups that the output is currently assigned to are displayed.
Press the relevant number keys to toggle the status of the group and press the ent key; if the group number is displayed on the top line, then the group is assigned to the output; if a dash (–) appears in place of the group number, the group has been removed from the output.
Theoutput will activate if triggered by an event in any of the groups assigned to that output, unless output group status has been programmed.
Galaxy 500, 504 & 512
The Galaxy 500, 504 and 512 panels have 16, 32 and 32 groups respectively; these are displayed on the keypad in block of eight groups, sub-divided into A, B, C and D:
G r o u p B l o c k
A 1 8
B 1 8
C 1 8
P h y s i c a l G r o u p s
1 8
9 1 6
1 7 2 4 ( 5 0 4 & 5 1 2 o n l y )
D 1 8 2 5 3 2 ( 5 0 4 & 5 1 2 o n l y )
Table18. Output Groups
83
53 - Program Outputs (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
Use the A or B key to select the required group ( A1–D8 ). When the end of a block is reached, the next block of eight groups is selected; press keys 1–8 to toggle the status of the relevant group in the current block to the output; press the ent key to accept the selection.
Group Status
This group attribute offers an additional feature that makes the operation of the output conditional on the set status of each of the system groups. An output assigned Group Status only activates if the set conditions of the programming are met, for example, an Intruder output used to trigger a communicator can be programmed to activate only if groups 2 and 4 are set and group 3 is unset.
Groups 12345678
STATUS >-SUS----
To assign the Group Status conditions, press the ✴ key when selecting the groups: an arrow ( > ) is displayed on the bottom line as well as the current Status . Press the relevant number keys to toggle the status of the groups and press the ent key to accept the programming. The available group status conditions are:
S = Set — group must be set to allow output to activate;
U = Unset — group must be unset to allow output to activate;
– = Set or unset — output activation is independent of the group status.
84
Galaxy Programming Manual
53 - Program Outputs (cont’d)
Output Functions
The following table shows all the outputs and the zone functions and conditions that result in their activation.
O u t p u t F u n c t i o n s
–
–
S
S
–
S
–
–
A
S
–
–
A
S
?
–
A
–
A
–
–
S
S
S
S
–
S
S
S
S
0 1
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
–
–
A
–
?
?
L
S
Key:
S = Activates when system is set
P = Activates when system is Part Set
U = Unset
A = Activated in any condition
- = No effect
O = Activates when zone is omitted
–
–
S
S
–
S
–
–
S
S
–
–
A
S
?
–
A
–
A
–
–
S
S
S
S
–
S
S
S
S
0 2
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
–
–
A
–
?
?
L
S
4 7
4 8
4 9
5 0
5 1
5 2
3 3
3 4
3 5
3 6
2 9
3 0
3 1
3 2
3 7
3 8
3 9
4 0 – 4 6
2 5
2 6
2 7
2 8
2 1
2 2
2 3
2 4
1 7
1 8
1 9
2 0
1 3
1 4
1 5
1 6
0 9
1 0
1 1
1 2
0 5
0 6
0 7
0 8
0 1
0 2
0 3
0 4
Z o n e F u n c t i o n
F i n a l
E x i t
2
I n
4 t r
H u o d u e r r s
S e c u r i t y
D u a l
E n t r y
P u s h S e t
K e y s w i t c h
S e c u r e F i n a l
P a r t F i n a l
P a r t E n t r y
P A
P A S i l e n t
P A D e l a y
P A D e l a y S i l e n t
L i n k
S p a r e
F i r e
T a m p e r
B e l l T a m p e r
B e a m P a i r
B a t t e r y L o w
L i n e F a i l
A C F a i l
L o g
R e m o t e A c c e s s
V i d e o
V i d e o E x i t
I n t r u d e r D e l a y
L o g D e l a y
S e t L o g
C u s t o m A
C u s t o m B
E x i t g u a r d
M a s k
U r g e n t
P A U n s e t
K e y s w i t c h R e s e t
N o t U s e d
V i b r a t i o n
A T M 1
A T M 2
A T M 3
A T M 4
A l a r m E x t e n d
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
A
A
A
A
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0 3
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
U
?
?
L
–
–
–
S
S
–
S
–
–
S
S
–
–
–
S
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
S
S
S
S
–
S
S
S
S
0 4
S
S
A
A
A
A
A
A
–
–
A
–
?
?
L
S
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
?
T
?
T
A
A
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
?
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
0 5
T
T
T
T
T
–
T
T
L T
T
T
T
T
T
B e l l s S t r o b e P A I n t r u d e r T a m p e r
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
A
2 4
H r s
0 6
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
?
L
–
R e s e t
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
X
X
X
–
–
X
–
–
–
–
0 7
X
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
X
–
–
–
?
?
L
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
X
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
S w i t c h
D C
0 8
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
?
L
–
S e t E n g i n e e r S p a r e R e a d y S e c u r i t y
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
S
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
0 9
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
?
L
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1 0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
?
L
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1 1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
?
L
–
–
–
A
A
–
A
–
A
A
A
–
–
–
A
?
–
A
A
A
A
–
A
A
A
A
–
A
A
A
A
1 2
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
–
–
A
U
?
?
L
A
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
U
–
–
–
–
A
–
–
–
1 3
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
?
L
–
? =
T
Activation dependant on system programming
X = Activates during Exit Time
E = Activates during Entry Time
L = Switches output off if linked to destination output
= Activates if zone resistance is <800 Ω or >12000 Ω
–
–
–
–
–
–
A
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
A C
F a i l
1 4
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
?
L
–
–
–
–
–
–
Table 19A. Output Activations per Zone
85
53 - Program Outputs (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
O u t p u t F u n c t i o n s
–
–
–
–
U
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B a
L o t t w
1 5
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
A
–
–
–
–
–
L
–
?
?
–
–
–
5 0
5 1
5 2
4 7
4 8
4 9
3 3
3 4
3 5
3 6
3 0
3 1
3 2
2 6
2 7
2 8
2 9
2 1
2 2
2 3
2 4
2 5
1 7
1 8
1 9
2 0
1 2
1 3
1 4
1 5
1 6
0 8
0 9
1 0
1 1
0 3
0 4
0 5
0 6
0 7
0 1
0 2
Z o n e F u n c t i o n
F i n a l
E x i t
I n t r u d e r
2 4 H o u r s
S
S
P
K
P e e c u a e c
D
E y u s r t n s u u a h t r r i y
S w i r e
F i l
F t y n i e t c a t n h
P a r t E n t r y
P A l a l
P A
P
P
D
T
A
A e
S a
L l a p a
F
S
D i i n e y li k r r e m p e l a
S e n e r y t li e n
B e ll T a m p e r
B e a m P a i r t
B
R e
V a
L t
A i t e n
V
C
L e m o t e i d e i r o d o y
F
F g e a
L a
A c o
E x li o li c e s s i t w
I n t r u d e r D e l a y
L o g D e l a y
3
3
7
8
3 9
4 0 – 4 6
K e y
C
C
E
U r g e n t
P A U n s e t s
N
S e u s u s x
M w o i t i t t t t t g a o o m o m c
L s
U u h s a k g
A
B r
R e d d
V i b r a t i o n
A T M 1
A T M 2 e s e t
A l a r
A
A
T
T m
M
M
E
-
x
3
4 t e n d
F i r e
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
A
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1 6
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
L
–
?
?
–
–
–
–
A
H o r n E / E H o r n
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
X
X
–
X
–
–
–
P
S a e r t t
1 9
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
T
–
–
–
–
–
L
–
?
?
–
–
–
A
S X E
X E
–
A
A
?
–
–
A
–
A
S X E
1 8
S X E
S X E
S X E
A
A
S X E
S X E
X
–
–
–
S X E
S X E
–
U
–
–
–
–
–
A
–
–
A
–
–
S X E
–
–
?
?
L
S X E
S
–
–
S
S
–
–
–
–
A
S
–
A
A
?
–
–
A
A
A
–
A
A
–
–
S
S
S
S
S
1 7
S
S
–
–
A
–
–
L
S
?
?
–
–
–
–
–
C o n f i r m
–
–
–
–
–
A
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
L
F i a n e li
2 1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
L
–
?
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
S
S
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
S
–
–
S
S
–
–
–
S
S
–
-
2 0
-
S
–
–
–
–
–
L
–
?
?
–
–
–
–
–
V i d e o
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
C
F o a m m li
2 3
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
L
–
?
?
–
–
–
S
–
–
S
S
–
–
–
–
S
S
–
V
S
?
–
–
–
S
–
–
S
S
–
–
S
S
S
S
S
2 2
S
S
–
–
–
–
–
L
S
?
?
–
–
–
–
–
S
S
–
–
–
–
S
S
–
A
S
?
–
–
A
S
A
–
S
S
–
–
S
S
S
R e
N o
a r m
2 8
S
S
S
S
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
A
–
–
L
S
?
?
S
–
–
T i m e r A
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
2 9
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
L
–
?
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
A
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
D L Y D
F i r e
2 7
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
A
–
–
–
–
–
L
–
?
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
W r o n g
C D
2 5
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
L
–
?
?
–
–
–
A l e r t
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
2 6
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
L
–
?
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
B
T a e s t t t
2 4
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
L
–
?
?
–
–
–
Key:
S = Activates when system is set
P = Activates when system is Part Set
U = Unset
A = Activated in any condition
- = No effect
O = Activates when zone is omitted
? = Activation dependant on system programming
X = Activates during Exit Time
E = Activates during Entry Time
L = Switches output off if linked to destination output
T = Activates if zone resistance is <800 Ω or >12000 Ω
Table 19B. Output Activations per Zone (Cont’d)
86
Galaxy Programming Manual
53 - Program Outputs (cont’d)
O u t p u t F u n c t i o n s
4 8
4 9
5 0
5 1
5 2
3 7
3 8
3 9
3 4
3 5
3 6
4 0 – 4 6
4 7
3 1
3 2
3 3
2 6
2 7
2 8
2 9
3 0
2 3
2 4
2 5
2 0
2 1
2 2
1 7
1 8
1 9
1 4
1 5
1 6
1 1
1 2
1 3
0 6
0 7
0 8
0 9
1 0
0 2
0 3
0 4
0 5
0 1
Z o n e F u n c t i o n
F i n a l
E x i t
2
I n
4 t r
H u o d u e r r s
S e c u r i t y
D u a l
E n t r y
P
K u e y s h s w
S i t e t c h
S e c u r e F i n a l
P a r t F i n a l
P a r t E n t r y
P A
P A
P
P
D
A
A e l
L
S
F
S
D p i i n r i l a y a e n e l k e a
S r e i t y l e n t
T a m p e r
B e l l T a m p e r
B e a m P a i r
B a t t e r y L o w
L i n e F a i l
A C F a i l
R
I
L e m o t e
V n t r u
L o
S
V d g i i d e e t o d o e r
D g
A c e o
D
L o c e s s
E x g i t e l e l a y
C u s t o m A
C u s t o m B
E x i t g u a r d
M a s k a y
K e y
P
U
A s w
N o
V i
A l a r
A
A r t g
U i t b r
T
A T
A T
T m e n c h n s
U s a t i
M
M
1
M 2
M 3
4 t e
R e d o n t e s
E x t e n d e t
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
U
U
U
?
L
–
U
U
?
U
U
U
U
U
?
L
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U ?
–
U
U
U
U
U
U
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
T i m e r B
3
–
0
W a l k
T e s t
Z o n e
O m i t
W a r n i n g C u s t o m
A
3 1
U
3 2
O
3 3
A
3 4
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
U
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
–
?
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
A
A
A
?
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
L
–
A
A
?
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
?
L
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
U
U
U
U
U
U
–
O
O
–
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O ?
O
O
O
O
O
O ?
L O
A
A
A
–
A
A
A
A
A
A
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
L
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
C u s t o m
B
3 5
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
T e s t
A ?
A ?
A ?
A ?
–
A ?
A ?
A ?
U ?
–
?
L
–
S ?
–
–
?
S ?
S ?
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
A ?
A ?
A ?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
S ?
S ?
R e s e t
R Q D
M a s k V a l i d c d
3
S
7
?
S ?
3 8
–
3 9
–
S
S
S
?
?
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
L
S P E
–
–
–
?
L
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
L
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
3 6
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
L
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
U X
–
–
F a i l
S e t
4 0
–
–
–
–
–
D u r e s s
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
L
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
I l l e g a l
C o d e
4 2
–
–
–
–
?
L
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
4 1
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
?
L
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
M a x
T a m p
4 3
–
Key:
S = Activates when system is set
P = Activates when system is Part Set
U = Unset
A = Activated in any condition
- = No effect
O = Activates when zone is omitted
? = Activation dependant on system programming
X = Activates during Exit Time
E = Activates during Entry Time
L = Switches output off if linked to destination output
T = Activates if zone resistance is <800 Ω or >12000 Ω
Table 19C. Output Activations per Zone (Cont’d)
A b o r t U n s e t
–
–
–
?
L
?
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
4 4
–
–
–
–
?
L
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
U
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
4 5
–
87
53 - Program Outputs (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
O u t p u t F u n c t i o n s S e t L a t e
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
L
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
S ?
–
–
–
U / S
E a r l y
4 7
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
L
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
U ?
–
–
–
4 6
–
–
4 8
4 9
5 0
5 1
5 2
3 7
3 8
3 9
4 0 – 4 6
4 7
3 4
3 5
3 6
3 1
3 2
3 3
2 4
2 5
2 6
2 1
2 2
2 3
2 7
2 8
2 9
3 0
1 8
1 9
2 0
1 5
1 6
1 7
1 2
1 3
1 4
0 9
1 0
1 1
0 6
0 7
0 8
0 1
0 2
0 3
0 4
0 5
Z o n e F u n c t i o n
F i n a l
E x i t
I n t r u d e r
2 4 H o u r s
S e c u r i t y
D u a l
E n t r y
P u s h S e t
K
S e
P
P e a
P a y c u r t
A s r t r
P
S w e
F
E
A i l i
F t i n n t i c e n n t h a l r y a l
P A
P
D
B a t
A e l
L
D a y
S p
T a
B e l l
F
A C
L i
L i n e e n k
B e a m o l a
S a r e i r e m p t e r y g e
L r y i l e n
T a m p e r
P a i r
F a i l o w
F a i l t
R e m o t e A c c e s s
V i d e o
V i d e o E x i t
I n t r u d e r D e l a y
L o g D e l a y
S e t L o g
C u s t o m A
C u s t o m B
E x i t g u a r d
M a s k
U r g e n t
P A U n s e t
K e y s w i t c h R e s e t
N o t U s e d
V i b r a t i o n
A T M 1
A T M 2
A T M 3
A T M 4
A l a r m E x t e n t
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
L
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
–
?
?
?
4 8
?
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
L
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
4 9
–
–
P r e W a r n A u t o s e t N o t U s e d L i n k A O
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
L
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
N o t
U s e d
6 8 6 9
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
L
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
R F
S u p e r
6 7
–
–
L o c k o u t
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
L
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
7 0
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
L
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
R F
J a m
6 6
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
L
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
5 0
–
–
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
L
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
5 1 6 5
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
?
–
A
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
L
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
V i b
T e s t
7 1
–
–
A t m 1 4
–
–
O
–
–
–
O
–
O
O
?
L
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
?
–
–
–
–
–
–
7 2 7 5
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Key:
S = Activates when system is set
P = Activates when system is Part Set
U = Unset
A = Activated in any condition
- = No effect
O = Activates when zone is omitted
? = Activation dependant on system programming
X = Activates during Exit Time
E = Activates during Entry Time
L = Switches output off if linked to destination output
T = Activates if zone resistance is <800 Ω or >12000 Ω
Table 19D. Output Activations per Zone (Cont’d)
88
Galaxy Programming Manual
53 - Program Outputs (cont’d)
01 Bells (Latch)
The Bells output is activated on a full alarm event when the system is set. This output is subject to the Bell
Time, Bell Delay and No. Rearm parameters.
02 Strobe (Latch)
The Strobe output is activated on a full alarm event during the set state. This output is subject to the Bell
Delay . The Strobe output follows the Bell Time , but latches on after the last rearm.
03 PA (Latch)
The PA output is activated whenever any of the PA zone types activate. The output is not subject to the
Rearm parameter; it latches on remains active until a valid code, with the appropriate PA Reset level, is entered.
04 Intruder (Latch)
The Intruder output is activated on a full alarm event during the set state. Dependent upon the programming of parameter 51.56 Force Restore the intruder output restore is either subject to the Confirm Time Window
+ unset or entry of a valid code with the appropriate system reset level.. Refer to the 51.56 Force Restore description for further details.
05 Tamper (Latch)
The Tamper output is activated whenever a circuit tamper or lid tamper occurs. The output is not subject to the Rearm parameter: it latches on and remains active until a valid code, with the appropriate Tamper Reset level, is entered.
The output is also activated on the first entry of the engineer code when accessing engineer mode.
NOTE: The Tamper output is not activated on the Galaxy 512 when engineer access is authorised by the user.
06 24 Hours
The 24 Hours output is activated whenever a 24 Hour zone is activated. The output is not subject to the
Rearm parameter: it latches on and remains active until a valid code, with the appropriate System Reset level, is entered.
07 Reset (Latch)
The Reset output type is used as a control line output to latch, freeze and reset movement detector LEDs.
08 Switch DC (Pulse)
This Switch DC output is used to power detectors that require a momentary power interruption to reset them, for example, break glass or vibration detectors. This output reverses its polarity (changes from 0V to 12V) for the period of the Pulse output mode when the setting procedure has been initiated.
NOTE: When installing detectors that require to be powered from a Switch DC output, connect the positive lead of the detector to the 12V terminal of a power supply and the negative lead to Switch DC output terminal. Do not change the Output Polarity to 1=Neg : it must remain as positive polarity.
89
53 - Program Outputs (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
09 Set (Reflex)
The Set output is activated when the assigned groups on the system are set. This output is a Reflex output and follows the set and unset status of the groups.
10 Engineer (Reflex)
The Engineer output is activated while the engineer mode is being accessed.
11 Spare (Latch)
The Spare output has function: it is used to designate outputs that are not being used on the system.
12 Ready (Reflex)
The Ready output is active when all zones in the system (group) are closed. This output activates in both the unset and set conditions.
13 Security (Latch)
The Security output is activated whenever a Security zone is activated. The output is not subject the Rearm parameter: it latches on and remains active until a valid code (level 2 or above) is entered.
14 AC Fail (Reflex)
The AC Fail output indicates the status of the a.c. (mains) power supply. The output activates when the a.c.
supply fails or an AC Fail zone is activated. The output is reset when the a.c. supply is restored or the AC
Fail zone is closed. The activation is delayed subject to the time entered in the 20=Power Delay parameter.
15 Battery Low (Reflex)
The Battery Low output activates whenever the control unit stand-by battery falls below 10.5V or a Battery
Low zone is activated. The output is restored when the voltage rises above 10.5V or the Battery Low zone is closed.
16 Fire (Latch)
The Fire output is activated whenever a Fire zone is activated. The output is not subject to the Rearm parameter: it latches on and remains active until a valid code (level 2 or above) is entered.
17 Horn (Latch)
The Horn output is a general alarm output and is activated by most zone types in both the local and full alarm modes. For example, a Fire zone activation causes the Horn output to pulse on and off – on for 0.5 seconds, off for 0.1 seconds. The Horn output is subject to the Bell Time, Bell Delay and No. Rearm parameters.
90
Galaxy Programming Manual
53 - Program Outputs (cont’d)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
18 E/E Horn (Latch)
The Entry/Exit Horn output has a dual function:
•
• in an alarm condition its function is identical to that of the Horn output; during the unsetting and setting of the system it is used to provide an indication on the status of the system. The indication states are as follows:
General Alarm ON 500 msecs. OFF 500 msecs.
Clear to Exit Continuous
Exit interrupted
75% Exit Time
Set
Normal Entry
75% Entry Time
Fire
Chime
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
ON 100 msecs. OFF 100 msecs.
ON 200 msecs. OFF 200 msecs.
ON 600 msecs. OFF 600 msecs (twice)
ON 800 msecs. OFF 200 msecs.
ON 200 msecs. OFF 200 msecs.
ON 500 msecs. OFF 100 msecs.
ON 500 msecs. OFF 400 msecs (twice)
19 Part Set (Reflex)
The Part Set output is activated when the assigned groups on the system are part set. This output is a Reflex output and follows the part set and unset status of the groups.
20 Confirm (Latch)
The Confirm output is activated when there have been activations on two separate zones: the second activation must occur within the Confirm Time Window. The zones do not have to be in the same group, however, both groups must be assigned to the Confirm output to allow activation. Cross-group confirmation is controlled by the Communications programming in menu 56.1, Telecoms. If signalling is by DTMF format, crossgroup confirmation can occur on groups that share the same confirm channel. In all other signalling formats, cross-group confirmation can occur on groups that share the same account number.
NOTE: The Confirm output is used to give positive identification that a genuine intruder alarm condition has occurred and to minimise the possibility of false alarm activations.
21 Line Fail (Reflex)
The Line Fail output is activated whenever a Line Fail zone is active or the telecom module detects and sustains a line failure for more than 30 seconds.
22 Video (Pulse)
The Video output is activated by the Video zone when the system is set. This output can be used to activate video recorder or video transmission systems.
23 Comm Fail (Latch)
The Comm Fail output is activated whenever there is a communication failure on the telecoms module telephone line. A fail to communicate event overrides the remaining Bell Delay period.
91
53 - Program Outputs (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
24 Batt Test
This test output is used on V4 and above.
25 Wrong CD
This output is activated whenever a wrong code alarm occurs. That is, when 6 wrong codes in succession are entered at the keypad. The output, by default pulses on for 90 seconds.
26 Alert (Latch) (Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Alert output is activated when the control panel loses communication with one of the remote modules or keypads.
27 Fire Delay (Latch) (Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Fire Delay output is activated whenever a Fire zone is activated. The activation of the output is delayed subject to the period determined by the 03=Abort Time parameter. The Fire Delay output is not subject to the Rearm parameter: it latches on and remains active until a valid code (level 2 or above) is entered.
28 No Re-Arm (Latch)
The No Rearm output is activated on a full alarm event during the set state: it is subject to the Bell Delay parameter. The No Rearm output is similar to the strobe output, but it stays on at the end of the bell time, until unset.
29 Timer A (Reflex) (Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Timer-A output is controlled by the Timer-A option (refer to option 65=Timers A/B ) and activates in accordance with the programmed on and off times assigned to the function.
30 Timer B (Reflex) (Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Timer-B output is controlled by the Timer-B option (refer to option 65=Timers A/B ) and activates in accordance with the programmed on and off times assigned to the function.
NOTE: If the TIMER A or B outputs are programmed as LATCH mode, then they can only be reset by a user code with access to all of the groups assigned to the relevant timer.
31 Walk Test (Reflex) (Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Walk Test output is activated when a zone included in the walk test is tested (refer to option 31=Walk
Test ).
32 Zone Omit (Reflex)
The Zone Omit ouput is activated as soon as a zone is omitted from the system by option 11=OMIT
ZONES or by option 54=LINKS . If the Output Mode attribute is assigned as:
•
•
Reflex (default) the output remains active until the zone is reinstated;
Latch the output is reset on entry of a valid code.
92
Galaxy Programming Manual
53 - Program Outputs (cont’d)
33 Warning (Latch) (Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Warning output is activated by the first occurrence of a high (1200-1300 Ω ) and low (800-900 Ω ) resistance reading on each of the system zones in a single 24 hour period: the activating zone is recorded in the log.
NOTE: The time period finishes at midnight, not 24 hours from first activation.
Subsequent high and low resistance readings from the same zone on the same day do not activate the output if it has been reset by a valid user code.
NOTE: If a low resistance reading is followed by a high resistance reading, the Warning output activates on the first occurrence of both activations.
34 Custom A (Latch) (Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Custom-A output is activated whenever a Custom-A zone is activated.
35 Custom B (Latch) (Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Custom –B output is activated whenever a Custom-B zone is activated.
36 Test (Pulse) (Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Test output is activated at 12:00 hours each day for two seconds – the period of the Pulse can be altered. This output can be used to perform a daily test on a digicom connected to the system.
37 Rest RQD (Latch) (Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Reset RQD output is activated when a system, tamper or PA alarm has occurred that requires to be reset by the engineer (level 7) code. Refer to option 51=PARAMETERS for details modifying the code levels assigned to the 06=System Reset, 07=Tamper Reset and 22=PA Reset parameters.
38 Mask (Latch) (Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Mask output is activated whenever a Mask zone is activated. The output is not subject to the Rearm parameter: it latches on and remains active until a valid group code (level 2 or above) is entered.
39 Valid Code (Reflex) (Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Valid Code output is activated by the entry of any valid code. If the Output Mode assigned is Reflex , the output remains active while the user is accessing the menu and setting and unsetting the system. Once the menu is exited or the system sets or unsets, the output is restored.
40 Fail Set (Latch) (Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Fail Set is activated if the system (or assigned groups) fails to set within the time assigned in parameter
35=Fail to Set – refer to option 51=PARAMETERS .
41 Duress (Latch)
The Duress function is activated on entry of a Duress Code (any valid code followed by two #’s, or a code assigned as a Duress Code using menu option 42 – Codes ). The output is not subject to the Rearm parameter: it latches on and remains active until a valid code (level 2 or above) is entered.
93
53 - Program Outputs (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
42 Illegal Code (Latch) (Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Illegal Code is activated 60 seconds after an entry of a single Dual Code or a code which is entered outwith the Timer A and/or Timer B times assigned to it in menu option 42.1.4=CODES.User
Codes.Time Zone.
43 Max Tamp (Latch)
The MAX TAMP output is activated when a MAX, MicroMAX or MAX 3 tamper is activated.
44 Abort (Latch)
The ABORT output is activated when a valid code is entered during the Abort period on system entry.
45 Unset
The Unset output is activated each time the system (or group) is unset. The default output mode attribute is programmed as pulse, for two seconds. This can be used to activate a buzzer to notify a user that the system has been unset, when using an RF fob.
46 Set Late (Latch) (Galaxy 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Set Late output is activated if the system has not been set by the programmed Monitor time – refer to option 65.3.1=TIMERS.Autoset.Status
.
47 U/S Early (Latch) (Galaxy 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Unset Early output is activated if the system has been unset before the programmed Monitor time – refer to option 65.3.1=TIMERS.Autoset.Status.
48 Prewarn (Reflex) (Galaxy 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Prewarn output is active during the programmed prewarning period of the autoset function. The mode is
Reflex . The Prewarn emits a constant tone if the autosetting of the system can be extended. If an extension is not possible, the Prewarn output pulses.
49 Autoset (Reflex) (Galaxy 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Autoset output is activated when the system has been set by the autoset function – refer to option
65.3=TIMERS.Autoset
. The default Output Mode attribute is programmed as Reflex, therefore the output remains active until the system unsets.
NOTE: The Set is also activated when the system autosets.
50 Not Used
94
Galaxy Programming Manual
53 - Program Outputs (cont’d)
51 – 65 Link A – O (Reflex)
Link output types have no inherent function: they are designed for use with option 54 = LINKS to provide the engineer with a means of activating a specific output address.
Link outputs can be activated by any of the link option sources. The operation of the Link output is dependent on the Output Mode and Groups assigned to the output.The Groups assigned to the Link must have at least one group common to the link output, if that output is to be activated. This feature can be used to multiply the number of different link outputs available on the system.
NOTE: When a zone function is the source of a Link output type, then a point to point link is available and is as effective as direct wiring.
66 RF Jam (Latch)
The RF Jam output is activated whenever any of the RF RIO’s configured onto the system detect a significant level of interference to cause radio jamming.
67 RF Super (Latch)
The RF Supervision output is activated whenever there is a supervision failure from any one of the supervised RF detectors configured onto the system. That is, when the system has received no signals (including periodic check-in signals) whatsoever, from a particular detector within the programmed supervision period.
68 – 69 Not Used
70 Lockout (Reflex) (Galaxy 512)
The Lockout output is active between the ON and OFF times assigned to the Lockout Status (option
65.3.6=TIMERS.Autoset.Lockout Status ). The Lockout output mode is Reflex, therefore it remains active until the lockout switches OFF.
71 Vibration Test (Pulse) (Galaxy 504 & 512)
The Vibration Test function is used to test zones programmed as Vibration. This output is used in conjunction with Precheck (menu option 66 – Pre-Check: - Mode: 4 – Forced Check ). The Vibration Test output sends a five second positive removed pulse to the vault sensors. Any sensor not activated by the test is reported by the pre-check function and prevents the system from setting.
72 – 75 ATM-1, ATM-2, ATM-3, ATM-4 (Reflex) (Galaxy 512)
The relevant ATM output is activated when the respective ATM zone type is selected for omission; the output does not wait until the ATM Delay period expires before it activates. This output is a Reflex output and follows omit status of the ATM zone types.
95
54 - Links
Galaxy Programming Manual
Option 54 – Links (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Links offers a powerful method of interconnecting zones, output functions, codes, keypads, and MAX modules. The links table is constructed by creating a link between one of the source types and a valid destination type. Activating the source of a link activates the destination – this can be used to switch outputs on and off to omit zones, codes, keypads and MAX modules from the system.
The links function allows MAX/MicroMAX/MAX 3 destinations to be assigned a ( ✴ ) star function. If the destination is programmed as MAX/MicroMAX/MAX 3 and the ( ✴ ) star is allocated, the assigned MAX/
MicroMAX/MAX 3 door relay will open for the duration the link is active. During this period no MAX alarms are generated if the door contact timeout is exceeded. The on-board horns are deactivated and the green open LED will be illuminated throughout.
When the link is deactivated the MAX/MicroMAX/MAX 3 horn sounds and the door relay remains open for the programmed relay duration period. - simulates an egress button activation.
If a max is disabled as the destination of a link, a card swiped at the max will still cancel an alarm or unset the system. However it will not activate the relay or do a max function.
The number of links that can be assigned on each of the Galaxy systems is:
• Galaxy 18 = 32
• Galaxy 60 = 64
• Galaxy 128 = 128
• Galaxy 500 = 256
• Galaxy 504 = 256
• Galaxy 512 = 256
Programming Links
On selecting the Links option, the details of Link 01 are displayed. If no link has been assigned the screen displays 01 NOT USED.
The details of each link can be displayed using the A and B keys, or a specific link can be selected by entering the required link number, for example 05, 29 . When the required link is displayed, press, the ent key to begin the programming procedure. The system prompts for the Link Source to be assigned. If groups are set then some sources and destinations will not be available for programming:
1.
Press the # key to select the required link source from the available types (refer to Table 20. Link
Source ).
2.
Press the A or B keys to select the actual link source (for example, the zone address or the user code number).
3.
If the source is required to toggle the destination on and off, press the ✴ key. The source is prefixed by a
✴ on the display.
NOTES:
1.
The link destination is activated by the first operation of the source and then deactivated by the second operation.
2.
Galaxy 18 does not have full use of links. It can only have an output type as its destination.
4.
Press the ent key; the source of the link is assigned and the keypad prompts for the link destination to be allocated.
5.
Press the # key to select the required link destination from the available types (refer to Table 21. Link
Destination ).
6.
Press the A or B keys to select the actual link destination (for example, the zone address or the output type). To cancel a link program the source as not used.
7.
Press the ent key.
96
Galaxy Programming Manual
54 - Links (cont’d)
8.
If the link destination is d). Output Type and Groups have been enabled (refer to option
63=OPTIONS ) then each link must be allocated to at least one group (use the A or B key to move between the group blocks; press keys 1 – 8 to assign the relevant groups in each block) and press the ent key.
NOTE: The groups determine which of the assigned output type destinations the link activates.
9.
The details of the assigned link are displayed.
NOTE: If the link is currently active, the source is separated from the destination by a + (plus) symbol. If the link is not active a – (negative) symbol is displayed.
10.
Press the A or B key to move to the next link to be assigned and repeat steps 1 –9 or press the ent key to escape from the LINKS menu option.
Source Type a) Not used
¾
-
Modifier
Example
Display
Notes
The link is not operational b) Zone Address Off 1014 When the zone is opened the link is active.
When the zone is closed the link is inactive.
When the zone opens first time, the link is activated. When the zone opens a second time, the link is deactivated. c) User Code Off *001 When the code is entered, the link is activated momentarily only.
This option is only practical to trigger a destination event, for example, an output pulse.
**001
When the code is entered second time, the link is deactivated. d) Output Address Off #1014 When the output is on, the link is active.
When the output is off, the link is inactive. e) MAX Address Off 01
When the output turns on first time, the link is activated.
When the output turns on second time, the link deactivates.
When the MAX is swiped with a card the link activates momentarily only. This option is only practical to trigger a destination event, for example, an output pulse.
*01
When the MAX is swiped a second time, the link deactivates. f) Link Timer Off LT01 When the Link timer times out, the link activates momentarily only. This option is only practical to trigger a destination event, for example, an output pulse.
*LT01
When the Link timer times out a second time, the link is deactivated.
Table 20. Link Source
97
54 - Links (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
Destination Type a) Not used b) Zone Address
¾
Modifier
Notes
- The link is not operational
- When the link is active, the zone is omitted from the system c) User Code* d) Output Type e) Output Address* f) Keypad Address*
- When the link is active, the user's PIN and MAX card are not operational.
- When the link is active, all outputs programmed with the selected function are activated.
- When the link is active, the specific output address is switched on. Please note that when using the output address as the destination, the deactivation of the link will switch the output off immediately, overriding any pulse time or latch mode of the output programming.
- When the link is active, the buttons on the keypad will not operate.
Off When the link is active, the MAX reader will not read cards. g) MAX Address*
On constantly be in the unlocked state. The door contact input will also be bypassed so that no alarm will occur. h) Latch Timer** - When the link is deactivated , the Link Timer starts to count down from the Latch timer value. Each subsequent activation of the link will restart the timer count down to this value. When the timer reaches zero the Link timer activates and it can trigger another link. If the link is continuously activated within the timer period, the counter will never reach zero and the Link timer will be held off.
The application for this would be a link that didn't activate so long as another event continues to happen with the time period. i) Reflex Timer** - The Reflex timers operate identically to the Latch timer except that the timer cannot be restarted will it is running. A
Reflex timer destination will still start a Link Timer running in the same way as a Latch timer destination.
An application for this would be a delayed action link.
Table 21. Link destination
NOTE:
¹
Destination type not available on the Galaxy 18 panel.
¹¹
There are 16 Link timers in the system. These Link timers are triggered by the Latch and Reflex timer destinations. Both the Latch and Reflex options operate the same set of Link timers. They just start the timers in different ways. A Latch timer can restart the Link timer while it is running. A Reflex timer cannot.
98
Galaxy Programming Manual
55 - Soak
Option 55 – Soak
The Soak option allows selected zones to be put onto test for a period ranging from 1 – 14 days (refer to option 51.16=PARAMETERS.Soak Time ). Activations from a zone on the soak test do not cause alarms but are recorded in the event log and are reported to level 2 (and above) users on unsetting of the system.
The zone remains on soak test until the selected number of days has passed without any alarm activation, the zones then resume normal operation – that it, activations result in alarms being generated.
The Soak Time is reset to the full number of days if there is an alarm activation on any of the selected zones.
NOTE: The Soak Time starts when the first zone is put onto soak test; subsequent additions are only tested for the period remaining in the Soak Time . Parameter 51.16, Soak Time must be programmed before activating any zones in to the soak test. The period remaining decreases by one day each day at 0900 hours.
Activation of an Exit or Video Exit zone during the Entry time does not reset the soak test and period.
Programming Soak Zones
On selecting the Soak option, the address and function of the first zone on the system is displayed. Move to the required zone by pressing the A or B keys or by entering the zone address. To place the zone on the soak test press the # key; the keypad indicates that the zone is now ON TEST . Select other zones to be put on soak test in the same way. Once all the zones have been selected, press the esc key; the keypad briefly displays the number of days remaining in the Soak Time parameter before escaping from the Soak operation.
99
56 - Communications
Galaxy Programming Manual
Option 56 – Communications
The Communications option is used to program the Galaxy Communication peripherals. This option has 4 sub menus, one for each of the communication peripherals. Each of these has its own set of sub menus as detailed in the following pages.
1 = Telecoms
This section supports programming of the Telecom module, for alarm signalling and remote servicing over
PSTN.
2 = RS232
This section supports programming of the RS232 module to allow direct wire communication to a serial comm port on a PC, or over PSTN using a third party modem connection.
3 = ISDN
This section supports programming of the ISDN module, for alarm signalling and remote servicing over ISDN
B and D channels.
4 = Ethernet
This section supports programming of the Ethernet module for alarm signalling and remote servicing over an
Ethernet LAN/WAN using both TCP/IP and UDP/IP protocols.
A list of the events controlled by each trigger is given in Appendix C of this Manual.
100
Galaxy Programming Manual
56 - Communications (cont’d)
Telecom Module
1 = Telecom
01 = Format 1 = DTMF
2 = SIA
3 = Microtech
4 = Contact ID
1 = Channels 1-16
2 = Acct/Channel
0 (0-4)
1 = Trigger Events
2 = Group Settings
1 = Trigger events
2 = Ack Timeout
3 = Group Settings
1 = Output Function
2 = Output Mode
3 = Output Polarity
4 = Output Group
1 = Trigger Events
2 = Group Settings
1 = Status
2 = Groups
1 = Telephone No.
2 = Account No.
1 = Status
2 = Groups
1 = 30 seconds
2 = 60 seconds
1 = Telephone No.
2 = Account No.
1 = Status
2 = Groups
1 = Telephone No.
2 = Account No.
02 = Telephone No. 1
03 = Account No.
04 = Receiver
05 = Telephone No. 2
06 = Dial Type
07 = Autotest
22 digits Max
6 digits Max.
1 = Single
2 = Dual
3 = Alternate
22 digits Max
1 = Tone
2 = Pulse
1 = Start Time
2 = Intervals
3 = Int. Test
0 - 99 hours
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
08 = Engineer Test
09 = No. of Rings
10 = Line Fail
10 (1-20)
1 = Line Volts
2 = Dial Tone
3 = Incoming Call
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
11 = Fail to Comm
12 = Remote Access
03 (0-20)
1 = Access Period
2 = Mode
1 = Off
2 = All Unset
3 = Any Set
4 = Any Time
1 = Direct Access
2 = Manager Authorise
3 = Call Back
13 = Call Home Not Available
14 = Alarm Monitoring 1 = Trigger (1-18)
2 = Telephone No.
3 = Account No.
15 = Priority (not available)
16 = Forced V.21
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
17 = SMS Paging 1 = Mobile No.
2 = Centre No.
3 = Format 1 = TAP
2 = UCP (SMS)
3 = UCP (Minicall)
4 = UCP (Numeric)
4 = Site ID
5 = Password
1 = Trigger Events
1 = Trigger Events
1 = Trigger Events
1 = Trigger Events
Figure 4. Telecom Module Programming Structure
101
56 - Communications
Galaxy Programming Manual
The Telecom module allows two-way communication via the telephone network. This can be used:
• to transmit alarm and event signals to ARCs, (Alarm Receiving Centres), supporting a number of signalling formats.
• to remotely service the Galaxy control panel via a PC with Galaxy Gold software installed.
For information on the installation of the Telecom module refer to TELECOM MODULE, Installation and
Operation Instructions (part number II1-0079).
NOTE: When using the Telecom module as a digital communicator to signal alarms and events to ARCs or to a PC with Alarm Monitoring software installed, the Format , Telephone Number 1 and Account
Number required to be programmed. Programming of the remaining options is either optional or not required.
01 Format
The Telecom module provides 4 signalling formats:
•
•
• DTMF
SIA
Microtech
• Contact ID
Once the format has been selected, the alarm and event triggers that the panel will transmit to the ARCs may be programmed.
1 = DTMF (Dual Tone Multiple Frequency)
When DTMF format is selected, the operation of the Telecom module is similar to that of a hardwired 8 or 16 channel communicator. The Telecom module transmits as an eight channel communicator if channels 9 - 16 are programmed as Spare .
NOTES:
1.
DTMF is fast format
2.
A battery low condition occurring on the Galaxy panel is always sent to the ARC as a code 8 in the status channel. This may cause problems for some ARCs. If a channel is assigned as Battery Low , then both the channel and the code 8 in channel 9 is transmitted.
Programming Channels
On selecting DTMF , the keypad displays 1 = Channels 1 – 16 . All 16 channels can be individually programmed. To access the Channels option press the ent key; the programming details of the first channel are displayed. Select the required channel using the A and B keys or by entering the channel number directly and press the ent key.
Channel Output Function Mode Status
Channel
Polarity
CH03 INTRUDER *L
POS A12345678
Mode
Groups assigned
102
Galaxy Programming Manual
56 - Communications (cont’d)
Channels 1-16
Each channel can be programmed with the following attributes:
1 = Output function
2 = Output mode
3 = Polarity
4 = Groups
1 = Output Function
Any of the system output functions (see option 53 = Program Outputs ) can be assigned to each of the channels 1 – 16. Channel 3 defaults to output function 04 = INTRUDER . All other channels default to
11=SPARE . Select the required output function using the A and B keys or by entering the function number directly. Once the required function is displayed, press the ent key to assign the function to the selected channel. For example, a PA function programmed on channel 2 results in a PA code to be transmitted on channel 2 to the ARC when there is a PA alarm activation.
Confirmed alarm conditions will now work across multiple groups. Previously, a confirmed condition would only be created if both zones activated were in the same group.Confirmed outputs (and channels in DTMF format, option 56.1.1.1
) will activate for alarms across groups as long as both groups con cerned have been assigned to that output or channel.
2 = Output Mode
Each output function defaults to a specific, logical output mode. However, the output mode of each function can be modified to meet special requirements: when reprogrammed, the new mode applies to all outputs assigned to that function. The output modes are:
1 = Latch: the output remains active until a valid code is entered,
2 = Reflex: the output follows the activity of the triggering event, for example, the Set output follows the setting and unsetting of the group.
3 = Pulse: the output remains active for the programmed pulse time (1-300 seconds).
Programming the Output Mode
Select the required mode using the A or B keys or by selecting the number 1 - 3 . Once the required mode is selected, press the ent key to accept the programming. If assigning the Pulse output mode, enter the pulse time (001 – 300 seconds) and press the ent key.
NOTE: The Output Mode status determines the operation of the channel restore. The status is modified by pressing the ✴ key when the channel details display on the keypad. The status options are:
✴ = Restore – channel sends restore code when reset
+ = Open/close - channel reports setting/unsetting blank = Alarm only - channel signals alarm only (no restore signal transmitted)
103
56 - Communications (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
3 = Output Polarity
The Output Polarity determines the normal operational state of the output.
0 = POS - channel activates when the output is triggered.
1 = NEG - channel activates when the output is reset.
4 = Output Groups (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
NOTE: The Groups attribute is only available if groups have been enabled on the system (refer to option
63 = OPTIONS )
The Group attribute allows the channel to be assigned to the groups on the system; a channel can be assigned to more than one group. The channel will only trigger when an event occurs on one of the groups assigned to the channel. All channels default to all groups on the system.
On selecting the Output Groups attribute, the groups that the channel is currently assigned to are displayed. Press the relevant number keys to toggle the status of the group and press the ent key: if the group number is displayed on the top line, then the group is assigned to the channel; if a dash (–) appears in place of the group number, the group has been removed from the channel.
Galaxy 500, 504 & 512
The Galaxy 500, 504 and 512 have more than 8 groups; in this case the groups are displayed on the keypad in blocks of 8, sub-divided into A, B for Galaxy 500 and A, B, C and D for Galaxy 504 and 512.
Use the A or B key to select the required group ( A1–D8 ). When the end of a block is reached, the next block of eight groups is selected, press keys 1-8 to toggle the status of the relevant group in the current block to the channel; press the ent key to accept the selection.
Group Status
This group attribute offers an additional feature that makes the operation of the channel conditional on the set status of each of the system groups. A channel assigned Group Status only activates if the set conditions of the programming are met, for example, an Intruder channel can be programmed to activate only if groups 2 and 4 are set and group 3 is unset.
To assign the Group Status conditions, press the ✴ key when selecting the groups: an arrow ( > ) is displayed on the bottom line as well as the current Status . Press the relevant number keys to toggle the status of the groups and press the ent key to accept the programming. The available group status conditions are:
S = Set - group must be set to allow channel to activate;
U = Unset - group must be unset to allow channel to activate;
– = Set or unset - channel activation is independent of the group status.
Programming Individual Channel Account Numbers
When the account number is programmed using option 56.1.2 = COMMUNICATIONS.Telecoms.
Account No.
, then all 16 channels are automatically programmed with the same number. The Account/
Channel menu option allows each channel to be programmed with a separate account number if required.
The account number can be up to a maximum of six digits, however a four digit account number is the standard.
104
Galaxy Programming Manual
56 - Communications (cont’d)
NOTE: Changing the main account number overwrites all separate account numbers previously programmed for channels 1 – 16.
On selecting DTMF , the keypad displays 1 = Channels 1 - 16 . Press the A key; the 2 = Acct/Channel option is displayed. All 16 channels can be individually programmed. To access the Acct/Channel option press the ent key; the first channel is displayed. Select the required channel using the A and B keys or by entering the channel number directly and press the ent key; the account number currently assigned to the channel is displayed. Press the B key to delete each of the digits and then enter the new account number.
2 = SIA (Security Industries Association)
The SIA format provides a highly detailed protocol that transmits detailed information including zone descriptions to a PC loaded with suitable software or to a SIA compatible receiver. The SIA format is capable of transmitting over 330 different Galaxy events (refer to Appendix C for further details).
On selecting the SIA format, the keypad prompts for the required SIA level to be entered, there are five SIA levels available:
• 0 (default) - Basic event information with 4 digit account number.
• 1 - as level 0 plus 6 digit accounts
• 2 - as level 1 but with event modifiers
• 3 - as level 2 but with text descriptions
• 4 - as level 3 but allows control commands to be received by the Galaxy control panel.
Trigger Events
When the SIA level has been selected press the ent key, the keypad displays the first trigger event and its
On/Off status (see Table 22 for a list of available triggers). These are the events and alarms that are transmitted to the ARC or PC. If the trigger status is set to On , an activation of an event controlled by the trigger results in the transmission to the receiver of the event details. Step through the trigger events using the A and B keys.
The table below shows the list of signalling triggers that are available to the Telecom module, the RS232 module, the ISDN module and the Ethernet module.
N o
7
8
5
6
9
1 0
3
4
1
2
T r i g g e r E v e n t
P A / D u r e s s
I n t r u d e r
2 4 H o u r s
S e c u r ti y
C u s t o m Z o n e s
F i r e
S e t F a u tl
O m ti
T a m p e r
S e t it n g
N o
1 5
1 6
1 7
1 8
1 9
1 1
1 2
1 3
1 4
T r i g g e r E v e n t
R e s e /t C a n c e l
M o d u l e s / C o m m s
E l e c S t a t u s
M e n u A c c e s s
T r o u b l e
L o g Z o n e
M a x T a g
Z o n e R e s t o r a l
R F S u p e r v i s i o n
Table 22. Trigger Events
1 = Status
To modify the trigger, select the required trigger type using the A and B keys and press the ent key. To program the status to On press 1 , to set it to Off press 0 . Press the ent key to save the programming and return to the previous menu level.
105
56 - Communications (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
Programming the SIA Format with Groups Enabled
If groups have been enabled on the system (refer to option 63 = OPTIONS ), then the SIA format menu alters slightly; an additional level is added.
1 = Trigger Events
On selecting the SIA level the keypad displays 1 = Trigger Events ; press the ent key to display the first trigger event; the keypad shows the trigger, the trigger status and the groups assigned.
1 = Status
To modify the trigger select the required trigger type using the A and B keys and press the ent key. The
1 = Status option is then displayed. If the status requires to be modified, press the ent key. To program the status to On press 1 , to set it to Off press 0 . Press the ent key to save the programming and return to the previous menu level.
2 = Groups
If groups have been enabled on the system (refer to option 63 = OPTIONS ), then groups can be assigned to the events. This means that the events have to occur in assigned groups before they are signalled. Press the A key, the keypad displays 2 = Group Settings and then press the ent key; the status of the groups assigned to the trigger is displayed. If the group has Y below it, then this event occurring in this group is signalled. If N is displayed, then the event is not signalled for that group. To toggle the status of a group, enter the group number. When all the groups have been assigned press the ent key to save the programming and return to the previous menu level.
Cross Group Confirmation
Confirmed outputs (and channels in DTMF format, option 56.1.1.1
) will activate for alarms across groups as long as both groups concerned have been assigned to that output or channel. In the point ID signalling formats (SIA, Microtech and Contact ID), confirmed signals will be transmitted across groups that share the same account number. For example, in option 56.1.1.2
(SIA), it is possible to select a different account number for each group on the system. Group 1 and group 2 can both be programmed with the same account number. If there is a single activation in group 1 then a single intruder activation in group 2, within the confirmed time window, a confirmed alarm signal will be transmitted for group 2.
Galaxy 500, 504 & 512
The Galaxy 500, 504 and 512 have more than 8 groups; in this case the groups are displayed on the keypad in blocks of eight, sub-divided into A and B for Galaxy 500 and A, B, C and D for Galaxy 504 and 512.
Use the A or B key to select the required group ( A1–D8 ). When the end of a block is reached the next block of eight groups is selected, press keys 1–8 to toggle the status of the relevant group in the current block; press the ent key to accept the selection.
2 = Group Settings
NOTE: This option is only displayed if the groups have been enabled (refer to option 63 = OPTIONS ).
The event triggers are signalled to the telephone number, with the account number, programmed in the menu options 56.1.2 = Telephone Number 1 and 56.1.3
= Account Number. However, each group can be programmed to transmit event details to a unique telephone number and assigned a separate account number. On selecting the Group Settings option the first system group is displayed. Select the required group using the A or B keys and press the ent key, 1 = Telephone Number is displayed.
106
Galaxy Programming Manual
56 - Communications (cont’d)
1 = Telephone Number
To assign a telephone number to the group press the ent key and enter the required number. The telephone number can be a maximum of 22 digits (including dial pause ✴ and dial tone detect # characters); press the ent key to save the programming and return to the previous menu level.
2 = Account Number
To assign an account number to the group press the ent key and enter the required number. The account number can be a maximum of six digits; press the ent key to save the programming and return to the previous menu level.
3 = Microtech
Microtech format is a protocol that transmits detailed point identification information to a Personal Computer
(PC) which has the Galaxy Alarm Monitoring software installed.
The menu structure and programming of the options are identical to the SIA format. Refer to 2 = SIA for programming details.
4 = Contact ID
Contact ID format is a protocol which transmits point identification information to an Alarm Receiving Centre that is capable of receiving the Galaxy variant of contact ID.
The menu structure and programming of the options are identical to the SIA format. Refer to 2 = SIA for programming details.
02 Telephone No. 1
Telephone number 1 must be entered. This is the main telephone number that the alarms are signalled to. Up to 22 digits may be entered, including control modifiers. The control modifiers are entered using the ✴ and # keys:
✴ Pause (for two seconds before dialling the next digit). Multiple entries can be made, for example, entering ✴✴✴ gives a six second pause.
# Dial tone detect (wait for new dial tone). Each dial tone detect lasts for 15 seconds. Multiple entries can be made, for example, entering ## gives a 30 second dial tone detect. If a new dial tone is not detected in this time, then the dialling attempt is aborted. This is counted as a fail to communicate.
The B key is used to erase an existing telephone number. Each press deletes the last digit displayed.
03 Account No.
This is the site identifier. A unique account number must be entered, this can be up to a maximum of 6 digits although 4 digits is the standard.
The B key is used to erase an existing number. Each press deletes the last digit displayed.
NOTE: Entering the account number into this menu option automatically copies the number to all channel or group triggers in the selected format. Any individual account numbers that have been programmed are overwritten.
107
56 - Communications (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
04 Receiver
The transmission destination can be set to one of three modes:
1 = Single
Reports to the telephone number programmed in Telephone Number 1.
2 = Dual
Reports to both numbers programmed in Telephone Number 1 and Telephone Number 2 . The alarm must be transmitted to both numbers.
3 = Alternate
Reports to Telephone Number 1 OR Telephone Number 2 . Each number is tried in sequence until the alarm is successfully transmitted. The alarm is only transmitted to one number. Telephone number 1 is always the first number attempted.
05 Telephone No. 2
A second telephone number is available to support Dual and Alternate dialling to a second destination receiver. The programming is identical to Telephone Number 1 .
The B key is used to erase an existing number. Each press deletes the last digit displayed.
06 Dial Type
The transmission mode can be selected from two types:
1. Tone (also known as “DTMF Dial”) this is much quicker at dialling than the Pulse option.
2. Pulse (also known as “Rotary” or “Loop Disconnect”) is universal, however, an increasing number of exchanges now provide the Tone (DTMF Dial) option.
NOTE: If unsure of the type of exchange that the panel is connected to, leave as Pulse dialling.
07 Autotest
An engineer test can be automatically transmitted to the Monitoring Station at programmed intervals, in order to indicate alarm transmission path integrity.
1 = Start Time
The engineer uses this option to enter the time that the first engineer test is transmitted. Subsequent engineer test transmissions are offset by the value assigned in the Test Interval option.
2 = Intervals
This option determines the period between engineer test transmissions following the Start Time , the programmable range is 0 – 99 hours.
NOTES:
1.
If the Test Interval is 0 (default) the Autotest is disabled — even if a Start Time has been assigned.
2.
To disable Autotest enter 00:00 (default); no transmissions of test signals can be sent at midnight.
108
Galaxy Programming Manual
56 - Communications (cont’d)
3 = Intelligent Test
This option stops the transmission of an automatic engineer test if an alarm signal has already been sent during the autotest interval.
4 = Group Condition (Galaxy 504 & 512 only)
NOTE: This option is only displayed if the groups have been enabled (refer to option 63 = OPTIONS ).
The Group Condition determines the status that each group must satisfy before the Autotest is transmitted.
This can be used to prevent an Autotest from being signalled when groups are set on the system. On selecting this option press the relevant number keys to toggle the status of the groups and press the ent key to accept the programming. The available group status conditions are:
S = Set - group must be set to allow autotest transmission;
U = Unset - group must be unset to allow autotest transmission;
– = Set or unset - autotest transmission is independent of the group status.
08 Engineer Test
An engineer test can be sent to the alarm destination once the Account Number and the Telephone
Number 1 have been entered, to ensure that the station is receiving transmissions sent from the Telecom module.
On selecting this option a warning message is displayed on the keypad, WARNING!!! ENT = SEND
MESSAGE.
Press the ent key to send the engineer test.
The test attempts to transmit once for each selection of the option. If the test is not successfully transmitted, the communicator does not attempt to resend. An unsuccessful transmission is not counted as a FAIL TO
COMMUNICATE .
NOTE: Activatiojn of an engineer test will send a test signal via all Galaxy communication modules.
09 No. of Rings
This option determines the number of rings before the Telecom module answers an incoming call; the programmable range is 1 – 20, the default is 10.
10 Line Fail
The Telecom module continually monitors the telephone line that it is connected to. This option determines the line monitoring conditions that result in a LINE FAIL event being reported and recorded in the log. The three line monitoring capabilities are:
1 = Line Volts (default Enabled ): A line fail occurs if the voltage on the telephone line falls below three volts, or the line is cut.
2 = Dial Tone (default Disabled ): A line fail occurs if the Telecom module cannot detect a dial tone on the telephone line, when a dial attempt is made. In this case the Telecom module records the line fail, but will continue the call attempt even if no dial tone is detected.
3 = Incoming Call (default Disabled ): A line fail occurs if the Telecom module attempts to transmit an alarm while there is an incoming call.
NOTE: Any combination of the above options may be enabled or disabled at any time.
109
56 - Communications (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
When one of these conditions is detected, a LINE FAIL message is sent to the Galaxy and is stored in the event log, with the exception of line volts which is monitored for a further 30 minutes. If sufficient line voltage is restored within 30 minutes, no event will be stored. If an attempt is made to set the system or part of the system within the 30 minute period, the message ALERT - LINE FAIL 1 ent = CONTINUE SET will be displayed. If ent is pressed the set will continue; if esc is pressed a line fail will immediately be logged. If the system is unset, the COMM LINE FAIL message appears on the keypad display and a local alarm is sounded - the keypad buzzers and on-board horn (if connected) are activated. If the system is set when a line fail condition occurs, the message COMM LINE FAIL will be displayed when the system is unset. This will be accompanied by a local alarm.
The local alarm is only activated for the first line condition of each unset period. Subsequent line fails are displayed as TELECOM FAILURE messages on the keypad for the duration of the condition and are recorded in the event log.
If an alarm occurs during a line fail condition, then the programmed bell delay for each of the groups is overridden (refer to option 51.02 = PARAMETERS.Bell Delay ).
11 Fail to Communicate
This option determines the number of unsuccessful communications attempts before the COMM FAIL message is recorded in the event log.
When an alarm condition or event is to be transmitted to the monitoring station, the Telecom module snatches the telephone line and dials the programmed telephone numbers. After a successful communication the LED lights for three seconds, the module then releases the telephone line and reconnects any serially connected equipment. This procedure is repeated for the second telephone number if the Receiver option has been programmed as Dual .
NOTE: The Telecom module communicator snatches and holds the line until a successful attempt has been made to the required telephone numbers or all the repeat attempts have been tried.
If the communication attempt is unsuccessful, the LED flashes rapidly for three seconds. The communicator then waits for a short period before redialling the number (or the second telephone number if the Receiver option has been programmed as Dual or Alternate ). When the Fail To Communicate option is left at the default setting of 3, if the first three dialling attempts are unsuccessful, the COMM FAIL message is recorded in the event log. If the next two attempts (5 attempts in total) are unsuccessful, the alarms to be transmitted are erased from the buffer, and no further attempts are made, until a new event is transmitted to the Telecom module
NOTE: If the Receiver option is programmed as Dual then successful transmission must be made to both telephone numbers.
12 Remote Access
This option defines when and how Galaxy Gold remote servicing will operate. The options are described as follows.
1 = Access Period
This option determines under what conditions the remote site can be accessed by the remote Galaxy Gold operator. There are 4 modes:
1 = Off
Galaxy Gold access to the Galaxy panel is disabled
110
Galaxy Programming Manual
56 - Communications (cont’d)
2 = All Unset
Access only when all the groups are unset. If groups are not enabled access is available at any time.
3 = Any Set
No access if any of the groups are set. The system must be fully unset, whether groups are enabled or not.
4 = Any Time (default)
Access available at any time
2 = Mode
1 = Direct Access
This permits access at anytime. Once access is authorised, uploading, downloading and remote servicing can begin.
2 = Manager Authorise
There are two methods that an authorised user can use to enable access to the Galaxy via Galaxy Gold:
• Timed Access: Galaxy Gold must access the Galaxy within 40 minutes of this option being enabled by the manager. Once connected, there is no time limit on the access period. On terminating the connection,
Galaxy Gold can reaccess the system within a 15 minute period of the termination.
• Call Back: the manager instructs the Galaxy to initiate a connection to a PC (with Galaxy Gold software loaded) by dialling one of the numbers programmed in the Call Back option.
3 = Call Back
Up to five telephone numbers can be programmed into this option. Galaxy Gold requests the Galaxy to call back to one of the numbers.
NOTES:
1.
If Manager Authorise is selected as the Remote Access Mode , then the telecoms module can only make outgoing calls - it is disabled from answering all incoming calls. This allows another telephone, fax or answering machine to be connected to the line without interference from the telecom module when calling into the premises.
2 . If Call Back is selected, then access to the Galaxy is denied unless the call back option in Galaxy Gold is used to initiate the connection.
13 Call Home
Not used
14 Alarm Monitoring
This option is used to allow events to be dialled to a PC with Alarm Monitoring software loaded.
The Alarm Monitoring option transmits alarm events information only when all of the alarms have been sent to the ARC (or all five of the communication attempts have been unsuccessfully made). If a new alarm event occurs while the system is transmitting in the Alarm Monitoring mode, the transmission is terminated and the alarms are sent to the ARC using the primary format selected.
The menu structure and programming of the Alarm Monitoring options are identical to the SIA format.
Refer to option 2 = SIA for programming details.
111
56 - Communications (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
15 Priority
Not used
16 Force V.21
This is used to change the modem speed to 300 baud. This option may require to be selected when using the
Telecom module on PSTN lines shared with RedCARE devices.
17 SMS
The SMS option is available on Galaxy panels with V4.00 and above software and Telecom modules with
V5.xx and above software. This option generates and transmitts SMS text messages, for events generated by the Galaxy panel.
1=Mobile No.
This is a 22 digit telephone number and is the mobile phone number of the recipient of the message.
2=Centre No.
This is a 22 digit telephone number and is the phone number of the SMS centre. The default is different for each operator.
3=Format
The options for this menu are:
1=TAP
For mobile phones (UK)
2=UCP (SMS)
For mobile phones (outside UK)
3=UCP (Minicall)
For alpha pagers
4=UCP (Numeric)
For numeric pagers
4=Site ID
This is a 16 character alphanumeric string and is used to identify the panel/site sending the message. If the format is UCP (Numeric), then the site ID is numeric only, and only the first four characters are sent out.
5=Password
This is a 16 character string and is an optional field required by some paging centres.
112
Galaxy Programming Manual
56 - Communications (cont’d)
RS232 Interface Module
2 = RS232
1 = Mode 1 = Direct
2 = Modem 1 = Telephone No.
2 = Dial Type 1 = Tone
2 = Pulse
2 = Format
3 = X25
4 = Paging
1 = SIA
2 = Microtech
Not Available
Not Available
0 (0-3) 1 = Trigger Events 1 = Status
2 = Groups
1 = Trigger Events 1 = Status
2 = Groups
3 = Account No.
6 digit Max.
4 = Copy/Overwrite 1 = Copy Site 1 = Start
2 = Abort
2 = Overwrite Site 1 = Start
2 = Abort
3 = Copy Stored
5 = Comms Setup Not Available
Figure 5. RS232 Programming Structure
The Galaxy RS232 Interface module is a multipurpose communication peripheral. This module can be used to:
• signal alarms and events to a single local PC with Galaxy Alarm Monitoring and third party monitoring software installed.
remotely service the Galaxy control panel via a PC with Galaxy Gold software installed,
•
•
• copy and store the programming details from a Galaxy control panel or a PC with Galaxy Gold software installed, overwrite the stored programming details to a Galaxy panel or to a PC with Galaxy Gold software installed.
act as an interface to third party products using Galaxy SIA control porotocol.
•
• operate as a printer interface unit.
For information on the installation and operation of the RS232 Interface module refer to Galaxy Installation
Manual, Section 3 - Optional Modules and Facilities (part number II1-0030) and the RS232 Module
Operating Instructions (part number IO1-0054).
1 Mode
The Mode option allows selection of the method of connection to the PC:
1 = Direct
This mode is selected if the Galaxy panel and PC are located in close proximity to one another and can interface via an RS232 cable.
2 = Modem
This mode is selected if the RS232 is communicating, via a modem and telephone line, with a remote PC. The telephone number of the remote PC must be entered in option 1 = Telephone Number and the type of telephone exchange ( Pulse or Tone ) must be assigned in option 2 = Dial Type .
113
56 - Communications (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
2 Format
This option allows selection of the alarm signalling format. There are two formats available for the RS232 module:
1 = SIA
Refer to the Telecom format menu (56.1.2) for programming details.
2 = Microtech
Refer to the Telecom format menu (56.1.3) for programming details.
NOTE: The SIA and Microtech formats for the RS232 module are identical in structure and programming to the Telecom menu. The only difference is that when groups have been enabled there is no Group
Settings option.
3 Account No.
This is the site identifier. A unique account number must be entered, this can be up to a maximum of six digits.
The B key is used to erase an existing number. Each press deletes the last digit displayed.
4 Copy/Overwrite
1 = Copy Site
The Copy Site option copies the programming details stored on the Galaxy panel to the RS232 module. On selecting this option the keypad indicates if a panel program is already stored in the module memory. To copy the panel programming press 1 ; the message COPYING is displayed; the green COPY LED (LED3) on the
RS232 module flashes. When the entire program has been copied to the module, the message COPY
STORED appears; the green COPY LED (LED3) remains on.
NOTE: The copying procedure can be aborted at any time by pressing key 2 .
2 = Overwrite Site
The Overwrite Site option copies the program stored on the RS232 module to the Galaxy panel, overwriting all current programming details. On selecting this option the keypad indicates that the Galaxy is WAITING
TO WRITE . To overwrite the panel programming press 1 ; the message OVERWRITING is displayed; the green OVERWRITE LED (LED4) on the RS232 module flashes. When the entire program has been copied to the Galaxy panel, the message OVERWRITE DONE appears; the green OVERWRITE LED (LED4) remains on.
NOTE: The overwriting procedure can be aborted at any time by pressing key 2 .
3 = Copy Stored
If the RS232 has programming details stored in its memory, the Copy Stored option indicates: the date; the panel type (Galaxy 8, 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 or 512); and the version of software that was copied.
If there is no program in the RS232 module memory, the message NO COPY STORED is displayed.
114
Galaxy Programming Manual
56 - Communications (cont’d)
ISDN Module
3 = ISDN
01 = Primary 1 = Default Tel No
2 = Default Acc No
3 = Dial Type
02 = Secondary
03 = ISDN Type
04 = ISDN Snatch
4 = Format
1 = Analogue
2 = Digital
3 = X.25
4 = RAM
1 = DTMF
2 = SIA
3 = Microtech
4 = Contact ID
5 = Robofon
6 = X.25 Protocol 1
7 = X.25 Protocol 2
1 = TEI
2 = LCGN
3 = LCN
4 = Polling Rate
5 = CUG Index
Option not available
1 = None
2 = 90 secs
3 = 15 mins
4 = 60 mins
5 = Programmable
1 = Default Tel No
2 = Default Acc No
3 = Dial Type
4 = Format
5 = Copy Primary
6 = Alternate
1 = Disable
2 = Enable
1 = Point to Point
2 = Point to Multipoint
1 = Hardware
2 = Software
1 = Always Snatch
2 = Never Snatch
3 = Snatch if Line Fail
1 = Disabled
2 = Enabled
05 = Autotest
06 = Engineer Test
07 = Line Fail 1 = None
2 = Line Volts Only
3 = Layer 1 Only
4 = Volts and Layer 1
5 = Volts or Layer 1
08 = Fail to Comm
09 = Remote Access 1 = Access Time
2 = Mode
1 = Off
2 = All Unset
3 = Any Set
4 = Any Time
1 = Direct Access
2 = Manager Authorise
3 = Call Back
10 = Alarm Monitoring
Figure 6. ISDN Programming Structure
115
56 - Communications (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
The Galaxy ISDN Module supports alarm signalling and remote servicing over ISDN B and D channels.
01 Primary
1 =Default Telephone Number
Telephone number 1 must be entered. This is the main telephone number that the alarms are signalled to. Up to 22 digits may be entered, including control modifiers. The control modifiers are entered using the ✴ and # keys:
✴ Pause (for two seconds before dialling the next digit). Multiple entries can be made, for example, entering ✴✴✴ gives a six second pause.
# Dial tone detect (wait for new dial tone). Each dial tone detect lasts for 15 seconds. Multiple entries can be made, for example, entering ## gives a 30 second dial tone detect. If a new dial tone is not detected in this time, then the dialling attempt is aborted. This is counted as a fail to communicate.
The B key is used to erase an existing telephone number. Each press deletes the last digit displayed.
2 = Default Account Number
This is the site identifier. A unique account number must be entered, this can be up to a maximum of six digits although 4 digits is the standard.
The B key is used to erase an existing number. Each press deletes the last digit displayed.
NOTE: Entering the account number into this menu option automatically copies the number to all triggers in the selected format (DTMF, SIA, Microtech, Contact ID, X.25 Protocol 1 and X.25 Protocol 2).
Any individual account numbers that have been programmed are overwritten.
3 = Dial Type
This option allows selection of the type of ISDN transmission.
NOTE: The available signalling formats are only compatible with certain dial types. If a dial type is selected which does not match the currently programmed format a warning will be displayed momentarily to indicate the mismatch.
1 = Analogue
This selection uses voice mode to transmit data to ISDN or PSTN networks. Default selection for ISDN
B-channel communications.
2 = Digital
The ISDN line is capable of transmitting alarm data in a digital format with a speed of 64K bit per second.(This option is not yet available)
116
Galaxy Programming Manual
56 - Communications (cont’d)
3 = X.25
The X.25 dialling type allows transmission of data via an X.25 network to compatible X.25 receivers. The
ISDN Module uses the D-channel of the ISDN line to set up the connection. After set-up the connection will remain activated. On selection of the X.25 dial type a number of configuration options will be made available.
1 = TEI (Terminal Endpoint Identifier)
Since it is possible to connect several devices to one ISDN line, like X.25 ISDN Module but also X.25
pay systems for an ATM card, the local telecom provider uses the TEI to identify the devices. The local telecom provider issues the TEI number. The value can vary from 00 to 63.
2 = LCGN (Logical Channel Group Number)/ 3 = LCN (Logical Channel Number)
The X.25 data network uses the LCGN and LCN to identify the users that are connected. Normally the users are connected directly to the X.25 network. To allow a high number of users the LCN can vary from
000 to 255. The LCGN can multiply this number of users with 15. The LCGN can vary from 00 to 15.
When using X.25 over ISDN the LCGN is set to 00 and the LCN is set to 001.
4 = Polling Rate
The polling rate is used to monitor the X.25 connection end to end. A poll is sent from the ISDN Module to the X.25 receiver. The receiver also monitors if the poll is received within the specified limit. The interval between the polls can be programmed using this parameter.
5 = CUG (Closed User Group)
Depending on the country of use and the local telecom provider the CUG index is used. The telecom provider can issue a closed number group to a certain monitoring station. The extra subscription for X.25
use over the ISDN line is often available in several packages depending on the use of the X.25 facility. The value can vary from 0 to 9.
4 = RAM
Option not used
4 = Format
The ISDN module provides seven signalling formats:
1 = DTMF
2 = SIA
3 = Microtech
4 = Contact ID
5 = Robofon
6 = X.25 Protocol 1 (SIA based format compatible with the OA BX X.25 receiver)
7 = X.25 Protocol 2 (SIA based format compatible with the Alphatronics RC 4000 receiver)
NOTE: The DTMF, SIA, Microtech and Contact ID formats are identical in structure and programming to the Telecom Module menu.
NOTE: X.25 Protocol 1 and Protocol 2 are similar in programming structure to the SIA protocol.
117
56 - Communications (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
02 Secondary
The secondary option is available to support Dual and Alternate dialling to a second destination receiver. If using alternate mode both the dial type and format must be identical to the values programmed for the primary number.
1 = Default Telephone Number
The programming is identical to Telephone Number 1 .
2 = Default Account Number
Refer to Primary format
3 = Dial Type
Refer to Primary Dial Type (except X.25 should be option not available).
4 = Format
Refer to Primary Format. It is possible to assign different formats to both the Primary and Secondary numbers, however, when using the alternative signalling option the format must be identical.
5 = Copy Primary (1 to 2)
Copies Primary Program to Secondary Program, for ease of programming.
6 = Alternate
If enabled, signalling is attempted alternately to primary and secondary numbers until successful transmission to either is achieved. If enabled, the user will be requested to copy the primary programming to the secondary programming to ensure both paths are configured identically.
03 ISDN Type
Two types of ISDN lines are available on the EURO ISDN network; Point to Multipoint and Point to Point.
This option allows selection of the type to be used.
1 = Point to Multipoint (default)
This configuration is used when more than one ISDN system is connected to the ISDN bus. To ensure that the
ISDN module responds to incoming calls from Galaxy Gold only a specific MSN (Multiple Subscriber
Number) should be entered. The MSN number should be provided by the Telecom provider.
NOTE: All devices not programmed with an MSN number will also respond to incoming calls.
118
Galaxy Programming Manual
56 - Communications (cont’d)
2 = Point to Point
Only one device is allowed on the ISDN bus. In this configuration a TEI number must be programmed. The default is 0. Since only one device is allowed the ISDN module will act differently when programmed to Point to Point. The hardware ISDN snatch relay is always activated before the module starts a dialling sequence.
After all the alarms are transmitted the relay will be deactivated and the customer PABX, if connected, will be connected to the ISDN network again. During the dialling sequence it is not possible to use the PABX for an outside call. Upon an incoming call for the module, the relay will be activated directly switching the PABX off the ISDN line, after which the ISDN module will seize the line. To ensure correct functionality of the PABX and the ISDN module always connect the PABX to the ISDN out ports. The phone numbers that are available on a Point-to-Point line often only vary in the last 2 digits e.g.123401 ~ 123409. To handle incoming calls from Galaxy Gold one phone number need to programmed into the ISDN module. This specific phone number cannot be used by the PABX because the ISDN module will seize the incoming call directly.
NOTE: X.25 in combination with a Point-to-Point ISDN line is not possible.
04 ISDN Snatch
In order to ensure maximum security the ISDN Module must be able to make a call in every circumstance.
The ISDN Module offers both hardware and software line seizure options.
1 = Hardware
The hardware snatch is performed using a relay. This relay can switch the other devices off when the ISDN
Module needs to communicate. In order to switch the other devices off it is important that these other devices are connected to the ISDN out connection of the module. Some ISDN devices are not willing to release a Bchannel even when the network indicates that the B-channel must be released. When this is detected or a tamper causes interference on the ISDN bus communication the relay will be activated.
A number of configurations are available for the hardware snatch function.
1 = Always Snatch
A hardware snatch is always attempted irrespective of the software snatch programming.
2 = Never Snatch
A hardware snatch is never attempted.
3 = Snatch if Fail
A hardware snatch is attempted if the software snatch fails or the software snatch is disabled.
2 = Software
The software in the ISDN module monitors every communication on the ISDN bus including those of other devices. The software snatch enables the possibility to clear a B-channel when both are occupied at that time.
When both B-channels are occupied the ISDN module always clears the call that started first.
Certain ISDN devices will not release the B-channel when a software snatch is attempted. In this case, depending on the programming of option 56.3.4.1 = Hardware , a hardware snatch can be attempted to ensure a channel is made available to the ISDN Module. Software snatch can be enabled or disabled.
119
56 - Communications (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
05 Autotest
An engineer test can be automatically transmitted to the Monitoring Station at programmed intervals.
1 = Start Time
The engineer uses this option to enter the time that the first engineer test is transmitted. Subsequent engineer test transmissions are offset by the value assigned in the Test Interval option.
2 = Test Interval
This option determines the period between engineer test transmissions following the Start Time , the programmable range is 0 – 99 hours.
NOTES:
1.
If the Test Interval is 0 (default) the Autotest is disabled — even if a Start Time has been assigned.
2.
To disable Autotest enter 00:00 (default); no transmissions of test signals can be sent at midnight.
3 = Group Condition (Galaxy 504 & 512 only)
NOTE: This option is only displayed if the groups have been enabled (refer to option 63 = OPTIONS ).
The Group Condition determines the status that each group must satisfy before the Autotest is transmitted.
This can be used to prevent an Autotest from being signalled when groups are set on the system. On selecting this option press the relevant number keys to toggle the status of the groups and press the ent key to accept the programming. The available group status conditions are:
S = Set - group must be set to allow autotest transmission;
U = Unset - group must be unset to allow autotest transmission;
– = Set or unset - autotest transmission is independent of the group status.
06 Engineer Test
An engineer test can be sent to the Monitoring Station once the Account Number and the Telephone
Number 1 have been entered, to ensure that the station is receiving transmissions sent from the ISDN module.
On selecting this option a warning message is displayed on the keypad. Press the ent key to send the engineer test.
The test attempts to transmit once for each selection of the option. If the test is not successfully transmitted, the communicator does not attempt to resend. An unsuccessful transmission is not counted as a FAIL TO
COMMUNICATE .
07 Line Fail
The ISDN module continually monitors the ISDN line that it is connected to. In addition to the DC volts monitoring of the ISDN line, the ISDN Module can be programmed to use layer 1 check monitoring. The layer 1 option will activate the ISDN line every 40 seconds and monitor the activation response from the
ISDN network. This activation will remain for about 20 seconds. When X.25 is used the layer 1 check is not performed because the ISDN line is already activated continuously.
The ISDN module can be configured to report a line fail when either one or a combination of the volts and layer 1 checks fail. The options are:
120
Galaxy Programming Manual
56 - Communications (cont’d)
1 = None
No line monitoring
2 = Line Volts
DC volts monitored only
3 = Layer 1
Layer 1 monitored only
4 = Volts and Layer 1
Volts and layer 1 both monitored. Line Fail activated if both fail.
5 = Volts or Layer 1
Volts and Layer 1 both monitored. Line Fail activated if either fail.
08 Fail to Comm
This option determines the number of unsuccessful communication attempts before the COMM FAIL message is recorded in the event log.
When an alarm condition or event is to be transmitted to the monitoring station, the ISDN module snatches the telephone line and dials the programmed telephone numbers. This procedure is repeated for the second telephone number if the Receiver option has been programmed as Dual .
NOTE: The ISDN module communicator snatches and holds the line until a successful attempt has been made to the required telephone numbers or all the repeat attempts have been tried.
If the communication attempt is unsuccessful, the communicator waits for a short period before redialling the number (or the second telephone number if the Receiver option has been programmed as Dual or Alternate ). When the Fail To Communicate option is left at the default setting of 3, if the first three dialling attempts are unsuccessful, the COMM FAIL message is recorded in the event log and the alarms to be transmitted are erased from the buffer.
09 Remote Access
This option defines when and how Galaxy Gold remote servicing will operate. The options are described as follows.
1 = Access Time
This option determines the type of access that is available to the remote Galaxy Gold operator. There are four modes:
1 = Off:
Galaxy Gold access to the Galaxy panel is disabled
121
56 - Communications (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
2 = All Unset:
Access only when all the groups are unset. If groups are not enabled access is available at any time.
3 = Any Set:
No access if any of the groups are set. The system must be fully unset, whether groups are enabled or not.
4 = Any Time (default):
Access available at any time
2 = Mode
1 = Direct
This permits access to be initiated from Galaxy Gold.
2 = Manager Authorise
If this option is selected here are two methods that an authorised user can use to enable access to the Galaxy via Galaxy Gold:
Timed Access:
Galaxy Gold must access the Galaxy within 40 minutes of this option being enabled by the manager. Once connected, there is no time limit on the access period. On terminating the connection, Galaxy Gold can reaccess the system within a 15 minute period of the termination.
Call Back:
The manager instructs the Galaxy to initiate a connection to a PC (with Galaxy Gold software loaded) by dialling one of the numbers programmed in the Call Back option.
Refer to option 47 = Remote Access for details of how to initiate the Manager authorised connection.
3 = Call Back
Up to five telephone numbers can be programmed into this option. Galaxy Gold requests the Galaxy to call back to one of the numbers.
NOTES:
1.
If Manager Authorise is selected as the Remote Access Mode , then the ISDN module can only make outgoing calls - it is disabled from answering all incoming calls.
2.
If Call Back is selected, then access to the Galaxy is denied unless the call back option in Galaxy Gold is used to initiate the connection.
10 Alarm Monitoring
This is identical to the Microtech format communications ( 56.1.3
). This option is used to allow alarms to be dialled to a PC with Alarm Monitoring software loaded as well as to an ARC using the Primary and/or Secondary formats.
122
Galaxy Programming Manual
56 - Communications (cont’d)
Ethernet Module
4 = Ethernet
01= Module
Config
1 = IP Address
2 = Site Name
3 = Gateway IP
4 = Network Mask
1 = Format 1 = SIA (0-4) 02 = Alarm
Reporting
1 = Trigger
2 = Groups Setting
1 = Status
2 = Groups
1 = Account No.
2 = IP Address
3 = Port No.
2 = Primary IP
3 = Secondary IP
2 = Microtech (Same as SIA format)
1 = IP Address
2 = Port No.
1 = IP Address
2 = Port No.
4 = Account No.
5 = Receiver
6 = Alarm Mon.
1 = Single
2 = Dual
1 = Trigger 1 = Status
2 = Groups
7 = Heartbeat
8 = Protocol
2 = Account No.
3 = IP Address
4 = Port No.
1 = Interval
0 = UDP
1 = TCP
03 = Remote
Access
1 = Access Period
2 = Mode
1 = Off
2 = All unset
3 = Any Set
4 = Any Time
1 = Direct access
2 = Mgr Authorise
04 = Autotest
05 = Engineer Test
06 = Fail to Comm
1 = Start Time
2 = Interval
1 = Call Back IP1
2 = Call Back IP2
3 = Call Back IP3
4 = Call Back IP4
5 = Call Back IP5
07 = Line Fail
8 = SIA Control
9 = Encrypt
1 = Network
2 = Signal Path
0 = Off
1 = Available
1 = Primary
2 = Secondary
3 = Alarm Mon.
4 = Any
5 = All
1 = IP Address
1 = Alarm Report
2 = Remote Access 0 = Off
1 = On
3 = SIA Control 0 = Off
1 = On
4 = Alarm Mon.
0 = Off
1 = On
0 = Off
1 = On
Figure 7. Ethernet Module Programming Structure
1 = IP Address
2 = Port No.
1 = IP Address
2 = Port No.
1 = IP Address
2 = Port No.
1 = IP Address
2 = Port No.
1 = IP Address
2 = Port No.
123
56 - Communications (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
The Ethernet module allows the Galaxy control panel to communicate over Ethernet local and wide area networks, using both UDP and TCP Ethernet protocols. The Ethernet module supports both alarm signalling and remote servicing. Features included in the Ethernet module communications are data encryption and path supervision between the Ethernet module and alarm receiving applications.
01 Module Config
Each Ethernet module is pre-programmed with a unique MAC address, which identifies the module on the network. However in order for the module to communicate with other applications an IP address should be assigned to the unit. The information programmed in this section is required for other applications on the network to recognise the Ethernet module.
1 = IP Address
This is the IP address of the Ethernet module. This must be a unique, static IP address. The address will be in the form XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX. The dot separator will be automatically added after each sequence of three numbers or can be manually added by pressing the * key.
An example of a valid IP address is 192.0.1.152.
This address should be provided by your IT administrator
2 = Site Name
This option is not used at this time
3 = Gateway IP
When using the Ethernet module over a wide area network the IP address of the gateway router connected to the Ethernet local area network must be entered in this field. The format of this address is identical to the IP address of the Ethernet module.
This information should be supplied by the IT administrator
4 = Network Mask
The network mask identifies the class of network being used. This field masks off the parts of the gateway IP address which, are common and not required for specific identification of the Ethernet module.
This information should be supplied by the IT administrator.
02 = Alarm Reporting
This option allows selection of the alarm signalling format used to transmit the events. This option also controls the types of events, which are sent and the destination/identification for each independent group.
1 = Format
This is the signalling format of the receiver and has the following two formats:
1 = SIA (0-4) Security Industries Association
The SIA format can be programmed between levels 0 and 4 and provides a protocol that transmits detailed information including textual descriptors, to a SIA compatible receiver or PC loaded with suitable receiver software.
The SIA format is capable of transmitting the Galaxy events indicated in Appendix C of this manual.
124
Galaxy Programming Manual
56 - Communications (cont’d)
•
•
•
•
•
Refer to Appendix D of this manual for the detailed breakdown of the SIA event structure for each level.
On selecting the SIA format, the keypad prompts for the required SIA level to be entered, there are five SIA levels available:
Level 0 (default) – basic event information with 4 digit account numbers
1 – as level 0 plus 6 digit account numbers
2 – as level 1 but with event modifiers
3 – as level 2 but with text descriptors
4 – as level 3 but also enables the SIA control command feature (refer option 08 SIA control)
1 = Trigger Events
When the SIA level has been selected press the ent key. The keypad displays the first trigger event and it’s
On/Off status (see table 22 for the list of available triggers, and Appendix C for the events which are controlled by each trigger). The triggers control the events, which are transmitted. If the trigger is set to On, any events logged, which are controlled by the trigger will be transmitted. If the trigger is set to Off, the events controlled by the trigger will not be transmitted. Step through the trigger events using the A and B keys.
1 = Status
To modify the trigger on/off status select the trigger to be modified using the A and B keys and press the ent key. To program the status to On press 1 , to set it to Off press 0 . Alternatively use the A/B keys to toggle between On and Off . To accept the new status, press the ent key. This will automatically return the display to the previous menu level.
Programming the SIA format with groups enabled
If groups have been enabled on the system (refer to option 63.1), then the SIA format menu alters slightly to support the independent event trigger programming for each group.
1 = Trigger Events
On selecting the SIA level the menu enters the Trigger Events option. Press the ent key to display the first trigger event; the keypad shows the trigger, the trigger status and the groups assigned.
To modify the trigger event select the required event using the A and B keys and press the ent key. The
1=Status option is then displayed. If the status requires to be modified press the ent key.
1 = Status
To program the status to On press 1 , to set it to Off press 0 . Alternatively use the A/B keys to toggle between On and Off . To accept the new status, press the ent key. This will automatically return the display to the previous menu level.
2 = Groups
If groups have been enabled on the system (refer option 63.1), then the groups can be assigned to each event trigger. This means that the events have to occur in assigned groups before they are signalled. To modify the groups assigned to a specific trigger press the ent key from the 2=Groups menu option. The display will show the groups and indicate whether it is assigned (Y) or not assigned (N) to the group. To assign or unassign a group from a specific trigger press the number key corresponding to the group number. The display will show the new status. To accept the new status, press the ent key and return to the previous menu level. If the Galaxy panel supports more than 8 groups use the A and B keys to scroll through all available groups.
125
56 - Communications (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
Groups Setting
NOTE: This option is only displayed if the groups have been enabled (refer option 63.1)
Each of the events are signalled to Primary IP/Port Numbers programmed in menu option 56.4.2.2 and the account number programmed in 56.4.2.4. However, each group can be programmed to transmit event details to a unique IP address and port number, with a unique account number. On selecting the 2=Group
Settings option the first group is displayed. Select the required group to be modified using the A/B keys and press ent . 1=Account No. is displayed
1 = Account No.
By default the account number programmed in option 56.4.2.4 will be entered in this field. To assign a unique account number to the group selected use the B key to erase any existing numbers and enter the new number. The account number should be between 4 and 6 digits long. Press the ent key to save the programming and return to the previous menu level.
To modify the IP address which events from a specific group will be signalled to press the A or 2 keys, then press ent .
2 = IP Address
By default the IP address programmed in option 56.4.2.2 will be displayed. To programme a new IP address use the B key to erase any existing programming and enter the new IP address to which the events are to be sent. Press ent to save the new address and return to the previous menu level.
To modify the Port No. which events from a specific group will be sent press either the A or 3 keys, then press ent .
3 = Port No.
By default the Port No. programmed in option 56.4.2.2 will be displayed. To programme a new port number use the B key to erase any existing programming and enter the new port number. Press the ent key to save the new address and return to the previous menu.
2 = Microtech
Microtech format is a protocol that transmits detailed point id information to a PC, which has the Galaxy
Alarm Monitoring application installed and running.
The level of information supplied is similar to SIA level 3.
The menu structure and programming of the options are identical to the SIA format. Refer 1=SIA for programming details.
2 = Primary IP
The Primary IP defines the receiver destination details for the primary alarm transmission path. The destination is made up of an IP address and a port number. To programme the IP address press ent . If groups are enabled the information programmed for the primary IP and port numbers is automatically copied to all groups.
1 = IP Address
Enter the IP address of the primary receiver. The address will be in the form XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX. The dot separator will be automatically added after each sequence of three numbers or can be manually added by pressing the * key. To save the address and return to the previous menu level press ent . To programme the port number of the primary destination receiver press either 2 or A , then press ent .
126
Galaxy Programming Manual
56 - Communications (cont’d)
Note: This number must be programmed, even if groups have been enabled and all groups have a programmed IP address. This is the IP address used for all system wide events.
2 = Port No.
To erase any previously programmed numbers press the B key. Enter the port number of the primary destination receiver. The default value is 10002. Press ent to save the programmed number.
3 = Secondary IP
The Ethernet module supports signalling to more than one receiver destination. The Secondary IP defines the receiver destination details for the secondary alarm transmission path. The destination is made up of an IP address and a port number. To programme the IP address press ent .
1 = IP Addresss
Enter the IP address of the secondary receiver. The address will be in the form XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX. The dot separator will be automatically added after each sequence of three numbers or can be manually added by pressing the * key. To save the address and return to the previous menu level press ent . To programme the port number of the secondary destination receiver press either 2 or A , then press ent .
2 = Port No.
To erase any previously programmed numbers press the B key. Enter the port number of the secondary destination receiver. The default value is 10002. Press ent to save the programmed number.
4 = Account No.
The account number identifies the Galaxy system to the receiver when signals are transmitted. Every signal transmitted contains the account number. The account number should be between 4 and 6 digits long. After entering the account number press ent to save and return to the previous menu level.
If groups are enabled the account number entered in this field is automatically copied to all groups.
5 = Receiver
This option determines the paths, which will be used for alarm signalling.
1 = Single
If selected the Primary IP destination and/or specific group IP programming is used to signal alarms. If 1=Single is selected and a Secondary IP is programmed the Secondary IP destination will be used in the event of a failure to the Primary IP. A Fail to Comm will be logged against the Primary alarm transmission path.
2 = Dual
If selected and if a secondary IP is programmed events are sent to both the primary and secondary IP destinations.
6 = Alarm Monitoring
This option provides a further alarm transmission path specifically for events being sent to the Galaxy Alarm
Monitoring application.
The keypad displays the first trigger event and it’s On/Off status (see Table 22 for the list of available triggers, and Appendix C for the events which are controlled by each trigger). The triggers control the events, which are transmitted. If the trigger is set to On , any events logged, which are controlled by the trigger will be trans-
127
56 - Communications (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual mitted. If the trigger is set to Off , the events controlled by the trigger will not be transmitted. Step through the trigger events using the A and B keys.
1 = Trigger
Press the ent key to display the first trigger event; the keypad shows the trigger, the trigger status and the groups assigned.
To modify the trigger event select the required event using the A and B keys and press the ent key. The
1=Status option is then displayed. If the status requires to be modified press the ent key.
1 = Status
To program the status to On press 1 , to set it to Off press 0 . Alternatively use the A/B keys to toggle between On and Off . To accept the new status, press the ent key. This will automatically return the display to the previous menu level.
2 = Groups
If groups have been enabled on the system (refer option 63.1), then the groups can be assigned to each event trigger. This means that the events have to occur in assigned groups before they are signalled. To modify the groups assigned to a specific trigger press the ent key from the 2=Groups menu option. The display will show the groups and indicate whether it is assigned (Y) or not assigned (N) to the group. To assign or unassign a group from a specific trigger press the number key corresponding to the group number. The display will show the new status. To accept the new status, press the ent key and return to the previous menu level. If the Galaxy panel supports more than 8 groups use the A and B keys to scroll through all available groups.
2 = Account No.
This option is required to assign a unique account number to the events signalled to Alarm Monitoring. This data must be entered before any events are sent to Alarm Monitoring via this option. The account number can be a maximum of 6 digits. Press the ent key to save the programming and return to the previous menu level.
3 = IP Address
To programme a new or modify the Alarm Monitoring IP address use the B key to erase any existing programming and enter the new IP address to which the events are to be sent. Press ent to save the new address and return to the previous menu level.
4 = Port No.
To programme a new port number use the B key to erase any existing programming and enter the new port number. Press the ent key to save the new address and return to the previous menu.
7 = Heartbeat
The Ethernet module supports path supervision to ensure the alarm transmission paths are available to transmit event when required. This option, if programmed determines the frequency, which the alarm transmission paths are checked.
128
Galaxy Programming Manual
56 - Communications (cont’d)
1 = Interval
Enter the interval within which a path supervision signal (heartbeat) must be received from each alarm transmission path (refer option 56.4.7.2 Line Fail – Signalling Path). If a heartbeat is not received within the programmed interval a line fail condition will be activated in the panel. The Line Fail event will indicate which path has failed (Primary, Secondary or Alarm Monitoring).
The default period is 30 minutes.
8 = Protocol
The Ethernet module is capable if signalling using either TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) or UDP (Universal Datagram Protocol). Earlier versions of Ethernet module, Alarm Monitoring and Galaxy Gold only supported the TCP protocol.
NOTE: If communicating with V3.26 Alarm Monitoring or V6.26 Galaxy Gold the TCP option should be selected.
If encryption is required for alarm signalling the UDP protocol should be selected.
Irrespective of the programming in this option Galaxy Gold and SIA control command protocol will always use the TCP protocol.
0 = UDP
When this option is selected all alarm signalling from the Ethernet module will use the UDP format.
1 = TCP
When this option is selected all alarm signalling from the Ethernet module will use the TCP format.
03 = Remote Access
The Ethernet module supports remote servicing of the Galaxy alarm panel. The programming options in this section control when remote access can be granted and whether access is initiated from the panel or the
Galaxy Gold PC.
1 = Access Period
This option determines when the Galaxy panel can be accessed remotely.
1 = Off
Galaxy Gold access to the Galaxy panel is disabled.
2 = All Unset
Remote Galaxy Gold access is only granted when all groups or the complete system are unset.
3 = Any Set
Remote Galaxy Gold access will only be granted if any of the groups or the complete system are set.
4 = Any Time (default)
Access available at any time.
129
56 - Communications (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
2 = Mode
This option controls access authorisation and whether the remote session is initiated from (Panel or PC).
1 = Direct Access
This permits access at any time (in conjunction with Access period). Access is initiated from Galaxy Gold.
Once access is authorised/initiated, uploading, downloading and remote servicing can begin.
2 = Manager Authorise
This option requires authorisation from the site manager in order to gain remote access to the Galaxy panel.
There are two methods that the manager user can use to enable access to the Galaxy via Galaxy Gold.
Timed Access – Galaxy Gold must access the Galaxy panel within 40 minutes of this option being enabled by the manager (Option 47.1.2.0). Once connected there is no time limit on the access period. On terminating the connection, Galaxy Gold can reaccess the system within a 15 minute period of the termination.
Call Back – the manager instructs the Galaxy panel to initiate a connection to the Galaxy Gold PC (Use option
47.1.2.1) by selecting one of the Call back IP addresses programmed into the system
1 = Call Back IP 1-5
There are 5 possible IP address/Port number destinations, which can be programmed for Galaxy Gold access. This allows communication with up to 5 different Galaxy Gold locations.
1 = IP Address
Enter the IP address of the PC running the Galaxy Gold application
2 = Port No.
Enter the Port Number allocated to Galaxy Gold on the PC (Default is 10001)
04 = Autotest
An engineer test can be automatically transmitted to the receiving station at programmed intervals.
1 = Start Time
The engineer uses this option to enter the time that the first engineer test is transmitted. Subsequent engineer test transmissions are sent periodically. The frequency of each test is controlled by the 2=Interval option.
2 = Interval
This option determines the period between automatic engineer test transmissions following the Start Time. The programmable range is 0-99 hours.
05 = Engineer Test
An engineer test can be sent on each of the transmission paths once the appropriate IP address/port no, and account numbers have been programmed into the system. This allows the installation engineer to ensure that the receiving station is correctly receiving the events from the Ethernet module.
On selecting this option a warning message is displayed on the keypad, WARNING!!! ENT=SEND MES-
SAGE . Press the ent key to send the engineer test.
130
Galaxy Programming Manual
56 - Communications (cont’d)
06 = Fail to Comm
This option determines the number of unsuccessful communication attempts before the COMM FAIL message is recorded in the event log.
When an event is to be transmitted to the monitoring station, the Ethernet module attempts to initiate a session with the destination receiver for each programmed transmission path. If the programmed number of attempts is reached a Fail to Comm message will be logged. The logged event will include which path has failed.
Note: if the receiver option is programmed as Dual then a successful transmission must be made to both primary and secondary to be considered a successful transmission.
07 = Line Fail
The line fail option controls which Ethernet connections are monitored. The Ethernet module can be programmed to monitor both the network availability and the programmed transmission paths between the
Ethernet module and receiver applications.
Line fail events (whether network or transmission path) must be present for 30 minutes before the event is activated. If a line fail is present and an attempt is made to set the system within the 30 minute delay period, the line fail will immediately be logged and indicated.
1 = Network
This option monitors the connection between the Ethernet module and the local network.
0 = Off
If programmed to off, the connection between the Ethernet module and local network will not be monitored. If the local network is not available or the Ethernet module is disconnected, no line fail will be indicated.
1 = Available
If programmed as available then the connection between the Ethernet module and the local Ethernet network is monitored. If the Ethernet module is disconnected from the network or the local network is not available a
Line Fail event will be activated at the panel. The Line Fail event logged will indicate that the Line Fail was as a result of a network failure.
2 = Signal Path
This option determines which signalling paths, will be monitored by the Ethernet module. Monitoring is achieved by transmission of a path supervision signal (heartbeat) between the receiver application and the
Ethernet module. The Ethernet module must receive a path supervision signal at least as often as the frequency programmed in option 56.4.2.7 (Alarm Reporting Heartbeat). If the signal is not received a line fail condition will become present. The line fail event will indicate the path which failed and the destination IP address of that path.
NOTE: If groups are enabled a failure on the primary path will not provide specific IP information.
Options are available to select specific paths or all paths.
1 = Primary
When selected the Ethernet module will only monitor the primary transmission path. All other transmission paths will not be monitored.
131
56 - Communications (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
2 = Secondary
When selected the Ethernet module will only monitor the secondary transmission path. All other transmission paths will not be monitored.
3 = Alarm Mon.
When selected the Ethernet module will only monitor the Alarm Mon. transmission path. All other transmission paths will not be monitored.
4 = Any
When selected the Ethernet module monitors all transmission paths. If a supervision failure is detected in any of the paths a line fail condition will be activated.
5 = All
When selected the Ethernet module monitors all transmission paths. If a supervision failure is detected in all of the paths a line fail condition will be activated.
08 = SIA Control
When using the SIA control command protocol for integration purposes the IP address of the computer sending the SIA control commands should be entered in this field to ensure that only commands from a computer with the programmed IP address will be recognised by the Ethernet module.
1 = IP Address
The address will be in the form XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX. The dot separator will be automatically added after each sequence of three numbers or can be manually added by pressing the * key.
09 = Encrypt
The Ethernet module supports a high level 128bit encryption algorithm for all communication options. This option allows encryption to be enabled/disabled for each of the communication options.
1 = Alarm Report
This option controls encryption for the Primary and Secondary alarm transmission paths. Default is disabled.
0 = Off
If selected encryption is disabled for the Primary and Secondary alarm transmission paths.
1 = On
If selected encryption is enabled for the Primary and Secondary alarm transmission paths. In order for data to be received when this option is selected the receiver must support decryption.
2 = Remote Access
This option controls encryption for the Galaxy Gold remote servicing sessions. Default is disabled.
0 = Off
If selected encryption is disabled for the Galaxy Gold remote servicing sessions.
132
Galaxy Programming Manual
56 - Communications (cont’d)
1 = On
If selected encryption is enabled for the Galaxy Gold remote servicing sessions. In order for data to be received when this option is selected the receiver must support decryption.
3 = SIA Control
0 = Off
This option controls encryption for communications between the Ethernet module and remote PC using the
SIA control command protocol. Default is disabled.
1 = On
If selected encryption is enabled for for communications between the Ethernet module and remote PC using the SIA control command protocol. In order for data to be received when this option is selected the receiver must support decryption.
4 = Alarm Mon.
This option controls encryption for the Alarm Monitoring alarm transmission paths. Default is disabled.
0 = Off
If selected encryption is disabled for the Alarm Monitoring alarm transmission paths.
1 = On
If selected encryption is enabled for the Alarm Monitoring alarm transmission paths. In order for data to be received when this option is selected the receiver must support decryption.
133
57 - System Print
Galaxy Programming Manual
Option 57 – System Print
The System Print option allows the details of the system programming to be printed. The specific details of one or all of the menu options in the following table can be selected:
1 0
1 1
1 2
1 3
0 7
0 8
0 9
0 1
0 2
0 3
0 4
0 5
0 6
M e n u O p t i o n
S y s t e m D a t a
C o d e s
P a r a m e t e r s
Z o n e s
O u t p u t s
L i n k s
C o m m u n i c a t i o n
I S D N
G r o u p s
K e y p a d s
T i m e r s
E v e n t L o g
A ll ( i t e m s 1 1 1 )
M e n u N o .
2 3
4 2
5 1
5 2
5 3
5 4
5 6
5 6 .
3
6 3
5 8
6 5
2 2
Table 23. System Print Options
Selecting a Print Option
The required print option is selected by entering the option number 01 – 12 or by using the A and B keys and then pressing ent . When printing option 11 = EVENT LOG , the system prompts for Groups to be selected; the print shows only those events logged for the groups selected. The print can be aborted at any time by pressing the esc key.
NOTE: A serial printer on line must be connected to communication line 1 of the Galaxy before the print option is selected. If the printer is off-line or is not connected, the PRINTER off-line / ESC to abort message is displayed. Press the ESC key and correct the problem.
Printing Timers
Printing 10 = Timers gives details of all the times that have been assigned in option 65 = TIMERS ; this includes the autoset time, the pre-warning period and lockout times.
134
Galaxy Programming Manual
58 - Keypad
Option 58 – Keypad
The keypads connected to the Galaxy control panel can be assigned individual attributes allowing each keypad to respond in a particular way.
On selecting the Keypad option the details of the first keypad connected to the system are displayed.
Keypad Address
Flashing cursor if keypad viewed is this keypad
Option 1 Option 2
10 A[12]+ B[13]-
Mimic=1 Light =1
Option 3 Option 4
The required keypad is selected by entering the keypad address or by using the A and B keys and then pressing ent; the keypad displays 1=A-key . Press the A and B keys to select the required option and press the ent key.
NOTE: When the address of the keypad currently being used is displayed, a black square flashes on and off over the first digit of the keypad address.
1 = A-key
Code Status
This option assigns a menu function to the A key. On selecting the option the keypad displays 1 = Code
Status , this determines the method of operation of the A key:
0 = OFF [ ] - A key disabled
1 = WITH CODE [+] - A key requires code to be entered prior to operation
2 = NO CODE [–]— A key is a single touch operation no code is required
Select the required Code Status and press the ent key.
NOTE: The Code Status assigned to the key is displayed when selecting the keypad address, for example
A[12]– indicates that the A key does not require a user code.
Menu Option
To assign one of the menu options to the A key, press the A key to move to the 2 = Menu option and press the ent key. The keypad displays the currently assigned menu option.
10 A-key Option
12=Timed Set
To assign a new menu function, enter the full menu option number 11 – 59 or press the A and B keys until the required menu option is displayed; press the ent key to accept the selection and return to the previous menu level.
135
58 - Keypad (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
2 = B-key
The programming of the B key is identical to that of the A key.
3 = Buzzer Mimic
This option determines whether the keypad buzzer mimics the function of the programmed keypad output
(refer to option 53 = PROGRAM OUTPUTS ). The default function of the keypad output is Entry/Exit
Horn and the default Mimic defaults to On , therefore the keypad buzzer operates as an Entry/Exit Horn at factory setting.
To disable the keypad buzzer from mimicking the output select 0 = Off .
4 = Backlighting
This option determines when the keypad backlighting switches on and off.
0 = always off,
1 = always on (default),
2 = on when the system is unset; off when the system is set; switches on when the keys are pressed,
3 = on during setting and unsetting; switches on when keys are pressed; switches off after keypad timeout and when menu is exited,
4 = switches on when keys are pressed; switches off after keypad timeout and when menu is exited.
5 = Keypad Mute
This option allows the bleep which normally accompanies a valid keypress to be disabled. This features improves security and reduces tampering with the keypad when it is located in a public place.
When the Mute option is set to 1 = On , whenever the keypad banner is displayed the keypresses are silent, there are no ✴ s displayed as each key is pressed and the keypad backlighting remains off. As soon as a valid code is entered the keypad returns to normal operation - the keys are accompanied by bleeps and the backlighting switched on. The Mute option defaults to disabled ( 0 = Off ).
Keypad Disable
A keypad may be disabled by programming the address of the keypad as a link destination (refer to menu option 54 - Links ). When the source of the link is activated the keypad does not respond to any keypress, however, the LCD, keypad buzzer and any keypad output device acts as normal.
136
Galaxy Programming Manual
58 - Keypad (cont’d)
6 = Show Status
This option allows the keypad to display the set status of the groups. When Show Status is enabled, pressing the ✴ and # keys simultaneously when the normal banner is displayed indicates the group set status.
F = Fault
R = Ready
S = Set
P = Part Set
STATUS 12345678
Groups RRSRLPFP
L = Locked Out
- = Group not assigned to Keypad
Group block
NOTE: The Show Status indicates the set conditions of groups when the system is set (keypad blank) or unset (normal banner). Show Status does not operate while engineer mode is accessed.
Pressing the ✴ and # keys again toggles the display to show the status of the groups individually. To move between each groups, press the ✴ and A or the ✴ and B keys simultaneously.
Pressing the ✴ and # keys again returns the keypad to the banner display.
Galaxy 504 & 512
The Galaxy 504 & 512 have 32 groups; these are displayed on the keypad in block of eight groups, subdivided into A, B, C and D. Press the A or B key to display each of the group blocks.
7 = Keypad Groups
Each keypad can be assigned to selected groups; the keypad then responds only to user codes that have a group common to it and only displays alarm information on the groups assigned.
Entering a user code which is assigned to all groups, on a keypad which is only assigned to a single group, allows access to all of the user’s groups. The user is not restricted by the groups that are assigned to the keypad as long as there is one group common to both. This means that a keypad assigned only to group 1, for example, can be used to set groups 1, 2, 3 and 4 by a code with all of these groups allocated.
Keypad Group Restriction
To restrict access only to groups that are common to both the user and the keypad, press the ✴ key when assigning groups to the keypad. This means that when a user with access to groups 1, 2 and 3 sets the system on a keypad assigned to groups 2, 3 and 4, only the common groups (groups 2 and 3) are set.
Assigning Keypad Groups
On selecting the Keypad Groups option, the groups currently allocated to the keypad are displayed (the default is all groups assigned). Pressing the group number toggles the group assigned to the keypad.
Galaxy 504 & 512
The Galaxy 504 & 512 have 32 groups; these are displayed on the keypad in block of eight groups, sub-divided into A, B, C and D. Use the A or B key to move between the group blocks; press keys 1 – 8 to assign the relevant groups in each block to the user.
When the required groups have been assigned to the user, press the ent key to accept the programming and return to the previous menu level.
NOTE: Also see menu 53, to control the buzzer operation on each keypad. This is independent of the keypad group parameter.
137
59 - Quick Menu
Galaxy Programming Manual
Option 59 – Quick Menu
The Galaxy quick menu consists of up to 10 menu options that are accessed by all level 3 (and above) user codes that do not have a ✴ assigned to their code level. This option allows the quick menu to be reprogrammed to any selection of the menu options. The Quick Menu defaults to a factory selection as shown in the following Table:
M e n u O p t i o n
2
3
4
0
1
7
8
5
6
O m i t Z o n e s
F o r c e d S e t
C h i m e
D i s p l a y Z o n e s
D i s p l a y L o g
P r i n t
W a l k T e s t
T i m e / D a t e
C o d e s
1 1
1 4
1 5
2 1
2 2
2 4
3 1
4 1
4 2
9 S u m m e r 4 3 6
Table 24. Quick Menu Options
U s e r
L e v e l
3
3
3
4
4
6
6
4
5
Modifying the Quick Menu
On selecting the Quick Menu option, the details of the first option assigned to the quick menu are displayed; this includes the quick menu location, the menu option assigned, the full menu option number and the current user level assigned to the option.
Quick Menu location
Full Menu option number
0=OMIT ZONES
Option=[11] L=3
Menu Options
User level
Select the quick menu number to be modified by entering the option number 0 – 9 or by using the A and B keys and then pressing ent . The display indicates the quick menu location and the full menu option number currently assigned.
To modify the quick menu, enter the full menu option number 11 – 59 or press the A and B keys until the required menu option is displayed; press the ent key to accept the selection and return to the previous menu level. To delete a quick menu option, press the ✴ key instead of a menu option number; ✴✴ =NOT USED is displayed.
The system arranges the quick menu in order of lowest user level access required, therefore if quick menu number 0 is assigned a menu option which is of a higher access level than options 2 , 3 and 4 , the menu is rearranged and the display indicates that the option is now number 4 .
NOTE: Assigning duplicate quick menu options is denied. The message DUPLICATE ENTRY is displayed and the system prompts for a new option to be assigned.
138
Galaxy Programming Manual
61 - Diagnostics
Section 9: Engineer 2
Option 61 – Diagnostics
This option allows several diagnostic tests to be run on the system, providing valuable information on the operational status of the Galaxy and connected modules. The Galaxy polls each module and reports the successful communications during this period as a percentage. Typical figures are:
•
•
• 70% and above - satisfactory communication level
50 – 69% - module requires monitoring
49% and below - remedial action required
NOTE: The Galaxy gives greater priority to modules that are active, therefore this can affect the communication percentages on other modules on the system as they are being polled less frequently due to their zone inactivity.
The Diagnostic options are:
1. MEMORY TEST - This is an option used during development. It serves no purpose in the field.
2. KEYPAD COMMS - the communication level between the Galaxy panel and the keypads.
3. RIO COMMS - the voltage at each RIO as well as the communication level between the Galaxy panel and the RIO.
4. PSU COMMS - the voltage at each Smart Power Supply Unit and the communication level between the
Galaxy panel and the SPSUs. It is identical to the RIO COMMS diagnostic with the exception that it also indicates the current output from the SPSU, fuse status and battery status.
A number to the right of the current indicates a blown fuse:
2 = Battery fuse (F2)
3 = +12V Auxilliary fuse (F3)
4 = +12V Auxilliary fuse (F4)
A ✴ indication means Low Battery
95% ✴ 2 13.6V 1.9A
.
Pressing the # key indicates how long the stand-by battery will power the load connected to the SPSU in the event of an a.c. mains failure as well as the battery recharge time.
Standby Time 8h
Charge Time 4h
5. MAX COMMS - the communication level between the Galaxy panel and the MAX, MicroMAX or
MAX 3 readers.
139
62 - Full Test
Galaxy Programming Manual
Option 62 – Full Test (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Full Test option allows two zones to be selected and tested under full set conditions. Activating the selected zone results in a full alarm condition, including remote signalling. Constantly active zones ( Security,
24 Hours , PA , Fire ) remain active throughout the Full Test ; an activation generates the appropriate local or full alarm depending on the zone.
On selecting the Full Test option, the address and function of the first zone on the system is displayed. Move to the required zone by pressing the A or B keys or by entering the zone address. Press the ent key. An option is then given to choose a second confirm zone. If you press the A (YES) key, select a second required zone by pressing the ent key. If you press the B (NO) key, the system begins the full setting procedure.
Activating the zone results in a full alarm condition. To end the full test unset the system.
140
Galaxy Programming Manual
63 - Options
Option 63 – Options (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Options function allows the Galaxy to be divided into group subsystems and also allows the MAX proximity access control readers to be integrated into the system.
P a n e l
G 8
G 1 8
G 6 0
G 1 2 8
G 5 0 0
G 5 0 4
G 5 1 2
G r o u p
0
3
1 6
3 2
4
8
3 2
M a x
2
3
1 6
3 2
4
8
3 2
Table 25. Groups/Max Modules per Panel
Options
1 = Groups
2 = MAX
1 = Group Mode
2 = Setting Logic
3 = Group Name
1 = MAX Mode
2 = MAX Address
3 = MAX Parameters
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
A/B to move to group and ent to select.
Number keys to toggle:
= status of group uninportant
S = Group must be set to allow group to set.
A/B to move to group and ent to select.
# = toggle upper case, lower case or library text.
∗
= delete last character.
A/B = move to character/word.
ent = assign character/word.
esc = save programming.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
A/B to select line (G500, G504 & G512) ent to start MAX search.
0 = On-line, ent then key 0 - 7 to readdress MAX.
1 = Standalone
A/B to move to required MAX address.
# to display MAX address graphic.
ent to select.
1 = Descriptor# = toggle upper case, lower case or library text.
∗
= delete last character
A/B = move to character/word ent = assign character/word
2 = Relay Duration
3 = Open Timeout
4 = Groups esc = save programming
1 - 60 seconds (default = 05).
0 - 60 seconds (default = 10).
Press group number to toggle group on/off
5 = Emergencies
6 = AntiPassBack
(G504 & 512) A/B to move between group blocks.
Enable or disable option. If group mode is enabled, a separate enable is available for each group.
1 = Mode 0 = Off No antipassback restriction.
1 = Soft Access is never denied but any violations will be recorded in the event log.
2 = Hard No access will be granted for a second swipe within the antipassback period following a valid swipe.
2 = Timout
3 = Forgive
(0 - 60 minutes). Specifies the time that the antipassback restrictions last for.
Allows the engineer to remove all antipassback restrictions for the selected MAX. Use the
A>B< keys to select the reader address then press enter to forgive.
141
63 - Options (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
1=Groups
On selecting Options , the keypad displays 1 = Groups ; press the ent key to select this function.
1 = Group Mode
This option is used to enable the Groups function (default is 0 = Disabled ). When enabled, the system options that are eligible for group programming are then made available throughout the menu, otherwise they do not appear.
Enabling Groups
On selecting 1 = Enabled , press the ent key to accept the programming and return to the previous menu level.
NOTE: You must return to the Engineer Mode banner for groups to be fully enabled.
Disabling Groups
The Group Disabled feature operates as follows:-
When disable groups is selected in menu option 63.1.1 two option are given:-
1.
Reset Groups
2.
Disabled
If option 1 - Reset Groups is selected the engineer is prompted to confirm the selection. If confirmed, by pressing the enter key, all group programming, for all the panel features, are reset to A1. When engineering mode is exited a warning message is displayed (ATT!!! GRPS OFF, SYS.
OP. IMPACT) alerting the engineer that groups have been reset and there will be an impact on the operation of all functions not programmed as group A1. This warning message will be displayed until the ESC key is pressed by the engineer, acknowledging the warning.
NOTE: When group programming is re-enabled all previous group programming will not be restored.
If option 2 - Disabled is selected the engineer is prompted to confirm the selection. If confirmed, by pressing the enter key, all group programming, other than A1 will be disabled (zones, outputs, links, users). When engineering mode is exited a warning message is displayed (ATT!!! GRPS OFF, SYS. OP. IMPACT) alerting the engineer that groups have been disabled and there will be an impact on the operation of all areas not programmed as group A1. This warning message is displayed until the ESC key is pressed by the engineer, acknowledging the warning.
NOTE: If this option is selected, when group mode is re-enabled all previous group programming will be restored. However, while group mode is disabled, a zone not programmed to group A1 will not operate normally on the system. It is strongly recommended that, whenever possible, groups are always reset to A1 when disabling groups.
142
Galaxy Programming Manual
63 - Options (cont’d)
2 = Setting Logic
The Setting Logic option restricts a group from setting by determining which other groups must be set before it can set. For example, group 1 may be prohibited for setting unless groups 3, 7 are already set. The Setting Logic is individually defined for each group.
Programming Setting Logic
On selecting the Setting Logic option, group 1 is displayed. Use the A or B keys to move to the required group or directly select it by pressing the required group number; press the ent key to access the group. On selecting the group, the current Setting Logic details are displayed:
• S below a group means that it must be set to allow the selected group to set
• a dash ( – ) below the group indicates that the set status of this group is not important.
Toggle the status between S and – by pressing the number key. When the required setting logic pattern has been defined press the ent key to accept the programming and return to the previous menu level.
Galaxy 504 & 512
The Galaxy 504 & 512 have 32 groups; these are displayed on the keypad in block of eight groups, subdivided into A, B, C and D:
G r o u p B l o c k P h y s i c a l G r o u p s
A 1 8
B 1 8
C 1 8
1 8
9 1 6
1 7 2 4
D 1 8 2 5 3 2
Table 26. Groups
Use the A or B key to move between the group blocks; press keys 1 – 8 to toggle the Setting Logic for the relevant groups in each block.
Setting Logic Operation
If Setting Logic has been assigned to a group, the set status of the groups must satisfy the conditions defined in the option to permit the group to set. If the Setting Logic conditions are not satisfied, then the group cannot set. If multiple groups are being set simultaneously, but one group is restricted due to the programmed
Setting Logic , the remainder of the groups set. The restricted group does not set; there is no warning or indication given.
If the programmed Setting Logic results in none of the selected groups being allowed to set, a warning message is displayed on the keypad.
2 Groups not set
[<],[>] to view
This message does not appear if at least one group sets.
143
63 - Options (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
3 = Group Name
This option is used to assign a name of up to 12 characters to each of the groups. This name is assembled from the character set and/or library options. On selecting the Group Name option, the name currently assigned to group 1 is displayed. All group names default to Group X (where X is the group number). Use the A or B keys to move to the required group or directly select it by pressing the required group number; press the ent key to access the group. On selecting the group, the following details are displayed:
Current Group name
Upper case text.
# to toggle upper case/ lower case/library
A2 Group Name
EFG HIJKLMNÖØO P
The currently assigned name is displayed on the top line - an underscore shows where the next character will be positioned, and a selection of the alphabet is shown on the bottom line - the cursor flashes on the letter L .
Press the ✴ key to erase the characters already assigned to the name.
The A or B keys can be used to move the alphabet left or right until the required character is positioned underneath the flashing cursor. When the required character is in position press the ent key to copy the character to the descriptor in the top line. Repeat this procedure to assemble the required Group Name .
Text Case & Library
On entering the Group Name option the alpha-numeric characters are all presented in upper case. Pressing the # key toggles the characters to lower case.
Pressing the # key when the lower case alphanumeric characters are displayed toggles to the library words.
The words can be viewed using the A or B keys or directly selected using the reference number - refer to
Appendix A - Library . When the required word is displayed, press the ent key to copy it to the name.
NOTE: Library words are a maximum of 12 characters and upper case only.
144
Galaxy Programming Manual
63 - Options (cont’d)
Group Name Display
When viewing the groups assigned to an option, for example user code or outputs, simultaneously pressing the
# and ✴ keys displays the groups individually. The keypad displays the group number, name and the status of the particular option being displayed. Press the # key to toggle the status of the group. To move to another group press the A or B keys or enter the number of the group directly.
Current group name
Selected group
A or B key to move to other group
A2SalesDept S
[<],[>],#=CHANGE
Status of group
# key to toggle status
Notes on Groups
1. All zones default to group 1.
2. All keypads, user codes and outputs default to all system groups assigned.
3. Remove unused groups from user codes, otherwise the unused groups will set and unset even though they are not programmed.
4 . Final, Keyswitch and Exit can be programmed to function in regard to other groups during the setting and unsetting procedures (refer to option 52 = PROGRAM ZONES ).
5. Outputs can be assigned to any selection of groups. Output activation can be made dependent on the set or unset status of the assigned groups (refer to option 53 = PROGRAM OUTPUTS ).
6 .
After programming zones, codes, keypads and outputs into their various groups they remain programmed if the Group Mode function is disabled. Only Group 1 remains active.
7. The Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 and 512 control panels have multi-user software that allows several users to operate the system simultaneously.
2=MAX
This option is used to program the Galaxy MAX/MicroMAX/MAX 3 access control readers. The MAX/
MicroMAX/MAX 3 can be fully integrated into the system, communicating on the AB lines and fully utilising the facilities of the Galaxy control panel. If the MAX/MicroMAX/MAX 3 is programmed as a standalone module, it is completely separate from the Galaxy; the panel does not monitor the module or share any of the facilities or options with it.
Programming the MAX/MicroMAX/MAX 3
On selecting the MAX option, 1 = MAX Mode is displayed; press the ent key to select this function.
1 = MAX Mode
This option is used to enable the MAX functions and allow the MAX modules to be programmed (default is 0
= Disabled ). When enabled, the options that are eligible for MAX programming are made available throughout the menu, otherwise they do not appear or appear as Option not Available .
NOTE: If the MAX Mode is disabled following programming of MAX/MicroMAX/MAX 3 readers, the readers remain operational, however, no further programming, including assigning next MAX/
MicroMAX/MAX 3 cards and fobs, is possible until the mode is enabled.
145
63 - Options (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
2 = MAX Address
The address and the on-line or standalone status of the MAX Modules are assigned and modified using this option. On selecting MAX Address the Galaxy searches for the MAX with the highest address. The Galaxy
128 prompts for the AB line (1-2); the Galaxy 500, 504 and 512 prompt for the AB line (1-4) that is to be searched. Select the line and press the ent key. On locating the MAX, the keypad prompts for the TYPE of
MAX to be assigned:
0 = On-Line The MAX is fully integrated with the Galaxy system and communicates via the AB line, sharing system resources and facilities
1 = Standalone The MAX operates as an entirely independent unit. The Galaxy does not monitor the MAX for alarms, tampers or power failure.
The MAX can then be readdressed. The keypad displays the current address of the MAX and the range of valid addresses. All MAX modules default to address 7 , it is recommended that when adding MAX modules, the first is redressed as 0 , the second as 1 and so on.
Enter the new MAX address and press the ent key; the Galaxy then reprograms the address of the MAX.
The keypad indicates the old and new MAX addresses and the status of the reprogramming.
When the reprogramming is complete the MAX bleeps and the display returns to 2 = MAX Address .
Old address
New address
7 –> 0 [24] Status of reprogramming
3 = MAX Parameters
This option defines the individual operational features of each of the MAX/MicroMAX modules. On selecting this option the address of the first MAX/MicroMAX on the system is displayed along with the descriptor currently assigned to it. While the MAX/MicroMAX address is displayed on the keypad, the address pattern on the MAX/MicroMAX module is indicated by the LEDs switching on. Pressing the # key displays a graphic on the keypad which corresponds to the LED pattern on the MAX/MicroMAX module.
The following figure shows the graphic display for both a MAX and a MicroMAX address as 26.
MicroMAX LEDs Displayed
M A X 2 6
MAX LEDs Displayed
M A X 2 6
Top (unused)
Bottom
Figure 4. LED Status
The line numbers are represented by the top row in MAX and blocks 2 nd and 3 rd from the top in the
MicroMAX and the address numbers are represented by the bottom row of blocks in the MAX and the four bottom blocks in the MicroMAX. The top LED on the MicroMAX is always off in this mode.
The combinations are shown in the following Figure :-
2
3
4
1
Line No.
Module Address
0
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
Figure 5. Line Number/Module Address
146
Galaxy Programming Manual
63 - Options (cont’d)
Select the required MAX/MicroMAX address using the A and B keys or by entering the MAX/MicroMAX address directly and pressing the ent key. The first MAX parameter, 1 = Description is displayed. Use the A or B keys to move to the required parameter and press the ent key.
1 = Descriptor
This option is used to assign a name of up to 12 characters to each of the MAX modules. This name is assembled from the character set and/or library options. On selecting the Descriptor parameter the currently assigned name is displayed on the top line - an underscore shows where the next character will be positioned, and a selection of the alphabet is shown on the bottom line - the cursor flashes on the letter L .
Press the ✴ key to erase the characters already assigned to the name.
The A or B keys can be used to move the alphabet left or right until the required character is positioned underneath the flashing cursor. When the required character is in position press the ent key to copy the character to the descriptor in the top line. Repeat this procedure to assemble the required Descriptor .
Text Case & Library
On entering the Descriptor parameter the alpha-numeric characters are all presented in upper case. Pressing the # key toggles the characters to lower case.
Pressing the # key when the lower case alphanumeric characters are displayed toggles to the library words.
The words can be viewed using the A or B keys or directly selected using the reference number - refer to
Appendix A - Library . When the required word is displayed, press the ent key to copy it to the name.
Library words are a maximum of 12 characters and upper case only.
2 = Relay Duration
This is the period, following the user card swipe, that the MAX relay is activated allowing a door strike to be unlocked and the door to be opened without creating an alarm. The MAX relay de-activates as soon as the door contact opens or the Open Timeout occurs.
On entering the Relay Duration parameter, the current value is displayed; assign the required time within the range 01 – 60 seconds, the default time is 5 seconds. Press the ent key to save the programming and return to the previous menu level.
NOTE: Pressing the A key increases the time by one second increments, the B key decreases the time in one second decrements.
147
63 - Options (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
3 = Open Timeout
This is the period following the user card swipe that the door can remain open when gaining access. If the door remains open longer than the period assigned to the Open Timeout , then an alarm occurs.
NOTE: If the Open Timeout is programmed as 0 seconds, then the door can remain open indefinitely without resulting in an alarm being activated.
On entering the Open Timeout parameter, the current value is displayed; assign the required time within the range 00 – 60 seconds, the default time is 10 seconds. Press the ent key to save the programming and return to the previous menu level.
NOTE: Pressing the A key increases the time by one second increments, the B key decreases the time in one second decrements.
4 = Groups
1=MAX Groups
On selecting the MAX Group option, the group currently allocated to the MAX is displayed. Pressing the group number toggles the group assigned to the MAX.
Galaxy 504 & 512
The Galaxy 504 & 512 have 32 groups; these are displayed on the MAX in block of 8 groups, sub-divided into A, B, C and D. Use the A or B key to move between the group blocks; press keys 1 – 8 to assign the relevant groups in each block to the MAX.
When the required groups have been assigned to the user, press the ent key to accept the programming and return to the previous menu level.
Group Name Display
When viewing the groups assigned to the MAX, simultaneously pressing the # and ✴ keys displays the groups individually. The keypad displays the number, name and the assigned status of each group on the particular
MAX being displayed. Press the # key to toggle the status of the group. To move to another group press the
A or B keys or enter the number of the group directly.
2=Group Restriction
Each MAX module can be assigned selected groups using the Group Restriction option. This group restriction affects the operation of the MAX and MicroMAX readers for both access and card held functions. A card can only be used at a reader if there are common groups between them. By default each reader is assigned to all groups on the system. Groups can be removed as required to restrict the operation of the MAX reader.
NOTE: Each MAX card can be assigned a single menu function (refer to option 42 = CODES ). Activating this function with a card that is assigned to all groups, on a MAX that is only assigned to a single group, results in the function operating on all of the card’s groups. The MAX function is not restricted to the groups assigned to the MAX, it is restricted to the groups assigned to the card, as long as there is one group common to both. This means that a MAX assigned only to group 1, for example, can be used to activate the MAX function on groups 1, 2, 3 and 4 by a card with all of these groups allocated. The groups are assigned to the MAX card using option 42 = CODES .
148
Galaxy Programming Manual
63 - Options (cont’d)
In access mode access will be granted if there are common groups between the card and the MAX reader and all the groups assigned to the card are unset. For the card held function, the groups affected by the function will be all the groups assigned to the card, so long as there is at least one common group between the card and the MAX.
Common Group Restriction
The group restrictions can be enhanced further by pressing the ✴ key when assigning group in Group Restriction. This limits the operation described in the paragraph above only to groups which are common to both the
MAX and the card.
Refer to the following two tables for examples of how the readers respond to different situations with the
Common Group Restriction on and off. The card held function used in the example is “Timed Set”.
A s s i g n e d
A c c e s s G r a n t e d
G r o u p R e s t r i c t i o n o n M A X N o ✴ A s s i g n e d
S c e n a r i o
N a o n d c o
C m m a r d o n g r o u p s b e t w e e n M A X
A ll g r o u p s u n s e t
O n e o r m o r e c o m m o n g r o u p s e t
A e ll x t r c o a m s e m t o n g r o g r o u p s u p o n c u n s a r d e t a n d s e t o n e
A e ll c x t r a o m g r m o o u p n g r o u p s o n M a x
N o o t h e r g r o u p s o n u n s s e .t
e t c a r d a n d o n e
A c c e s s G r a n t e d
N o
Y e s
N o
N o
Y e s
Table 27. Door Access
N o
Y e s
N o
Y e s
Y e s
A
A
S i t u a t i o n a t t i m e o f c a r d s w i p e ll ll g g r r o u o u p s p s u s n e s t e t
N o 7
A c t i o n o n c a r d h e l d
O n G r o u p R e s t r i c t i o n
A ll s e t g r o u p s o n c a r d s t a r t t o A ll s e t c o m m o n g r o u p s s t a r t t o
A ll g r o u p s o n c a r d a r e u n s e t
A ll c o m m o n u n s e t g r o u p s a r e
C o m m o n m o r e g r o u g r p o s u p o n s c u n s e t a n d a r d s e t o n e o r
O n e o t h e r o r m o r e g r o u p s c o m m o n u n s e t g r o u p s s e t ,
G
A r ll o u g r p s o o u p s n c a o n r d a c a r d r e u n a r e s e t u n s e t
C
A o ll m m o n g c o m m o n u n s e t r o u p s a g r o u p s r e a s e r e t
Table 28. Card Held Function Set up for Setting
Assigning Groups to Group Restriction
On selecting the Groups option, the groups currently allocated to the MAX are displayed. Pressing the group number toggles the group assigned to the MAX.
The Galaxy 504 & 512 have 32 groups; these are displayed on the MAX in blocks of eight groups, subdivided into A, B, C and D. Use the A or B key to move between the group blocks; press keys 1 – 8 to assign the relevant groups in each block to the MAX.
When the required groups have been assigned to the user, press the ent key to accept the programming and return to the previous menu level.
149
63 - Options (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
5 = Emergencies
This option allows each individual MAX/MicroMAX/MAX 3 unit to be configured to respond to fire zones in a given set of groups. Upon the opening of a fire zone in one of the groups allocated to the MAX/MicroMAX/
MAX 3 , the MAX/MicroMAX/MAX 3 will trigger the door strike and hold the door open until the system is reset. All the MAX/MicroMAX/MAX 3 LEDs will light and the buzzer will sound. Closing the fire zone will have no effect - the MAX/MicroMAX/MAX 3 units are treated as latched outputs and an appropriate level reset is required, at which point they are immediately reset.
A second group map is allocated to each MAX/MicroMAX/MAX 3 in order to facilitate this function. This permits the existing door control features to be completely detached from the fire escape features.
The default setting for each MAX/MicroMAX/MAX 3 is all groups selected. Therefore, a system, which is unchanged from the default will open all MAX/MicroMAX/MAX 3 doors in response to any fire zone activation.
On selecting the Emergencies option select the groups you want allocated to the MAX/MicroMAX/MAX 3 for escape purposes and accept the programming by pressing the enter key. When a fire zone is activated in any of the groups programmed, the door controlled by the MAX/MicroMAX/MAX 3 will be opened.
6 = Anti PassBack
This option, when enabled, will prevent more than one use of any particular card at a particular reader within a given time period.
A forgiveness function is available to clear all or particular antipassback restrictions in force. A manager code can authorise a forgive function on a particular user in option 42.1 = Codes.User Codes. An engineer code can authorise a forgive function on a particular reader.
1 = Mode
This option has three settings:
0 = Off No anti passback restriction
1 = Soft Access is never denied but any violations will be recorded in the event log
2 = Hard No access will be granted for a second swipe within the anti passback period, following a valid swipe.
2 = Timeout (0-60 minutes)
This option specifies the time that the anti passback restriction lasts for.
3 = Forgive
This option allows the engineer to remove all anti passback restrictions for the selected MAX. Use the A>B< keys to select the reader address the press enter to forgive.
150
Galaxy Programming Manual
64 - Assemble Zones
Option 64 – Assemble Zone (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Assemble Zones option allows 2 zone functions to be customised to the user’s requirements; these are the Custom-A and Custom-B zones. Once a custom zone function has been assembled, it is assigned to zones using option 52 = PROGRAM ZONES .
Programming a Custom Zone
The flexibility of this menu option allows for an extensive range of possibilities. It is therefore important that the engineer is fully aware of the system and has a clear picture of what is required of the new zone function.
The procedure for assembling a custom zone has 4 stages:
1.
Outputs
2.
Status
3.
Setting
4.
Log
1 = O u t p u t s O u t p u t T y p e :
2 = S t a t u s
3 = S e t t i n g 1 = B e g i n S e t
4 = L o g
1 = U n s e t
2 = E n t r y / E x i t
3 = P a r t S e t
4 = F u ll S e t
D i s a b l e d
S e t
U n s e t
S e t / U n s e t
D i s a b l e d
A l a r m
D i s a b l e d
A l a r m
D i s a b l e d
A l a r m
D i s a b l e d
A l a r m
D i s a b l e d
E n a b l e d
A / B
# –
– t o s e l e c t g g l e o u t p u t b e t w e e n t y p e
D i s a b l e d , e s c
&
–
S e t / U s a v e n s e t p r o g r a m m i n g
S e t , U n s e t
# – e s c t o
– g g l e s a v e b e t w e e n p r o g r a m
D i s a m i n g b l e d a n d A l a r m
# – t o g g l e
E n a b l e d e s c – s a v e b e t w e e n D i s a b l e d p r o g r a m m i n g a n d
2 = B e g i n E n t r y D i s a b l e d
E n a b l e d
3
S
= S e t s y s t e m
D i s a b l e d
E n t r y E x i t
2 4 H o u r s
A l a r m s
D i s a b l e d
E n a b l e d
# – t o g g l e
2 4 H o u r s & b e t
A p r o g r a m m i n g l w e e n a r m s
D i s a b e s c – l e d , s a v e
E n t r y / E x i t ,
Table 29. Programming a custom Zone
151
64 - Assemble Zones (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
1 = Outputs
Any of the available output types can be assigned to the custom zone. On selecting this attribute the
01=BELLS output type is displayed along with it status; the default status is disabled. The status indicates the conditions under which the custom zone activates the output. To assign the output type status press the # key, this toggles between each of the status settings:
1.
Disabled the output is not activated by the custom zone,
2 Set
3 Unset
4.
Set/Unset the output is activated by the custom zone only when the system is set, the output is activated by the custom zone only when the system is unset, the output is activated by the custom zone when the system is both set and unset.
Select the output types to be assigned by pressing the A and B keys or by entering the number of the required output type and assign the required status. When all of the output types have been selected, press the esc key to return the previous menu level.
For a full list of output types refer to option 53 = Program Outputs.
2 = Status
The Status attribute determines the system conditions that custom zone is operational in. The four Status attributes are:
1.
Unset
2.
Entry/Exit activates an alarm when the system is unset, activates an alarm when the system is setting and unsetting,
3.
Part Set activates an alarm when the system is part set ,
4.
Full Set activates an alarm when the system is full set .
The default for each of the Status attributes is disabled. To enable the zone to activate an alarm, select the required Status attribute using the A or B keys and press the # key; the display indicates that a custom zone activation while the system is in the selected Status will create an Alarm condition and switch on the assigned outputs.
NOTE: The custom zone can be operational in all four Status conditions if required.
152
Galaxy Programming Manual
64 - Assemble Zones (cont’d)
3 = Setting
The Setting attribute determines the function (if any) that the custom zone has in setting and unsetting the system.
1.
Begin Set if enabled, the custom zone starts the setting procedure,
2.
Begin Entry if enabled, the custom zone starts the unsetting procedure,
3.
Sets System if enabled, the custom terminates the setting procedure.
The default for each of the Setting attributes is disabled. To enable the options, select the required Setting attribute using the A or B keys and press the # key; the display indicates that attribute is ENABLED for the custom zone.
NOTE: The custom zone can be assigned all three Setting attributes if required, however, it is recommended that either attribute 1 ( Begin Set ) or 3 ( Sets System ) is enabled, but not both.
4 = Log
This attribute determines which custom zone activations are logged. On selecting Log the current selection is displayed. To change the selection press the # key, this toggles between the Log options;
Disabled the custom zone activations are not logged,
Entry/Exit the custom zone activations only log during the setting and unsetting procedure,
24 Hours all custom zone activations log (both in the set and unset states)
Alarms the custom zone only logs when an activation results in an alarm condition.
NOTE: The opening ( + ) and closing ( – ) of custom zones are recorded in the event log.
153
64 - Assemble Zones (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
Assemble Zone Example:
Assemble a zone that:
• activates Bells outputs when the system is set,
• activates Link-A outputs when the system is unset,
• generates an alarm condition when the system is part and full set,
• does not generate an alarm condition during the setting and unsetting procedure,
• acts as a terminator when the system is setting,
• logs all activation (in both set and unset states).
Programming:
(Assuming factory default settings)
1.
Select option 64 = ASSEMBLE ZONES ; press the ent key,
2.
Select custom zone ( 1 = Custom-A , 2 = Custom-B ); press the ent key,
3.
Outputs is displayed. Press the ent key to select this option,
4.
Bells is displayed. Press the # key. Set is displayed,
5.
Enter 51 . Link-A is displayed. Press the # key. Set is displayed,
6.
Press the # key. Unset is displayed,
7.
Press the esc key. Outputs is displayed,
8.
Press the A key. Status is displayed. Press the ent key to select this option,
9.
Unset Disabled is displayed,
10.
Press the A key. Entry/ Exit Disabled is displayed,
11.
Press the A key. Part Set Disabled is displayed,
12.
Press the # key. Part Set Alarm is displayed,
13.
Press the A key. Full Set Disabled is displayed,
14.
Press the # key. Full Set Alarm is displayed,
15.
Press the esc key. Status is displayed,
16.
Press the A key. Setting is displayed. Press the ent key to select this option,
17.
Begin Set Disabled is displayed,
18.
Press the A key. Sets System Disabled is displayed,
19.
Press the # key. Sets System Enabled is displayed,
20.
Press the esc key. Setting is displayed,
21.
Press the A key. Log is displayed. Press the ent key to select this option,
22.
Log Disabled is displayed,
23.
Press the # key. Log Entry/Exit is displayed,
24.
Press the # key. Log 24 Hours is displayed,
25.
Press the esc key three times to return to the 64 = ASSEMBLE ZONES display.
154
Galaxy Programming Manual
65 - Timers
Option 65 – Timers (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Timers menu are as follows:
Timers
1 = Timer A
2 = Timer B
3 = Autoset
1 = Timer Status
2 = Timers (1-20)
1 = Timer Status
2 = Timers (1-20)
0 = Off
1 = On
Use A or B key to select timer - 20 times can be programmed, then press ent.
A ON :
A(>), B(>) key to program day
# to toggle ON/OFF status
0-9 keys to enter time
* to delete programming
0 = Off
1 = On
Use A or B key to select timer - 20 times can be programmed, then press ent.
B ON
[>], [<], #, 0-9, *
: *** ** **
A(>), B(>) key to program day
# to toggle ON/OFF status
0-9 keys to enter time
* to delete programming
Use A or B keys to select group and press ent. 1 = Autoset Status
2 = Prewarning
3 = Extension
4 = Force Set
5 = Autoset Events
6 = Lockout Status
(G512)
0 = Off
1 = On
2 = Monitor
30 (0-50) mins
030 (0-400) mins
0 = Off
1 = On
Use A or B key to select timer, then press ent.
A1S : *** *** ** **
A(>), B(>) key to program day
# to toggle ON/OFF status
0-9 keys to enter time
* to delete programming
0 = Off
1 = On
7 = Lockout Events
(G512) Use A or B key to select timer, then press ent.
A1L : *** *** ** **
A(>), B(>) key to program day
# to toggle ON/OFF status
0-9 keys to enter time
* to delete programming
155
65 - Timers (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
Timer A and B
The Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 and 512 control panels provide 2 timers that allow up to 20 times to be assigned over a 7 day period; these can be combined in any order of On and Off times as required.
Programming Timers
1.
Enter the Timers option; 1=TIMER A is displayed. To modify or assign times go to Step 5 .
2.
Press the ent key to select Timer A or the A then ent keys to select Timer B ; 1=TIMER STATUS is displayed.
3.
Press the ent key; the status of the selected timer is displayed (the default setting is 0=OFF ). To change the status press the A or B key or press key 1 to select ON or 2 to select OFF .
4.
Press the ent key to accept the programming and return to the previous menu level. Press the esc key once to return to 1=TIMER A , or twice to escape from the option.
5.
To modify the times, press the ent key to select Timer A or the A then the ent keys to select Timer B ;
1=TIMER STATUS is displayed.
6.
Press the A then ent key to select 2=TIMERS (1–20) ; the first 2 times assigned to the timer are displayed (the first time is on the top line, the second is on the bottom).
A MON ON 19:30
TUE OFF 07:30
7.
Press the A key to step through each of the times until the required time is displayed on the top line of the display.
8.
Press the ent key to select the time to be modified:
•
•
•
• the ✴ key deletes the programmed time information; the A or B keys change the programmed day; the # key toggles whether the timer switches ON or OFF ; the number keys ( 0–9 ) assign the time (the time must be four digits in the 24 hour format);
A MON ON 19:30
[<],[>],#,0-9,*
9.
Press the ent key to accept the programming and return to the previous menu level.
10.
Press the esc key three times to escape from the Timers option.
Once the times have been programmed and the Timer Status is set to 1=On , the Timer-A or Timer-B outputs are activated at the programmed On times and deactivated at the Off times. User codes that they have been attributed to a Time Zone A or B are invalid between an On time and the next Off time for the appropriate timer.
NOTE: The Timer Status can be switched On and Off by users via option 45 = TIMER CONTROL .
156
Galaxy Programming Manual
65 - Timers (cont’d)
Autoset (Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Autoset option is available on the Galaxy 18, 60, 128, 500, 504 and 512 control panels only. The
Galaxy 500 can be programmed to automatically set and unset each of the system groups individually at predetermined times.
NOTE: The Galaxy 512, as part of the high security requirements, can be programmed to automatically set only; it cannot be programmed to automatically unset.
Each group can be programmed with 20 Autoset times over a 7 day period. These can be combined in any order of On and Off times as required - for example 20 On times may be allocated to a group, or six Off times and 14 On times; on the Galaxy 512 all of the times are fixed as On times.
When the system has been set by the Autoset function, outputs programmed as Autoset (refer to option 53
= PROGRAM OUTPUTS ) are activated; the Set outputs are also activated.
Exit Alarm (Galaxy 512 only)
Where Exit Alarm is enabled (refer to option 51 = PARAMETERS ) for a group, any zone open at autoset immediately activates a full alarm. If Exit Alarm is disabled (default) the Entry/Exit Horns pulse if zones are open. If the zones remain open, on expiry of the times programmed in Fail To Set parameter, the Fail Set outputs are activated along with a full alarm.
Programming Autoset
If groups are enabled (refer to option 63 = OPTIONS ) the keypads prompts for the group that the autoset time is to be allocated to. Press the A or B keys to step through the groups until the required number is displayed and press the ent key.
NOTE: The group can be directly selected by entering the group number. The Galaxy 504 and 512 has 32 groups; these are displayed in blocks of eight groups, sub-divided into A, B, C and D;
G r o u p B l o c k P h y s i c a l G r o u p s
A 1 8
B 1 8
C 1 8
1 8
9 1 6
1 7 2 4
D 1 8 2 5 3 2
Table 30. Groups
Use the A or B key to select the required group ( A1–D8 ). When the end of a block is reached, the next block of eight groups is displayed; use keys 1–8 to assign the relevant group in the current block to the zone; press the ent key to accept the selection.
157
65 - Timers (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
There are five stages to programming the Autoset function:
1. Autoset Status
0 = Off (default)
1 = On
2 = Monitor - if selected, the setting and unsetting of the group is monitored:
• if not set manually before the On time, then the Set Late output is activated
• if unset before the Off time, then the Unset Early output is activated.
2. Prewarning
1 = Period
0 – 50 minutes (default 30 minutes):
2 = Audible (this can be turned on or off)
This option determines the warning period given to users prior to the system autosetting. Outputs programmed as Prewarning activate during the prewarning period. The output normally emits a constant tone, however if an extension is not possible, then a pulsed tone is emitted and prewarn activates at the Autoset time. At the end of the prewarning period, the system begins the timed setting procedure.
NOTE: Pressing the esc key at any time during the prewarning resets and restarts the prewarning countdown. If more than one group is in the prewarning period, each group can be viewed by pressing * and > or * and < .
3. Extension
0 – 400 minutes (default 30 minutes):
An autoset Extension can be assigned to each group on the system - programmed with different values per group. Entering a user code during the Prewarning delays the autosetting by the period assigned to the
Extension .
On the Galaxy 500 the Extension can be repeated as many times as requested.
NOTE: The Late Working option (refer to option 45 = TIMERS ) authorises an Extension in advance of the Prewarning period.
Late Set appears if the system is not set after prewarn time plus 300 seconds (longest possible exit delay)
An Extension cannot be granted once the timed setting procedure begins. An Extension cannot be granted beyond 23.00 hours on the Galaxy 512.
4. Force Set
0 = Off (default)
1 = On
As a factory preset, any zone that is open at the start of the setting procedure - except Final , Exit , Entry , or
Push Set , (or Secure Final or Part Final when acting as a Final ) - is omitted by the autoset routine whether or not it is omittable. If one of the above listed zones is open and is non-omittable, on expiry of the time programmed in the Fail-to-Set parameter the Fail-to-Set outputs are activated along with a full alarm.
158
Galaxy Programming Manual
65 - Timers (cont’d)
5. Autoset Events
This option programs the times when the selected group is automatically switched On (Autoset) and Off
(Autounset).
On selecting the option, the first 2 times assigned to the timer are displayed (the first time is on the top line, the second is on the bottom). If no autoset times have been assigned, the keypad displays stars ( ✴ ) on the top line. Press the A key to step through each of the times until the required time is shown on the top line of the display.
S indicates autoset feature
Group Selected (A1)
Day assigned
ON = autoset
OFF = autounset (not available on G12)
A1SMON ON 17:30
MON ON 19:45
Time assigned
Press the ent key to select the time to be modified. The keypad displays:
A1LMON ON 17:30
[<],[>],#,0-9,*
• the ✴ key deletes the programmed time information;
• the A or B keys change the programmed day;
• the # key toggles whether the timer switch ON or OFF ;
• the number keys ( 0–9 ) assign the time in the 24 hour format);
Press the ent key to accept the programming and return to the previous menu level.
If a keyswitch zone type (9) is operated twice (i.e. set/unset) during the exit time of an autoset then the autoset is cancelled.
Operating a keyswitch zone type during the pre-warn period of an autoset will start a Force Set. If you then activate the switch again (i.e. unset with keyswitch) before the panel sets, the pre-warn continues on the autoset.
NOTE: When the keyswitch is activated the second time to take panel back into pre-warn, it can be up to
10 seconds before the pre-warn tones at the keypad start up again.
Lockout (Galaxy 512)
Each group can be programmed with 20 Lockout times over a seven day period. These can be combined in any order of On and Off times as required.
If Lockout has been assigned to a group, the group is locked-out at the Lockout On time or when the group sets - whichever occurs first. Outputs programmed as Lockout are active while the system is locked out - this will not always correspond to the times assigned to the Lockout depending on whether the group sets prior to
Lockout On . When a group is locked-out the setting status indicates that it cannot be unset by displaying an
L .
GROUPS 12345678
CLLUULLSL
159
65 - Timers (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
During the Lockout period, the group can not be unset unless an alarm has been activated in the group. In the event of an alarm occurring during the Lockout period, any valid level 2 (or above) code assigned to the group in alarm may be used to unset and/or reset the group. If multiple locked-out groups are in an alarm condition entry of a single valid code (level 2 or above with access to the relevant groups) cancels the alarms and unsets the activated groups.
The group can only be manually unset once in each Lockout Off period. If no Lockout times are programmed, the group may be unset at any time.
Codes are not affected by Lockout , and can be used to gain access to the menus and to manually set the group.
Programming Lockout
There are two stages to programming the Lockout function . These are options 6 = Lockout Status and 7
= Lockout Events of the Autoset programming menu:
Lockout Status
0 = Off (default)
1 = On
Lockout Events
This option programs the Off (Unlock) and On (Lockout) times for the selected group.
On selecting the option, the first 2 times assigned to the timer are displayed (the first time is on the top line, the second is on the bottom). If no lockout times have been assigned, the keypad displays stars ( ✴ ) on the top line:
Day assigned
L indicates lockout feature
ON = lockout
OFF = unlock
Group Selected (A1) A1LMON ON 17:30
TUE OFF 06:30
Time assigned
Press the A key to step through each of the times until the required time is shown on the top line of the display.
Press the ent key to select the time to be modified. The keypad displays:
A1SMON ON 17:30
[<],[>],#,0-9,*
• the ✴ key deletes the programmed time information;
• the A or B keys change the programmed day;
• the # key toggles whether the timer switch ON or OFF ;
• the number keys ( 0–9 ) assign the time (in the 24 hour format);
Press the ent key to accept the programming and return to the previous menu level.
160
Galaxy Programming Manual
66 - Pre-Check
Option 66 – Pre-checks (Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Pre-Check option provides added system security by alerting the user to zones that may not be operating correctly.
NOTE: Pre-check does not operate when the system is in the engineer mode.
Testing Zones
16 CHECK ZONES
A=VIEW
The Entry/Exit Horns beep once when each zone is tested. As each zone is successfully tested, the keypad indicates the number that remain to be tested. When the last zone is successfully tested the Entry/Exit Horn sounds twice and the keypad displays 0 CHECK ZONES ; press the ent key to resume the system routine.
1 = Mode
The Mode determines the pre-check level that the selected zones are subjected to before the system can set.
The Mode is selected from one of the following:
1. Disabled (default) : the pre-check option is disabled; even if zones are selected, they are not checked.
2. Warning: when the setting routine is started the user is informed of the number of selected pre-check zones that have not been activated since the system was unset; press the A or B keys to view the zones.
Press the ent key to continue the setting routine. The zone that have not been activated do not have to be tested.
3. Autocheck: when the setting routine is started the user is informed of the number of selected pre-check zones that have not been activated since the system was unset and a warning is sounded; press the A or B keys to view the zones. These zones must be tested before setting can be resumed.
4. Forced Check: when the setting routine is started the keypad indicates the number of pre-check zones that are on the system; to view the pre-check zone addresses press the A or B keys. All of the preselected zones must be tested before setting can take place.
0 CHECK ZONES
ENT=SET
2 = Select Zones
On selecting 2 = Select Zones , the address and function of the first zone on the system is displayed. Move to the required zone by pressing the A or B keys or by entering the zone address. To toggle the status of the precheck attribute of the zone press the # key; the keypad indicates that the zone is included in the pre-check by displaying PRE-CHECK ZONE . Select other zones to be pre-checked in the same way. Once all of the zones have been selected, press the esc key.
161
67 - Remote Reset
Galaxy Programming Manual
Option 67 – Remote Reset
The Remote Reset option allows a user to perform an engineer reset authorised by the Alarm Receiving
Centre (ARC). In the event of an alarm that requires an engineer reset, the keypad displays a number, which, when quoted to the ARC is decoded and exchanged for a new number. When this new number is entered it resets the Galaxy panel. Entering the engineer code also resets the Galaxy panel.
NOTE: The alarm conditions that require to be reset remotely must have the appropriate System Reset ,
Tamper Reset or PA Reset parameters programmed for engineer reset (level 7 ).
Each alarm activation generates a random number, therefore, the number required to reset the panel changes each activation. As ARCs have different decoding equipment, the appropriate reset system must be selected from the following Remote Mode options:
0 = OFF (default).
1 = SMS - Southern Monitoring Service (4 digits).
2 = Technistore (5 digits) - requires a four digit local modifier (000 - 255) to be assigned.
3 = Microtech (6 digits) - requires a four digit local modifier (0000 - 9999) to be assigned.
NOTE : The local modifier for the Technistore or Microtech reset modes must be assigned after discussion with the ARC.
162
Galaxy Programming Manual
68 - Menu Access
Option 68 – Menu Access (Galaxy 60, 128, 500, 504 & 512)
The Menu Access option is used to assign access levels to each of the menu options. This allows code levels
3 – 6 to have access to menu options to which they would normally have insufficient access rights.
On selecting this option, 11 = OMIT ZONES is displayed along with the current code levels assigned ( 3456 default).
Levels 3456
11=OMIT ZONES
Use the A or B key to select the required menu option or enter the option number directly and press the ent key. The currently assigned levels appear displayed on the top line of the display. The level maps default to the standard access. To modify the levels, press the required number keys; this toggles the access level numbers on the bottom line of the display on and off.
Levels 3456
>__5_
Press the ent key to save the programming and return to the previous menu level. If the level is assigned to the option the number is displayed, if it has been removed a dash (–) is displayed.
For example, level 5 codes can be given access to menu 42 which would allow them to allocate codes.
Levels
42=CODES
––56
Users can only allocate codes up to the level that they have been assigned. A level 4 user cannot assign a user code as level 5.
NOTE: The following menu access levels are fixed: option 48 = DATELOCK level 6 , and option 68 =
MENU ACCESS engineer access (level 7 and 8).
163
Galaxy Programming Manual
164
Galaxy Programming Manual
Installation Instructions
Appendix A : Door Control - MAX (MX01)
•
Installation Instructions
•
The MAX box contains the following:
MAX reader (P/N MX01 ),
MAX facia label (P/N 21_1627 ),
• 10-way connector block.
The MAX installation sequence is as follows:
1.
Wiring the MAX
2.
Mounting the MAX
3.
Attaching the facia label
Wiring the MAX
}
Connected to the Door
Strike as per manufacturer's requirements and instructions
N/O
COM
N/C
Horn
Egress
Contact
B
A
-VE
+VE
0V
+12V
Horn
MAX by-pass
Door contact
AB bus of Galaxy
12V
0V
0V
Figure A-1 MAX Wiring Details
1.
Connect the A and B lines of the Galaxy communication bus to the A and B terminals. This configuration must be a daisy-chain (parallel) connection. If the MAX is the last module in the line, then the End of Line (EOL) resistor must be connected across the A and B terminals.
2.
Connect the door strike in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, via the relay.
3.
The Horn output is an open collector. This is connected to the output device via a relay.
NOTE: With MAX software version 1.23 the horn output does not function when the reader is programmed as on-line operating mode.
4.
The Egress switch is used to activate the door strike, allowing the door to be opened without activating the horn (the egress switch is normally open).
5.
The Contact switch is used to connect the access door to an alarm contact, giving alarm indication when the door is opened without the door strike being activated (either by a MAX card or the egress switch).
6.
Connect a 12 Vd.c. power supply to the MAX terminals marked –VE and +VE .
A-1
Installation Instructions (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
Mounting the MAX
Attach the wired-up 10-way connector block to the pins on the rear of the MAX reader.
Surface Mounting the MAX
1.
If the wiring is not wall recessed, remove the appropriate knock-out (from the sides, top or bottom of the MAX).
2.
Using the MAX reader as a template locate the two mounting screws in the required positions.
NOTE: The MAX is positioned with the 2 LEDs at the top of the module.
3.
Securely attach the module to the wall with 2 No.8 roundhead 2 inch screws.
Flush Mounting the MAX
1.
Using the template on the lid of the MAX flush mounting kit box (P/N MX02 ), locate the position of the screws and mark and cut-out the recess area required.
NOTE: Ensure that there is sufficient wall surface to securely fix the screws.
2.
Fit the MAX reader into the flush mounting kit; push the reader in from the rear ensuring that the four retaining arms on the flush mounting kit click into place
3.
Securely attach the module to the wall with 2 No.8 roundhead 1½ inch screws.
NOTE: The MAX is positioned with the 2 LEDs at the top of the module.
Remove the backing from the facia label, line up the label images with the 6 LEDs and place it on the face of the MAX.
)
LED 1 (green) door strike open
LED 2 (red) door closed
LED 3 (red) add mode
LED 6 (red) programming mode
MAX
LED 4 (red) void mode
LED 5 (red)
Nightlock mode
Figure A-2 MAX LED’s
A-2
Galaxy Programming Manual
Configuring a MAX Reader
Configuring a MAX Reader into the System
MAX readers can only be configured into the Galaxy system from engineer mode.
NOTE: When adding a MAX reader to a Galaxy panel ensure that there are no more than eight MAX readers connected to the RS485 ( AB ) line.
Wire the MAX as per the instructions given with figure 5-1 then access engineer mode.
The MAX reader must be assigned as either an On-Line or a Stand-Alone module using option 63.2.2
= OPTIONS.MAX.MAX Address:
0 = On-Line: The MAX is fully integrated with the Galaxy system and communicates via the AB line, sharing system resources and facilities.
1 = Standalone: The MAX operates as an entirely independent unit. The Galaxy does not monitor the MAX for alarms, tampers or power failure.
NOTE: Early versions of MAX readers cannot convert between the stand-alone and on-line operating modes:
• MX01S (software V1.23) is a dedicated stand-alone reader. This cannot be converted to on-line mode and must not be connected to the Galaxy AB line. The horn output is fully functional.
• MX01 (software V1.23) is programmed as an on-line reader. The horn output is nonfunctioning. The reader can be reprogrammed, via the Galaxy system, into stand-alone mode, however, once programmed as stand-alone it cannot be converted to on-line mode.
In stand-alone mode the horn output is fully functional.
• MX01 (software V1.32) can be reprogrammed as stand-alone or on-line as often as required. In on-line mode, the horn output is non-functioning; in stand-alone mode the horn output is fully functional.
Configuring as a Stand-Alone MAX
1.
Ensure that the MAX is connected to the Galaxy ( RS485 AB line ) and the MAX mode is enabled
(option 63.2.1 = OPTIONS.MAX.MAX Mode ).
2.
Select option 63.2.2 = OPTIONS.MAX.MAX Address and press the ent key; the Galaxy searches for the MAX with the highest address (the new MAX reader). The Galaxy 500 and 512 prompt for the AB line (1 – 4) that is to be searched; select the line and press the ent key. On locating the MAX address, the keypad prompts for the OPERATING MODE of MAX to be assigned: select 1 = Standalone and press the ent key. The MAX reader is readdressed as 32 .
When the reprogramming is complete the MAX bleeps, LED 2 on the MAX switches on and the keypad display returns to 2 = MAX Address .
3. (MAX software versions 1.23 and 1.32) Disconnect the AB line from the MAX reader. Ensure that all other modules (keypads, RIOs and on-line MAX readers) are still daisy-chained into the
Galaxy panel. If the MAX reader is the last module on the AB line , remove the 680 Ω end of line resistor and put it into the last module on the line.
NOTE: The Galaxy cannot operate if the AB line is connected to stand-alone MAX readers with software V1.23 or V1.32.
4.
The MAX reader is now programmed as a stand-alone module in sleep mode (LEDs 2 – 5 on) and can be programmed using the MAX cards (refer to Programming Stand-Alone MAX Readers).
A-3
Configuring On-Line MAX
Galaxy Programming Manual
Configuring as On-Line MAX
1. Only if reprogramming an existing stand-alone MAX reader:
• Put the MAX reader into the sleep mode (present the Void Master card then swipe twice with the Program Master card — LEDs 2 – 5 switch on. Refer to the MAX Installation and
Operations Guide (L120) .).
• Remove the power from the MAX reader.
2.
Connect the AB line of the MAX reader to the AB line from the control panel (ensuring that a daisy-chain connection is maintained and that the 680 Ω resistor is located in the last module on the line). Connect 12 Vd.c. to the + VE and – VE terminal of the MAX reader.
3.
Ensure that the MAX mode is enabled (option 63.2.1 = OPTIONS.MAX.MAX Mode ).
4.
Select option 63.2.2 = OPTIONS.MAX.MAX Address and press the ent key; the Galaxy searches for the MAX with the highest address (the new MAX reader). The Galaxy 500 and 512 prompt for the AB line (1 – 4) that is to be searched; select the line and press the ent key.
Only if adding a new MAX reader: On locating the MAX address, the keypad prompts for the
OPERATING MODE of MAX to be assigned: select 0 = On-Line and press the ent key.
NOTE: If reprogramming an existing stand-alone reader, the system automatically selects the On-
Line operating mode
The MAX can then be readdressed. The keypad displays the current address of the MAX and the range of valid addresses. Enter the new MAX address and press the ent key; the Galaxy then reprograms the address of the MAX. The keypad indicates the old and new MAX addresses and the status of the reprogramming.
NOTE: All new MAX readers default to address 7 . It is recommended that when adding a reader, it is addressed as the lowest available number on the line.
When the reprogramming is complete the MAX bleeps, the LEDs on the MAX switch off and the keypad display returns to 2 = MAX Address .
NOTE: If the Galaxy has been warm-started with the MAX connected and the reader is reprogrammed with its existing address, then the LED does not switch off and engineering mode does not have to be exited to configure the MAX into the system.
5.
Program the MAX Parameters. This option defines the operational features of the MAX reader.
1 = Descriptor: This option is used to assign a name of up to 12 characters to each of the MAX modules.
2 = Open Timeout: This is the period, following the user card swipe, that the MAX relay is activated allowing a door strike to be unlocked and the door to be opened without creating an alarm. The MAX relay de-activates as soon as the door is closed or the Close Timeout occurs.
3 = Close Timeout: This is the period following the user card swipe that the door can remain open when gaining access. If the door remains open longer than the period assigned to the Close
Timeout , then an alarm occurs.
4 = Groups: Each MAX module can be assigned to selected groups; the MAX then responds only to cards that have a group common to it.
A-4
Galaxy Programming Manual
Removing MAX Readers
Keypad Group Restriction: To restrict the operation of the function only to groups that are common to both the card and the MAX, press the
✴
key when assigning groups to the MAX.
This means that when a card with access to groups 1, 2 and 3 activates the MAX card function on a MAX module assigned to groups 2, 3 and 4, the function only operates on the common groups (groups 2 and 3).
6.
Exit engineer mode — engineer code + esc : the keypad displays the message 1 MOD. ADDED
— esc=CONTINUE . LED 2 on the MAX reader switches on. Press the esc key; the keypad returns to the unset banner.
If this message is not displayed, the MAX reader is not communicating with the control panel and has not been configured into the system (LED 2 does not switch on).
NOTES:
1.
The MAX reader will not operate until engineer mode is exited and the reader is configured into the system.
2.
All MAX doors must be closed, otherwise engineer mode cannot be exited.
7.
The on-line MAX reader is now configured into the system
Removing a MAX Reader from the System
Stand Alone Mode (Software V1.23 & V1.32)
The stand-alone MAX reader is not connected to the AB line , therefore it can be removed simply by disconnecting the power to the reader. There is no requirement to access engineer mode.
On-Line Mode
1.
Access engineer mode.
2.
Disconnect the MAX reader ( AB line and power).
3.
Exit engineer mode.
The message 1 MOD. MISSING — [<],[>] to View is displayed.
4.
Press the A or B key.
The message MAX X — ✴ =REMOVE MODULE is displayed.
5.
Press the
✴ key to acknowledge and accept that the MAX reader has been removed. The keypad returns to the unset banner.
Programming Instructions for On-Line Readers
Refer to Section 6: System Operation , menu option 63 = OPTIONS for details on programming the
Open Timeout , Close Timeout and Group parameters for the MAX reader.
NOTE: These programming instructions refer only to on-line MAX readers (modules that are connected to a host Galaxy panel via the RS485 data bus). For details on stand-alone MAX installation refer to the MAX Installation and Operations Guide (L120) .
For details on the programming of the MAX user cards and functions refer to Section 6: System
Operation , menu option 42 = CODES .
A-5
Operating Instructions
Galaxy Programming Manual
Operating Instructions (On-Line Modes)
The MAX must be presented with a valid user card to allow access. Opening the door while LED 2 is on activates an alarm; the buzzer sounds and LED 1 flashes until the door is closed.
Activating the egress switch allows the door to be opened without activating an alarm when no card has been presented to the MAX.
Gaining Access
1.
Ensure that LED 2 is on and all other LEDs are off.
2.
Swipe the MAX with a standard user or nightlock access user card. LED 2 switches off and LED 1 switches on for the programmed Open Timeout .
3.
Open the door while the LED 1 is on and access the area.
4.
Close the door; LED 1 switches off and LED 2 switches on. The door must be closed within the programmed Close Timeout ; if the door remains open longer than this, an alarm is activated.
Nightlock Access (Stand-Alone Only)
Only cards programmed as nightlock access users can gain access when the MAX is nightlocked. The operation is identical to the standard user card.
NOTE: Access cannot be gained using a standard user card.
Card-Held Function
The MAX card can be assigned a single menu option (refer to option 42.2.8 = CODES.User
Codes.MAX Function ). To activate the function assigned to the MAX card, hold the card in front of the reader for three seconds; all of the LEDs switch on. If a keypad has been assigned to the MAX function then it displays the details of this option. If no keypad is assigned, pressing a key on any of the keypads assigned to a common group to the user displays the card-held function.
Card-Held System Setting
If the MAX card is assigned one of the setting options (option 12, 13, 14 & 16 – 19), the card-held functions starts the setting procedure for the groups assigned to the card.
NOTE: If Group Restriction is assigned, then only the groups that are common to both the MAX reader and the MAX user are set.
If all of the groups that are assigned to the MAX are set (either by the card-held function or by any other setting means) all of the LEDs switch off.
To unset the system using the MAX, swipe the reader with a valid MAX card. The MAX reader beeps and LED 2 switches on. All of the groups assigned to the MAX are instantly unset.
A-6
Galaxy Programming Manual
Viewing Max Events
Max Log
The Galaxy system has a 100 event log for the recording the MAX activations. This log is shared by all readers on the system and operates on a first-in-first-out basis for overwriting events when the log is filled.
To display the events in the MAX log select option 25 = ACCESS DOORS ; use the A or B keys to select the required MAX address then press the ent key. The first event that occurred on the selected
MAX is displayed along with details of the time, date and MAX number.
To view the log press the A key to move forward in time through the events or the B key to move backwards. Press the esc key to return to the MAX address display. To view the log of another MAX, use the A or B key to select the required address. To escape from the Access Doors option press the esc key.
Time and date of event
02:25 SUN 22 OCT
USR032 Valid
Max user number Event type
Max Events Print-Out
The MAX events can be printed out as they occur to an on-line printer. To print the MAX events ensure that option 51.27 = PARAMETERS.On-Line Print is enabled. Select option 51.28 =
PARAMETERS.On-Line Level and enter 2 to print out all system events including the MAX events or 3 to print out only the MAX events.
NOTE: A serial printer must be connected to line one of the Galaxy panel and the printer must remain on-line (ready to print) at all times.
A-7
Galaxy Programming Manual
A-8
Galaxy Programming Manual
Library
Appendix B: Library
32 space
33 P
34 Q
35 R
36 S
37 T
38 U
39 Ü
40 V
41 W
42 X
43 space
44 Y
45 Z
46 .
47 ,
48 /
49 -
50 +
51 &
52 (
53 )
54 space
16 C
17 D
18 E
19 F
20 G
21 space
22 H
23 I
24 J
25 K
26 L
27 M
28 N
29 Ø
30 Ö
31 O
00 0
01 1
02 2
03 3
04 4
05 5
06 6
07 7
08 8
09 9
10 space
11 Å
12 Ä
13 A
14 Æ
15 B
033 BATH
034 BATHROOM
035 BAY
036 BEAM
037 BEDROOM
038 BEHIND
039 BELL
040 BELOW
041 BENCH
042 BESIDE
043 BIOLOGY
044 BIRD
045 BLOCK
046 BLUE
047 BOARD
048 BODY
049 BOILER
050 BOOTH
051 BOTTOM
052 BOX
053 BOYS
054 BRANCH
055 BROOM
056 BROWN
057 BUILDING
058 BUNKER
001 ABOVE
002 ACCESS
003 ACCOUNTANT
004 ACCOUNTANTS
005 ACCOUNTS
006 ADMIN.
007 ALARM
008 ALERT
009 ANIMAL
010 ANNEXE
011 ARCH
012 AREA
013 ARENA
014 AROUND
015 ART
016 ASSEMBLY
017 ASSISTANT
018 AT
019 ATTACK
020 ATTIC
021 AUTOMATIC
022 AUXILIARY
023 BACK
024 BAGGAGE
025 BAKERY
026 BALCONY
027 BALLROOM
028 BANK
029 BANKING
030 BAR
031 BARN
032 BASEMENT
059 BY
060 CABINET
061 CAFE
062 CALL
063 CANTEEN
064 CAR
065 CARGO
066 CARPENTER
067 CARPET
068 CASH
069 CASHIER
070 CEILING
071 CELL
072 CELLAR
073 CENTRAL
074 CENTRE
075 CHAIR
076 CHANGING
077 CHEMISTRY
078 CHICKEN
079 CHURCH
080 CLASSROOM
081 CLEANER
082 CLEANERS
083 CLEANING
084 CLERK
085 CLERKS
086 COAL
087 COAT
088 COIN
089 COLD
090 COLLECTION
091 COMMUNICATOR
092 COMPUTER
093 CONFERENCE
094 CONTAINER
095 CONTACT
096 CONSERVATORY
097 CORNER
098 CORRIDOR
099 COUNTER
100 COURT
101 COW
102 CUPBOARD
103 CURRENCY
104 DAIRY
105 DARK-ROOM
106 DATA
107 DAY
108 DEPARTURE
109 DEPUTY
110 DEPT.
111 DESIGN
112 DESK
113 DETECTOR
114 DEVELOPMENT
115 DEVICE
116 DIARY
149 ESCAPE
150 ESCALATOR
151 EXIT
152 EXPORT
153 EXTERNAL
154 FACTORY
155 FAILURE
156 FAR
157 FARM
158 FAX
159 FEED
160 FEMALE
161 FENCE
162 FIELD
163 FIFTEEN
164 FIFTY
165 FLING
166 FIRE
167 FIRST
168 FIRST-AID
169 FISH
170 FIVE
171 FLAT
172 FLOOR
173 FOR
117 DINING
118 DIRECTOR
119 DIRECTORS
120 DISPATCH
121 DOG
122 DOOR
123 DOUBLE
124 DOWNSTAIRS
125 DRAMA
126 DRAWER
127 DRAWING
128 DRINKS
129 DRIVE
130 DRUGS
131 EAST
132 ECONOMICS
133 EDGE
134 EIGHT
135 EIGHTEEN
136 EIGHTY
137 ELECTRIC
138 ELECTRICIAN
139 ELECTRONICS
140 EMERGENCY
141 END
142 ENGINE
143 ENGINEER
144 ENGINEERS
145 ENGLISH
146 ENTRANCE
147 ENTRY
148 EQUIPMENT
B-1
Library (cont’d)
206 HANGER
207 HEAD
208 HEAT
209 HEATER
210 HIGH
211 HISTORY
212 HOME
213 HORSE
214 HOT
215 HOUSE
216 ICE
217 IN
218 INDUSTRIAL
219 INFANT
220 INFANTS
221 INFORMATION
222 INFRARED
223 INSIDE
224 INSTRUCTORS
225 INTERIOR
226 INTO
227 IRON
228 ISOLATION
229 IT
230 ITALIAN
231 JANITOR
232 JANITORS
233 JUDGE
234 JUNIOR
174 FOREIGN
175 FORTY
176 FOUNTAIN
177 FOUR
178 FREEZER
179 FRENCH
180 FRIDGE
181 FROM
182 FRONT
183 GAMES
184 GARAGE
185 GARDEN
186 GATE
187 GENTS
188 GEOGRAPHY
189 GERMAN
190 GIRLS
191 GLASS
192 GOLD
193 GOODS
194 GREAT
195 GREEN
196 GROCERY
197 GROUND
198 GROUNDS
199 GROUNDSMAN
200 GROUP
201 GUARD
202 GUN
203 GYM
204 HALL
205 HAND
Galaxy Programming Manual
267 MAIN
268 MAJOR
269 MALE
270 MAN
271 MANAGER
272 MANAGERS
273 MASTER
274 MAT
275 MATHS
276 MEDICAL
277 MEN
278 MESS
279 METAL
280 METER
281 MEZZANINE
282 MICROWAVE
283 MIDDLE
284 MILK
285 MINOR
286 MOBILE
287 MODEL
288 MONITOR
289 MOULDING
290 MOVEMENT
291 NEAR
292 NEW
293 NEXT
294 NIGHT
295 NINE
235 JUST
236 KEEP
237 KEYPAD
238 KITCHEN
239 LAB
240 LADIES
241 LANDING
242 LAST
243 LATIN
244 LAUNDRY
245 LAVATORY
246 LAWN
247 LEAST
248 LECTURE
249 LEFT
250 LEVEL
251 L.H.S.
252 LIBRARY
253 LIFT
254 LIGHT
255 LINE
256 LITTLE
257 LOADING
258 LOBBY
259 LOCK
260 LOFT
261 LORRY
262 LOUNGE
263 LOW
264 LUNCH
265 MACHINE
266 MAGNETIC
B-2
328 PATH
329 PATIO
330 PEN
331 PENTHOUSE
332 PERIMETER
333 PERSONAL
334 PERSONNEL
335 PHONE
336 PHYSICS
337 PIG
338 PIR
339 PIR BY
340 PIR IN
341 PIR ON
342 PLACE
343 PLANT
344 PLAY
345 PLAZA
346 PLUMBER
347 PLUMBERS
348 POINT
349 POND
350 POOL
351 PORCH
352 POST
353 POWER
354 PRESSURE
355 PRIMARY
356 PRIME
296 NINETEEN
297 NINETY
298 NODE
299 NOISE
300 NURSE
301 NURSERY
302 NORTH
303 OF
304 OFFICE
305 OFFICER
306 OFFICERS
307 OFFICES
308 OIL
309 ON
310 ONE
311 OPEN
312 ORANGE
313 OUT
314 OUTER
315 OUTSIDE
316 OVAL
317 OVER
318 P.A. BUTTON
319 PACKING
320 PAINT
321 PANEL
322 PANIC
323 PANTRY
324 PARCEL
325 PARK
326 PARTITION
327 PASSIVE
Galaxy Programming Manual
389 RUN
390 SAFE
391 SALES
392 SCAN
393 SCANNER
394 SCANNERS
395 SCANNING
396 SCREEN
397 SEA
398 SECOND
399 SECURE
400 SECRETARIES
401 SECRETARY
402 SECTION
403 SECURITY
404 SENSOR
405 SEVEN
406 SEVENTEEN
407 SEVENTY
408 SHACK
409 SHAFT
410 SHED
411 SHEEP
412 SHOP
413 SHOWROOM
414 SHORT
415 SHOWER
416 SHUTTER
417 SIDE
357 PRINT
358 PROCESSING
359 PRODUCTION
360 PUBLIC
361 PURCHASING
362 PURPLE
363 QUALITY
364 QUANTITY
365 QUIET
366 QUICK
367 RANGE
368 READING
369 REAR
370 RECEPTION
371 RECORDS
372 RECTOR
373 RECTORS
374 RED
375 REED
376 REFECTORY
377 REMOTE
378 REPAIR
379 RESEARCH
380 REST
381 RESTAURANT
382 REVOLVING
383 RIGHT
384 R.H.S.
385 ROLLER
386 ROOF
387 ROOM
388 ROUND
450 STUDY
451 SUITE
452 SUMMER
453 SUNDAY
454 SUPPLY
455 SURGERY
456 SWIMMING
457 SWITCH
458 SYSTEM
459 TABLE
460 TALL
461 TAMPER
462 TEA
463 TEACHER
464 TECHNICAL
465 TECHNICIAN
466 TELLER
467 TEN
468 TENNIS
469 TEST
470 THE
471 THEATRE
472 THEN
473 THIRTEEN
474 THIRTY
475 THREE
476 TICKET
477 TILL
478 TO
418 SILENT
419 SILVER
420 SITE
421 SITTING
422 SIX
423 SIXTEEN
424 SIXTY
425 SLIDING
426 SMOKE
427 SOFTWARE
428 SOLITARY
429 SOUND
430 SOUTH
431 SPANISH
432 SPRAY
433 SPRING
434 SQUARE
435 SQUASH
436 STABLE
437 STADIUM
438 STAFF
439 STAIRS
440 STAIRWELL
441 STALLS
442 STAND
443 START
444 STATION
445 STOP
446 STORE
447 STORES
448 STROBE
449 STRONG
B-3
Library (cont’d)
511 VOLTAGE
512 WAITING
513 WALK
514 WALL
515 WARD
516 WAREHOUSE
517 WASH
518 WATER
519 WAY
520 W.C.
521 WEAPON
522 WEEKEND
523 WEST
524 WINDOW
525 WINTER
526 WITH
527 WOOD
528 WOODWORK
529 WORK
530 WORKS
531 WORKSHOP
532 X-RAY
533 YARD
534 YEAR
535 YELLOW
536 ZERO
537 ZONE
538 ZOO
479 TOILET
480 TOOL
481 TOP
482 TRACK
483 TRACTOR
484 TRADE
485 TRAILER
486 TRAIN
487 TRAINING
488 TRANSPORT
489 TRAP
490 T.V.
491 TWELVE
492 TWENTY
493 TWIN
494 TWO
495 TYPE
496 TYPING
497 TYRE
498 ULTRASONIC
499 UNDER
500 UNIT
501 UP
502 UPPER
503 UPSTAIRS
504 USER
505 UTILITY
506 VAN
507 VARIABLE
508 VAULT
509 VENTILATOR
510 VISUAL
Galaxy Programming Manual
B-4
Galaxy Programming Manual
Event Codes
Appendix C: SIA and Contact ID Event Codes
Ev SIA Event Galaxy Log Galaxy Log Event
Description Event Description
Ev Type Trigger Contact
ID Event
A - AC Power
AR AC Restoral AC FAIL-
CU-AC-
AC FAIL-
STAND LOW-
CU FUSE-
AC Fail zone restored
Control Unit AC restred
Module AC fail restored
Standby Battery Low
Control Unit fuse rest.
AT AC Trouble AC FAIL+
CU-AC+
AC Fail zone trouble
Control Unit AC trouble
AC FAIL+ Module AC fail trouble
STAND LOW+ Standby Battery Low
CU FUSE+ Control Unit fuse trouble
B - Burglary
BA Burglary Alarm EXIT+
INTRUDER+
24 HOURS+
SECURITY+
DUAL+
SEC FINAL+
PRT FINAL+
BB
BC
Burg Bypass
Burg Cancel
PRT ENTRY+
BEAM PAIR+
VIDEO+
VIDEO EXT+
CUSTOM A+
CUSTOM B+
MASK+
INT ALARM+
URGENT+
VIBRATION+
ATM-1+
ATM-2+
ATM-3+
ATM-4+
ALARM EXT+
T/O BURGL+
OMITTED
FORCEOMT+
GRP OMIT+
OMIT VIBS
OMIT-ATM1+
OMIT-ATM2+
OMIT-ATM3+
OMIT-ATM4+
KSW CANCL
CANCEL
Exit zone alarm
Intruder zone alarm
24 hour zone alarm
Security zone alarm
Dual zone alarm
Secure final zone alarm
Part final zone alarm
Part entry zone alarm
Beam pair zone alarm
Video zone alarm
Video exit zone alarm
Custom A zone alarm
Custom B zone alarm
Mask zone alarm
Intruder Delay alarm
Urgent zone alarm
Vibration zone alarm
ATM-1 zone alarm
ATM-2 zone alarm
ATM-3 zone alarm
ATM-4 zone alarm
Extend zone alarm
Entry timeout with zone
Zone omitted
Force omit after rearm
Group omitted
Omit Vibration zone
Omit ATM-1 zone
Omit ATM-2 zone
Omit ATM-3 zone
Omit ATM-4 zone
Keyswitch Cancel
Cancel by user
ZONE
ZONE
MOD.
MOD
MISC
ZONE
ZONE
MOD.
MOD
MISC
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
USER
EVENT
EVENT
EVENT
EVENT
EVENT
ZONE
USER
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
13.ELEC.ST
301
13.ELEC.ST
301
13.ELEC.ST
301
13.ELEC.ST
301
9.TAMPER
300
13. ELEC.ST
13.ELEC.ST
301
13.ELEC.ST
301
13.ELEC.ST
301
13.ELEC ST
9. Tamper
13.ELEC ST
301
300
2.INTRUDE
2.INTRUDE
134
130
3.24 HOURS 135
4.SECURITY
135
2.INTRUDE
130
4.SECURITY
134
2.INTRUDE
134
2.INTRUDE
8.OMIT
8.OMIT
8.OMIT
8.OMIT
8.OMIT
8.OMIT
8.OMIT
8.OMIT
11.RESET
11.RESET
2.INTRUDE
134
2.INTRUDE
2.INTRUDE
2.INTRUDE
130
130
130
5.CUS ZON
5.CUS ZON
130
130
4.SECURITY
135
2.INTRUDE
130
3.24 HOURS 130
2.INTRUDE
133
3.24 HOURS 133
3.24 HOURS 133
3.24 HOURS 133
3.24 HOURS 133
3.24 HOURS 130
134
573
573
572
572
406
406
574
572
572
572
C-1
Ev
BJ
BR
BT
Event Codes (cont’d)
SIA Event Galaxy Log Galaxy Log Event
Description Event Description
Burg Troub rest LOW RES-
HIGH RES-
Burglary Rest
RF SUPER-
EXIT-
Restor zone resistance
Restor zone resistance
RF Supervision Failure
Exit zone type restored
INTRUDER-
24 HOURS-
Intruder zone restored
24 hour zone restored
SECURITYSecurity zone restored
Galaxy Programming Manual
URGENT-
VIBRATION-
ATM-1-
ATM-2-
ATM-3-
ATM-4-
ALARM EXT-
T/0 BURGL-
Burg. Trouble LOW RES+
DUAL-
SEC FINAL-
PRT FINAL-
PRT ENTRY-
BEAM PAIR-
VIDEO-
VIDEO EXT-
CUSTOM A-
CUSTOM B-
MASK-
INT ALARM-
Dual zone restored
Secure final zone rest.
Part final zone restored
Part entry zone restored
Beam pair zone rest.
Video zone restored
Video exit zone rest.
Custom A zone rest.
Custom B zone rest.
Mask zone restored
Intruder Delay restored
Urgent zone restored
Vibration zone restored
ATM-1 zone restored
ATM-2 zone restored
ATM-3 zone restored
ATM-4 zone alarm
Alarm extend zone rest.
Entry timeout restore
Low resistance on zone
Ev Type Trigger
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
Contact
ID Event
15.TROUBL
15.TROUBL
380
380
15.TROUBL
2.INTRUDE
18.ZN RESTO
381
134
2.INTRUDE
18.ZN RESTO
130
3.24 HOURS 135
18.ZN RESTO
4.SECURITY
135
18.ZN RESTO
2.INTRUDE
130
18.ZN RESTO
4.SECURITY
134
18.ZN RESTO
2.INTRUDE
134
18.ZN RESTO
2.INTRUDE
18.ZN RESTO
2.INTRUDE
18.ZN RESTO
2.INTRUDE
18.ZN RESTO
2.INTRUDE
134
130
130
130
18.ZN RESTO
5.CUS ZON
18.ZN RESTO
130
5.CUS ZON
18.ZN RESTO
130
4.SECURITY
135
18.ZN RESTO
2.INTRUDE
18.ZN RESTO
130
3.24 HOURS 130
18.ZN RESTO
2.INTRUDE
18.ZN RESTO
133
3.24 HOURS 133
18.ZN RESTO
3.24 HOURS 133
18.ZN RESTO
3.24 HOURS 133
18.ZN RESTO
3.24 HOURS 133
18.ZN RESTO
3.24 HOURS 130
18.ZN RESTO
2.INTRUDE
134
18.ZN RESTO
15.TROUBL
380
C-2
Galaxy Programming Manual
Ev SIA Event Galaxy Log Galaxy Log Event
Description Event Description
HIGH RES+
RF SUPER+
High resistance on zone
RF Supervision Failure
BU
BV
BX
Burg Unbypass GRP OMIT-
OMIT-ATM1-
OMIT-ATM2-
OMIT-ATM3-
OMIT-ATM4-
FORCE OMT-
Burg Confirm CONFIRM
EXIT
INTRUDER
24 HOURS
SECURITY
DUAL
ENTRY
PUSH SET
KEYSWITCH
SEC FINAL
PRT FINAL
PRT ENTRY
PA
PA SILENT
PA DELAY
PA DEL/SL
LINK
SPARE
TAMPER
BELL TAMP
BEAM PAIR
BATT LOW
LINE FAIL
AC FAIL
LOG
RM ACCESS
VIDEO
VIDEO EXT
INT DELAY
SEC DELAY
SET LOG
CUSTOM A
CUSTOM B
EXITGUARD
MASK
URGENT
PA UNSET
KSW RESET
VIBRATION
ATM-1
ATM-2
Group unomitted
Unomit ATM-1 zone
Unomit ATM-2 zone
Unomit ATM-3 zone
Unomit ATM-4 zone
Unomitted after rearm
2 independant alarms
Exit zone tested
Intruder zone tested
24 hour zone tested
Security zone tested
Dual zone tested
Entry zone tested
Push set zone tested
Keyswitch zone tested
Secure final zone test.
Part final zone tested
Part entry zone tested
PA zone tested
PA silent zone tested
PA delay zone tested
PA delay sil zone tested
Link zone tested
Spare zone tested
Tamper zone tested
Bell tamper zone tested
Beam pair zone tested
Battery Low zone tested
Line fail zone tested
AC fail zone tested
Log zone tested
Rem acc zone tested
Video zone tested
Video exit zone tested
Intrud delay zone tested
Security del zone tested
Set Log zone tested
Custom A zone tested
Custom B zone tested
Exitguard zone tested
Mask zone tested
Urgent zone tested
PA unset zone tested
Ksw. reset zone tested
Vibration zone tested
ATM-1 zone tested
ATM-2 zone tested
Event Codes (cont’d)
Ev Type Trigger
ZONE
ZONE
Contact
ID Event
15.TROUBL
15.TROUBL
380
381
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
USER
EVENT
EVENT
EVENT
EVENT
ZONE
EVENT
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
574
572
572
572
572
573
None
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
611
8.OMIT
8.OMIT
8.OMIT
8.OMIT
8.OMIT
8.OMIT
2.INTRUDE
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
C-3
Event Codes (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
Ev SIA Event Galaxy Log Galaxy Log Event
Description Event Description
ATM-3
ATM-4
ALARM EXT
SOAK TEST
ATM-3 zone tested
ATM-4 zone tested
Alarm extend zone test.
Soak test zone act
Ev Type Trigger
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
Contact
ID Event
611
611
611
611
CG
CI
CJ
CL
C - Closing
CA
CE
CP
Closing Report FULL SET
Closing Extend EXTENSION
PREWARN
Close Area
Fail to Set
Auto. Closing
PART SET
FAIL SET
Late to Set LATE SET
Closing Report FULL SET
FULL SET
KSW SET
REARM
CR
CT
Recent Close
Late to Open
RECEN.SET
TIMEOUT
Automatic Set
Auto arm exten. delay
Auto arm prewarn delay
Part set by user
Fail to Set
Late to Set
Full set
Set by keypad
Keyswitch set
Rearm after alarm
EVENT
USER
MISC
USER
EVENT
EVENT
USER
EVENT
ZONE
EVENT
Previous alarm was within 5 mins of set
Entry timeout EVENT
10.SETTING
401
10.SETTING
464
NEVER TR 464
10.SETTING
441
7. SET FAULT 454
10.SETTING
454
10.SETTING
401
10.SETTING
401
10.SETTING
409
10.SETTING
463
EVENT 2.INTRUDER 459
10.SETTING
None
D - Access
DD
DF
DG
DK
DT
Acces Denied
Door Forced
Invalid Card
MAX ALARM
MAX tag unknown
Door contact broken
Acces Granted LEGAL CD
LEGAL CD
Valid
Acces Lockout ILL-CODE
Door propped
Reject Card
DOOR PROP
Legal code entered
ATM code entered
MAX tag accepted
Illegal code entry
Illegal MAX tag
MAX - Door left open
E - System Trouble
ER
ET
Mod Removed REMOVED
RF NVM Fail RF MEM!
Module Removed
RF NVM RAM Fail
MOD.
MOD.
USER
USER
USER
USER
USER
MOD.
MOD
MOD
17.MAXTAG
421
4.SECURITY
423
17.MAXTAG
16.LOG
462
16.LOG
462
17.MAXTAG
422
16.LOG
421
17.MAXTAG
421
4.SECURITY
426
TAMPER
TAMPER
532
333
C-4
Galaxy Programming Manual
Ev SIA Event Galaxy Log Galaxy Log Event
Description Event Description
F - Fire
FA
FB
FJ
FR
Fire Alarm
Fire Bypass
FIRE+
OMITTED
FORCEOMT+
Fire Troub rest LOW RES-
Fire Restoral
HIGH RES-
FIRE-
Fire zone alarm
Fire zone ommitted
Force omit after rearm
Restor zone resistance
Restor zone resistance
Fire zone restored
FT
FU
FX
Fire Trouble LOW RES+
HIGH RES+
Fire Unbypass FORCE OMT-
Fire Test FIRE
Low resistance on zone
High resistance on zone
Unomitted after rearm
Fire zone tested
SOAK TEST Soak test fire zone act
G - Gas (Custom SIA - See Note 2)
GA
GB
GJ
GR
Alarm
Bypass
Trouble Rest
Alarm Restore
Note 1
OMITTED
FORCEOMT+
LOW RES-
HIGH RES-
Note 1 zone in alarm zone ommitted
Force omit after rearm
Restor zone resistance
Restor zone resistance zone restored
GT Trouble
GU Unbypass
LOW RES+
HIGH RES+
FORCE OMT-
Low resistance on zone
High resistance on zone
Unomitted after rearm
H - Holdup
HA
HB
HJ
HR
Holdup Alarm PA SILENT+
PA DEL/SL+
DURESS
PA UNSET+
Holdup Bypass OMITTED
FORCEOMT+
Hold Troub rest LOW RES-
Hold Restoral
HIGH RES-
PA SILENT-
PA Silent zone alarm
PA Delay Sil.zone alarm
Duress with code
PA Unset zone alarm
Holdup zone omitted
Force omit after rearm
Restor zone resistance
Restor zone resistance
PA Silent zone restored
PA DEL/SLPA Delay Sil.zone rest.
HT
HU
PA UNSETPA Unset zone restored
Holdup Trouble LOW RES+
HIGH RES+
Hold Unbypass FORCE OMT-
Low resistance on zone
High resistance on zone
Unomitted after rearm
Event Codes (cont’d)
Ev Type Trigger Contact
ID Event
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
USER
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
6.FIRE
8.OMIT
8.OMIT
15.TROUBL
15.TROUBL
6.FIRE
18.ZN RESTO
15.TROUBL
15.TROUBL
8.OMIT
NOT SENT
NOT SENT
110
573
573
380
380
110
380
380
573
None
None
5.CUS ZON
8.OMIT
8.OMIT
15.TROUBL
15.TROUBL
5.CUS ZON
18.ZN RESTO
15.TROUBL
15.TROUBL
8.OMIT
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
1.PA/DURE
1.PA/DURE
1.PA/DURE
1.PA/DURE
8.OMIT
8.OMIT
15.TROUBL
15.TROUBL
1.PA/DURE
18.ZN RESTO
1.PA/DURE
18.ZN RESTO
1.PA/DURE
18.ZN RESTO
15.TROUBL
15.TROUBL
8.OMIT
573
380
380
122
122
122
121
122
573
122
122
380
380
573
C-5
Event Codes (cont’d)
Ev SIA Event Galaxy Log Galaxy Log Event
Description Event Description
J - Wrong code, Time changed
JA
JT
Code Tamper
Invalid Code
Time changed
WRONG CD
INVALID CD
NEW T/D
Wrong code alarm act.
Invalid Code entered
Time/Date modified
Galaxy Programming Manual
Ev Type Trigger
MOD.
MOD.
USER
Contact
ID Event
9.TAMPER
461
ALWAYS TR None
ALWAYS TR 3 625
K - Heat (Custom SIA - See Note 2)
KA
KB
KJ
KR
Alarm
Bypass
Trouble Rest
Note 1
OMITTED
FORCEOMT+
LOW RES-
HIGH RES-
Alarm Restore Note 1 zone in alarm zone ommitted
Force omit after rearm
Restor zone resistance
Restor zone resistance zone restored
KT Trouble
KU Unbypass
LOW RES+
HIGH RES+
FORCE OMT-
Low resistance on zone
High resistance on zone
Unomitted after rearm
L - Phone, Program
LB
LR
LT
LX
Program begin ENGINEER+
Line Restore LINE FAIL -
Line Trouble
LINE FAIL -
LINE FAIL+
LINE FAIL+
Local Prog end ENGINEER-
Engineer mode entered
Zone Tel line fail rest.
Module Tel line fail rest .
Zone Tel line fail trouble
Mod Tel line fail trouble
Engineer mode exited
M - Medical (Custom SIA - See note 2)
MA
MB
MJ
MR
Alarm
Bypass
Note 1
OMITTED
FORCEOMT+
LOW RESTrouble Rest
HIGH RES-
Alarm Restore Note 1 zone in alarm zone ommitted
Force omit after rearm
Restor zone resistance
Restor zone resistance zone restored
MT Trouble
MU Unbypass
LOW RES+
HIGH RES+
FORCE OMT-
Low resistance on zone
High resistance on zone
Unomitted after rearm
O - Opening
OA
OG
Open Report
Open Area
OK
OP
Early Open
Open Report
UNSET
UNSET
KSW UNSET
U/S EARLY
UNSET
Automatic Unset
Part Unset
Keyswitch part unset
Unset Early
Unset
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
MISC
ZONE
MOD
ZONE
MOD
EVENT
EVENT
USER
ZONE
EVENT
USER
5.CUS ZON
8.OMIT
8.OMIT
15.TROUBL
15.TROUBL
5.CUS ZON
18.ZN RESTO
15.TROUBL
15.TROUBL
8.OMIT
Note 1
573
573
380
380
Note 1
380
380
573
ALWAYS TR 627
12.MD/COM 351
12.MD/COM
12.MD/COM
12.MD/COM
351
351
351
ALWAYS TR 627
5.CUS ZON
8.OMIT
8.OMIT
15.TROUBL
15.TROUBL
5.CUS ZON
18.ZN RESTO
15.TROUBL
15.TROUBL
8.OMIT
Note 1
573
573
380
380
Note 1
380
380
573
10.SETTING
401
10.SETTING
401
10.SETTING
409
10.SETTING
451
10.SETTING
401
C-6
Galaxy Programming Manual
Ev SIA Event Galaxy Log Galaxy Log Event
Description Event Description
OR Disarm alarm
KSW UNSET
SYS RESET
PA RESET
TAMP RST
SYS RESET
PA RESET
TAMP RESET
P - Panic
PA
PB
PJ
Panic Alarm PA+
DELAY ALM+
Panic Bypass OMITTED
FORCEOMT+
Pan Troub rest LOW RES-
Keyswitch unset
All Burglar alarms reset
All PA alarms reset
All Tamper alarms reset
Ksw reset Burglar alarm
Ksw reset PA alarms
Ksw reset Tamp alarm
PA zone alarm
PA Delay zone alarm
PA zone omitted
Force omit after rearm
Restor zone resistance
PR
HIGH RES-
Panic Restoral PA-
Restor zone resistance
PA zone restored
DELAY ALMPA Delay zone restored
PT
PU
Panic Trouble LOW RES+
HIGH RES+
Panic Unbypas FORCE OMT-
Low resistance on zone
High resistance on zone
Unomitted after rearm
Q - Assist (Custom SIA - see note 2)
QA
QB
QJ
QR
Alarm
Bypass
Trouble Rest
Alarm Restore
Note 1
OMITTED
FORCEOMT+
LOW RES-
HIGH RES-
Note 1 zone in alarm zone ommitted
Force omit after rearm
Restor zone resistance
Restor zone resistance zone restored
QT Trouble
QU Unbypass
LOW RES+
HIGH RES+
FORCE OMT-
Low resistance on zone
High resistance on zone
Unomitted after rearm
R - Remote,Log,Test
RC Relay closed LINK -
LOG -
LOG DELAY -
CUSTOM A -
CUSTOM B-
EXITGUARD-
Link zone closed
Log zone closed
Log delay zone closed
Zone closed(Non alarm)
Zone closed(Non alarm)
Exitguard zone closed
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
Event Codes (cont’d)
Ev Type Trigger
ZONE
USER
USER
USER
EVENT
EVENT
EVENT
Contact
ID Event
10.SETTING
409
11.RESET
313
1.PA/DURE
9.TAMPER
11.RESET
1.PA/DURE
9.TAMPER
465
313
313
465
313
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
1.PA/DURE
1.PA/DURE
8.OMIT
8.OMIT
15.TROUBL
120
120
573
573
380
15.TROUBL
1.PA/DURE
18.ZN RESTO
1.PA/DURE
18.ZN RESTO
15.TROUBL
15.TROUBL
8.OMIT
380
120
120
380
380
573
5.CUS ZON
8.OMIT
8.OMIT
15.TROUBL
15.TROUBL
5.CUS ZON
18.ZN RESTO
15.TROUBL
15.TROUBL
8.OMIT
Note 1
573
573
380
380
Note 1
380
380
573
16.LOG
16.LOG
16.LOG
16.LOG
16.LOG
16.LOG
150
150
150
150
150
150
C-7
Event Codes (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
Ev
RD
RO
RP
RR
RS
RX
SIA Event Galaxy Log Galaxy Log Event
Description Event Description
Prog, denied
Relay open
RMACCESS+
LINK+
LOG+
LOG DELAY+
CUSTOM A+
CUSTOM B+
EXITGUARD+
Automatic test AUTOTEST
Power Up MEMORY OK
Prog, success RM ACCESS-
REM CALL
Manual test ENG TEST
Zone denied rem. acc
Link zone opened
Log zone opened
Log delay zone opened
Zone opend(Non alarm)
Zone opend(Non alarm)
Exitguard zone opened
Automatic test
Warm start of panel
Zone allowed rem acc
Remote call complete
Engineer test
S - Sprinker (Custom SIA - see note 2)
SA
SB
SJ
SR
ST
SU
Alarm
Bypass
Trouble Rest
Note 1
OMITTED
FORCEOMT+
LOW RES-
HIGH RES-
Alarm Restore Note 1
Trouble LOW RES+
HIGH RES+
Unbypass FORCE OMTzone in alarm zone ommitted
Force omit after rearm
Restor zone resistance
Restor zone resistance zone restored
Low resistance on zone
High resistance on zone
Unomitted after rearm
T - Tamper,Test
TA Tamper Alarm
TE Test End
TAMPER+
BELL TAMP+
LID TAMP+
AUX TAMP+
TAMP S/C+
TAMP O/C+
TAMPER+
MISSING+
CV TAMP+
MAX TAMP+
ADDED
ENG TAMP+
WALK TEST-
Tamper zone alarm
Bell Tamper zone alarm
Lid Tamper alarm
Auxilary Tamper alarm
Tamper short circuit
Tamper open circuit
Module Tamper
Missing module alarm
Voltage tamper on zone
MAX Module Tamper
Module Added
Engineering Tamper
Walk test finished
MOD
ZONE
MOD.
MOD.
MISC
USER
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
MOD
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
EVENT
EVENT
ZONE
MOD
USER
Ev Type Trigger Contact
ID Event
14.MEN AC
16.LOG
16.LOG
16.LOG
16.LOG
16.LOG
16.LOG
150
ALWAYS TR 602
13.ELEC ST
14.MEN AC
14.MEN AC
305
553
412
ALWAYS TR 601
553
150
150
150
150
150
5.CUS ZON
8.OMIT
8.OMIT
15.TROUBL
15.TROUBL
5.CUS ZON
15.TROUBL
15.TROUBL
8.OMIT
Note 1
573
573
380
380
Note 1
380
380
573
9.TAMPER
9.TAMPER
9.TAMPER
9.TAMPER
9.TAMPER
9.TAMPER
9.TAMPER
9.TAMPER
9.TAMPER
9.TAMPER
9.TAMPER
9.TAMPER
14.MEN AC
145
383
145
531
None
607
137
137
137
137
383
383
145
C-8
Galaxy Programming Manual
Ev
TR
SIA Event Galaxy Log Galaxy Log Event
Description Event Description
Tamper Restor TAMPERTamper zone restored
BELL TAMP-
LID TAMP-
AUX TAMP-
TAMP S/C-
Bell Tamper zone rest.
Lid Tamper restored
Auxilary Tamper rest.
Tamper s/circuit rest.
Event Codes (cont’d)
Ev Type Trigger Contact
ID Event
ZONE 9.TAMPER
137
18.ZN RESTO
ZONE 9.TAMPER
ZONE
ZONE
18.ZN RESTO
9.TAMPER
18.ZN RESTO
9.TAMPER
ZONE
18.ZN RESTO
9.TAMPER
18.ZN RESTO
137
137
137
383
TS Test Start
TAMP O/C-
TAMPER-
MISSING-
CV TAMP-
MAX TAMP-
ENG TAMP-
Tamper o/circuit rest.
Module Tamper rest.
Missing module rest.
Voltage tamper rest.
MAX Module Tamp rest
Engineer Tamper
WALK TEST+ Walk test started
W - Water(Custom SIA - see note 2)
WA
WB
WJ
Alarm
Bypass
Trouble Rest
Note 1
OMITTED
FORCEOMT+
LOW RES-
HIGH RESzone in alarm zone ommitted
Force omit after rearm
Restor zone resistance
Restor zone resistance
WR Alarm Restore Note 1 zone restored
WT
WU
Trouble
Unbypass
LOW RES+
HIGH RES+
FORCE OMT-
Low resistance on zone
High resistance on zone
Unomitted after rearm
X - RF
XQ
XT
XH
XR
RF Jam
RF Batt Low
RF JAM+
RF BATLOW+
RF Signal Jammed
RF Battery Low
RF Jam Restore RF JAM-
RF Batt Lo Rst RF BATLOW-
RF Jam Restore
RF Battery Low Restore
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
MOD
MOD
ZONE
MOD.
MISC
USER
MOD
ZONE
MOD
ZONE
9.TAMPER
18.ZN RESTO
9.TAMPER
18.ZN RESTO
9.TAMPER
18.ZN RESTO
9.TAMPER
18.ZN RESTO
9.TAMPER
18.ZN RESTO
9.TAMPER
18.ZN RESTO
14.MEN AC
383
145
145
383
145
None
607
5.CUS ZON
8.OMIT
8.OMIT
15.TROUBL
15.TROUBL
Note 1
573
573
380
380
5.CUS ZON
18.ZN RESTO
15.TROUBL
15.TROUBL
8.OMIT
Note 1
380
380
573
15.TROUBLE
344
13.ELEC ST 384
15.TROUBLE
15.TROUBLE
344
13.ELEC ST 384
15.TROUBLE
C-9
YC
YF
YK
YR
Ev
YT
Event Codes (cont’d)
SIA Event Galaxy Log Galaxy Log Event
Description Event Description
Comms Fail internal to tel
Panel Cold Start MEM RESET
Comm Restoral internal to tel
Sys Batt Rest .
BATT LOW-
CU BATT-
BATT LOW-
BATT FUSE-
Sys Batt Troub BATT LOW+
CU BATT+
BATT LOW+
BATT FUSE+
Tel module lost RS485
Power Up Panel
Tel module rest. RS485
Battery Low restored
Control unit batt restore
Mod Battery Low rest
Battery Fuse restored
Battery Low
Control unit Battery Low
Module Battery Low
Battery Fuse blown
Galaxy Programming Manual
EVENT
MISC
EVENT
ZONE
ZONE
MOD
MOD
ZONE
ZONE
MOD
MOD
Ev Type Trigger Contact
ID Event
ALWAYS TR 350
13.ELEC ST None
ALWAYS TR 350
13.ELEC ST
13.ELEC ST
302
302
13.ELEC ST
13.ELEC ST
13.ELEC ST
13.ELEC ST
13.ELEC ST
13.ELEC ST
302
302
302
302
302
302
Z - Freezer (Custom SIA - see note 2)
ZA
ZB
ZJ
ZR
ZT
ZU
Alarm
Bypass
Note 1
OMITTED
FORCEOMT+
LOW RESTrouble Rest
HIGH RES-
Alarm Restore Note 1
Trouble
Unbypass
LOW RES+
HIGH RES+
FORCE OMTzone in alarm zone ommitted
Force omit after rearm
Restor zone resistance
Restor zone resistance zone restored
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
Note 1 : Dependant upon zone type selected
Note 2: Custom SIA event allow existing zone types to be modified in order to send specific SIA events from the panel. This allows more specific SIA information to be transmitted. The zones used to programme the custom SIA events will continue to function as per the zone description
Note 3 : Not sent for Dutch Variants
Low resistance on zone
High resistance on zone
Unomitted after rearm
ZONE
ZONE
ZONE
5.CUS ZON
8.OMIT
8.OMIT
15.TROUBL
15.TROUBL
5.CUS ZON
18.ZN RESTO
15.TROUBL
15.TROUBL
8.OMIT
Note 1
573
573
380
380
Note 1
380
380
573
C-10
Galaxy Programming Manual
Appendix D: SIA Event Structure
SIA Event Structure
E
T
Z
U v y
O e n p
N e
E t
M o d u l e
E s e v e r n t
# x x x x x x
# x x x x
# x x x x x x
# x x x x x x
# x x x x x x
# x x x x
# x x x x x x
# x x x x x x
# x x x x x x
# x x x x
A C C .
B l o c k
# x x x x x x
# x x x x x x
# x x x x x x
# x x x x
# x x x x x x
# x x x x x x
3 , 4
2
1
0
3 , 4
2
1
0
1
0
3 , 4
2
2
1
0
S
L
I A
E V E L
3 , 4
D A T A
( N b l o
B c k l o c k c o d
F o e ) r m a t
N it x x : x x / ir x x / E V z z z z
N it x x : x x / ir x x / E V z z z z
N E V z z z z
N E V z z z z
N it x x : x x / ir x x i/ d u u u / p i x x x / E V
N it x x : x x / ir x x i/ d u u u / p i x x x / E V
N E V m m m
N E V m m m
N it x x : x x / ir x x / p i m m m / E V
N it x x : x x / ir x x / p i m m m / E V
N E V m m m
N E V m m m
N it x x : x x / ir x x / E V
N it x x : x x / ir x x / E V
N E V
N E V 0 0 0
A s c ii B l o c k F o r m a t ( A b l o c k c o d e )
A e e e e e e e e e s ii ii ii ii d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d d
A e e e e e e e e e s ii ii ii ii d d d d d d
A e e e e e e e e e s ii ii ii ii d d d
A e e e e e e e e e s ii ii ii ii
E
D
U x e s t p e e r l a n c t
S o e a t r
/t i o a l a
U n n r m s e ,t e d r e
, k e s e ,t y s d u w ti c h r e s s e t
, e t c c
1 .
S
W e t w ti h ti h ir
A m o d i o r B if e k r : e y w ti h o u t c o d e
2 .
K e
W y p ti a h o d u t ir m o d i a d d e d , R i o if e r : m i s s i n g e t c
1 .
W ti h
A u t o m a ir it c m o d i s e ,t if e r : it m e r a c it v a t e d
2 .
A u
W t o ti h o u t m a it c t ir e m o d i s ,t e n if e g i r : n e e r m o d e
K e y :
D a t a B l o c k A s c ii B l o c k t i r i i d u p i m
E V z
T i m e m o d i if e r
G d r i s o a u p b l e m o d i d ) if e r ( n o t u s e d fi g r o u p s a r e
U s e r m o d i if e r
U s e r n u m b e r
P e i p h e r a l m o d i if e r
P e ir p h e r a l n u m b e r
E v e n t C o d e T y p e ( s e e S I A e v e n t il s t s u p p il e d )
Z o n e n u m b e r e s i d x m a x i m u m d i g ti s f o r m o d i if e r if e l d
L o g e v e n t ( 9 c h a r s , s e e G a l a x y L o g E v e n t i n t a b l e s u p p il e d )
E v e n t s t a t e '( + ' : O N , ' ': O F F , ' ' : N O T U S E D )
S ti e i d e n it if e r ( 8 c h a r d e s c ir p it o n o f s ti e c a n b e b l a n k )
D e s c ir p t o r ( a d d i it o n a l t e x t t o d e s c ir b e e v e n t ) ,
1 .
Z o n e E v e n t 1 6 c h a r z o n e d e s c ir p t o r
2 .
U s e r E v e n t 6 c h a r u s e r n a m e
3 .
M o d u l e E v e n t 3 c h a r m o d u l e n a m e ,
' R I O '
R e a
( 8 d e r z o n e
' C O M ' m o d
( C u
O l e )
M 1
, ' K E
= T e
Y l e
' c
( k o e y m , p a d
C O
) ,
M
' M A
2 =
X
R
' ( P
S 2 r o
3 2 x
) i m ti y
D-1
Galaxy Programming Manual
D-2
Galaxy Programming Manual
Event Log
Appendix E: Event Log Messages
K E Y P A D T E X T
0 0 0 1 + C U B A T T
0 0 0 1 C U B A T T
0 0 0 2 + C U A C
0 0 0 2 C U A C
0 0 0 3 + L I D T A M P
0 0 0 3 L I D T A M P
0 0 0 4 + A U X T A M P
0 0 0 4 A U X T A M P
A B O R T S E T +
+ A C F A I L
– A C F A I L
D E S C R I P T I O N
C o n t r o l U n ti S t a n d b y B a tt e r y L o w h a s o c c u r r e d ( b a tt e r y v o tl a g e b e l o w 1 0 .
5 V d .
c .
) .
C o n t r o l U n ti S t a n d b y B a tt e r y L o w h a s if n i s h e d ( b a tt e r y v o tl a g e n o w a b o v e 1 0 .
5 V d .
c .
) .
C o n t r o l U n ti M a i n s ( a .
c .
) P o w e r F a li h a s o c c u r r e d .
C o n t r o l U n ti M a i n s ( a .
c .
) P o w e r F a li h a s if n i s h e d .
L i d T a m p e r o n c o n t r o l u n ti h a s o c c u r r e d .
L i d T a m p e r o n c o n t r o l u n ti h a s if n i s h e d .
A u x i il a r y T a m p e r o n c o n t r o l u n ti h a s o c c u r r e d .
A u x i il a r y T a m p e r o n c o n t r o l u n ti h a s if n i s h e d .
S e t it n g p r o c e s s a b o r t e d
A C F a li z o n e a c it v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) o r a n A C F a li o n 3 A S m a r t P o w e r S u p p l y U n i .t
A C F a li z o n e d e a c it v a t e d ( c l o s e d ) o r a n A C F a li o n 3 A S m a r t P o w e r S u p p l y U n ti h a s s t o p p e d .
A L A R M E X T
A D D E D
A T M 1
A T M 2
A T M 3
A T M 4
A U T O T E S T
A U T O T I M E R +
A U T O T I M E R –
+ B A T T L O W
– B A T T L O W
B E A M P A I R
B E G I N S E T +
+ B E L L T A M P
– B E L L T A M P
C A N C E L
C O M M F A I L
C O P Y S I T E
C U S T O M A
C U S T O M B
C U F U S E +
C U F U S E –
D E L A Y A L M
D L / S L A L M
A l a r m e x t e n d z o n e a c it v a t e d .
E n g i n e e r h a s A d d e d a m o d u l e t o t h e s y s t e m .
A T M 1 z o n e a c it v a t e d .
A T M 2 z o n e a c it v a t e d .
A T M 3 z o n e a c it v a t e d .
A T M 4 z o n e a c it v a t e d .
A u t o m a it c T e s t o f t h e s y s t e m v i a a c o m m s m o d u l e
A u t o s e t it m e r a c it v a t e d .
A u t o s e t it m e r d e a c it v a t e d .
B a tt e r y L o w a c it v a t e d o n 3 A S m a r t P o w e r S u p p l y U n i .t
B a tt e r y L o w d e a c it v a t e d o n 3 A S m a r t P o w e r S u p p l y U n i .t
B e a m P a i r z o n e s a c it v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
S e t it n g p r o c e s s s t a r t e d
B e ll T a m p e r z o n e a c it v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
B e ll T a m p e r z o n e d e a c it v a t e d ( c l o s e d ) .
A l a r m a c it v a it o n C a n c e ll e d b y a v a il d u s e r C o d e ( s y s t e m o r G r o u p ( s ) s it ll S e t ) .
C o m m u n i c a it o n F a li u r e h a s o c c u r r e d o n a c o m m s m o d u l e .
R e m o t e C o p y o f t h e S ti e ( s y s t e m ) h a s o c c u r r e d v i a G a l a x y G o l d o r t h e R S 2 3 2 M o d u l e .
C u s t o m A z o n e a c it v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
C u s t o m B z o n e a c it v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
C o n t r o l U n ti F u s e r e m o v e d ( G a l a x y 8 o n l y ) .
C o n t r o l U n ti F u s e r e p l a c e d ( G a l a x y 8 o n l y ) .
P A D e l a y A l a r m z o n e a c it v a t e d a tf e r P A D e l a y it m e o u .t
P A D e l a y e d S li e n t z o n e a c it v a t e d a tf e r P A D e l a y it m e o u .t
D U A L D u a l ( D o u b l e K n o c k ) z o n e a c it v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
NOTE: A plus (+) means an event has started. A negative (-) means an event has finished.
E-1
Event Log (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
K E Y P A D T E X T
E N G S O A K
E N G T M R S
E N G Z O N E S
E N G T A M P
E N G T E S T
E N G I N E E R +
E N G I N E E R –
+ E N T R Y
– E N T R Y
E X T E N S I O N
+ E X I T
– E X I T
E X I T G U A R D
F A I L S E T
+ F I N A L
– F I N A L
F I R E
F O R C E O M T
D U R E S S
E N G A S S E M
E N G C H E C K
E N G D I A G
E N G D I G I
E N G G R O U P
E N G K P A D
E N G L I N K S
E N G O / P S
E N G P A R A M
E N G P R I N T
E N G Q U I C K
F U L L S E T
F U L L T E S T
G R P O M I T +
G R P O M I T –
H I G H R E S +
H I G H R E S –
D E S C R I P T I O N
D u r e s s c o d e h a s b e e n e n t e r e d .
E n g i n e e r i n g A s s e m b l e Z o n e m e n u ( M e n u O p t i o n 6 4 ) h a s b e e n a c c e s s e d .
E n g i n e e r i n g P r e C h e c k m e n u ( M e n u O p t i o n 6 6 ) h a s b e e n a c c e s s e d .
E n g i n e e r i n g D i a g n o s t i c s m e n u ( M e n u O p t i o n 6 1 ) h a s b e e n a c c e s s e d .
E n g i n e e r i n g D i g i c o m ( C o m m u n i c a t i o n s ) ( M e n u O p t i o n 5 6 ) h a s b e e n a c c e s s e d .
E n g i n e e r i n g G r o u p s ( M e n u O p t i o n 6 3 ) h a s b e e n a c c e s s e d .
E n g i n e e r i n g K e y p a d ( M e n u O p t i o n 5 8 ) h a s b e e n a c c e s s e d .
E n g i n e e r i n g L i n k s ( M e n u O p t i o n 5 4 ) h a s b e e n a c c e s s e d .
E n g i n e e r i n g O u t p u t s ( M e n u O p t i o n 5 3 ) h a s b e e n a c c e s s e d .
E n g i n e e r i n g P a r a m e t e r s ( M e n u O p t i o n 5 1 ) h a s b e e n a c c e s s e d .
E n g i n e e r i n g P r i n t ( M e n u O p t i o n 5 7 ) h a s b e e n a c c e s s e d .
E n g i n e e r i n g Q u i c k M e n u ( M e n u O p t i o n 5 9 ) h a s b e e n a c c e s s e d .
E n g i n e e r i n g S o a k T e s t ( M e n u O p t i o n 5 5 ) h a s b e e n a c c e s s e d
E n g i n e e r i n g T i m e r s A / B ( M e n u O p t i o n 6 5 ) h a s b e e n a c c e s s e d .
E n g i n e e r i n g Z o n e s ( M e n u O p t i o n 5 2 ) h a s b e e n a c c e s s e d .
T a m p e r w h e n e n t e r i n g E n g i n e e r M o d e .
E n g i n e e r T e s t o f t h e s y s t e m v i a t h e T e l e c o m M o d u l e .
E n t e r i n g E n g i n e e r m o d e .
L e a v i n g E n g i n e e r m o d e .
E n t r y z o n e a c t i v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) d u r i n g S e t t i n g / U n s e t t i n g p r o c e d u r e o r w h e n S e t .
E n t r y z o n e d e a c t i v a t e d ( c l o s e d ) d u r i n g S e t t i n g / U n s e t t i n g p r o c e d u r e o r w h e n S e t .
S y s t e m o r G r o u p ( s ) a r e i n t h e A u t o s e t E x t e n s i o n p e r i o d .
E x i t z o n e a c t i v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) d u r i n g t h e U n s e t t i n g p r o c e d u r e o r w h e n S e t .
E x i t z o n e d e a c t i v a t e d ( c l o s e d ) d u r i n g t h e U n s e t t i n g p r o c e d u r e o r w h e n S e t .
E x i t G u a r d z o n e a c t i v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
F a i l t o s e t e v e n t .
F i n a l z o n e a c t i v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) d u r i n g S e t t i n g / U n s e t t i n g p r o c e d u r e o r w h e n S e t .
F i n a l z o n e d e a c t i v a t e d ( c l o s e d ) d u r i n g S e t t i n g / U n s e t t i n g p r o c e d u r e o r w h e n S e t .
F i r e z o n e a c t i v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
F o r c e O m i t o f a z o n e ( M e n u O p t i o n 1 4 ) .
F u ll S e t ( M e n u O p t i o n 1 2 ) o f t h e s y s t e m o r G r o u p ( s ) .
F u ll T e s t ( M e n u O p t i o n 6 2 ) h a s o c c u r r e d .
G r o u p O m i t h a s o c c u r r e d ( G r o u p ( s ) h a s b e e n o m i t t e d ) .
G r o u p O m i t h a s f i n i s h e d ( G r o u p ( s ) h a s b e e n u n o m i t t e d ) .
Z o n e c h a n g i n g t o H i g h R e s i s t a n c e ( 1 2 0 0 t o 1 3 0 0 O h m ) E n g i n e e r L o g o n l y .
Z o n e c h a n g i n g f r o m H i g h R e s i s t a n c e t o N o r m a l C l o s e d ( 1 3 0 0 t o 1 2 0 0 O h m ) E n g .
L o g o n l y
E-2
Galaxy Programming Manual
Event Log (cont’d)
L I N E F A I L +
L I N E F A I L –
+ L I N K
– L I N K
L O C K T I M E R +
L O C K T I M E R –
+ L O G
– L O G
L O G D E L A Y
+ L O W R E S
– L O W R E S
+ M A S K
– M A S K
M A X A L A R M
M E M R E S E T
M E M O R Y O K
M I S S I N G +
M I S S I N G –
M O D C O D E S
M O D R E M
M O D S U M M R
M O D T / D
M O D T M R S
K E Y P A D T E X T
I N S T S E T +
I N T R U D E R
I N T D E L A Y
I N T A L A R M
K E Y S W I T C H
K S W C A N C L
K S W P / S E T
K S W S E T
K S W U N S E T
K S W R E S E T
L A T E S E T
L E G A L C D
D E S C R I P T I O N
I n s t a n t s e t o f s y s t e m o r g r o u p
I n t r u d e r z o n e a c it v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
I n t r u d e r D e l a y z o n e a c it v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
I n t r u d e r A l a r m f r o m a n I n t r u d e r D e l a y z o n e a tf e r t h e D e l a y A l a r m it m e .
K e y s w ti c h z o n e a c it v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
K e y s w ti c h C a n c e l s a l a r m a c it v a it o n ( s y s t e m o r G r o u p ( s ) s it ll S e t ) .
K e y s w ti c h p a r t s e t s t h e s y s t e m o r G r o u p ( s ) .
K e y s w ti c h F u ll S e t s t h e s y s t e m o r G r o u p ( s ) .
K e y s w ti c h U n s e t s t h e s y s t e m o r G r o u p ( s ) .
K e y s w ti c h R e s e t s t h e s y s t e m o r G r o u p ( s ) .
L a t e S e t o f t h e s y s t e m o r G r o u p ( s ) .
L t e g h e a l s y
C s t o d e e m o e r n t e r e
G r o u d p (
( T h i s s ) i s a L e v e l
S e t ) .
0 C o d e o r a v a il d u s e r C o d e a tf e r a n e n g i n e e 'r s C o d e w h e n
C o m m s M o d u l e L i n e F a li h a s o c c u r r e d o r a L i n e F a li z o n e a c it v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
C o m m s M o d u l e L i n e F a li h a s if n i s h e d o r a L i n e F a li z o n e d e a c it v a t e d ( c l o s e d ) .
L i n k z o n e a c it v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
L i n k z o n e d e a c it v a t e d ( c l o s e d ) .
L o c k o u t it m e r a c it v a t e d .
L o c k o u t it m e r d e a c it v a t e d .
L o g z o n e a c it v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
L o g z o n e d e a c it v a t e d ( c l o s e d ) .
L o g D e l a y z o n e h a s b e e n a c it v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) f o r l o n g e r t h a n t h e D e l a y A l a r m it m e .
Z o n e c h a n g i n g t o l o w r e s i s t a n c e ( 9 0 0 t o 8 0 0 O h m ) .
Z o n e c h a n g i n g f r o m L o w R e s i s t a n c e t o N o r m a l C l o s e d ( 8 0 0 t o 9 0 0 O h m ) .
M a s k z o n e a c it v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
M a s k z o n e d e a c it v a t e d ( c l o s e d ) .
M A X a l a r m — d o o r f o r c e d .
M e m o r y R e s e t ( R e s t a r t ) t o f a c t o r y d e f a u tl s e t it n g s ( C o l d S t a r t ) .
M e m o r y R e s e t ( R e s t a r t ) w ti h p r o g r a m m i n g d e t a li s s a v e d ( W a r m s t a r t ) .
M o d u l e M i s s i n g ti s A B ( R S 4 8 5 ) c o m m u n i c a it o n s .
M o d u l e t h a t w a s M i s s i n g n o w h a s ti s A B ( R S 4 8 5 ) c o m m u n i c a it o n s r e e s t a b il s h e d .
M o d fi y C o d e s m e n u ( M e n u O p it o n 4 2 ) h a s b e e n a c c e s s e d .
G a l a x y G o l d m e n u ( M e n u O p it o n 4 7 ) h a s b e e n a c c e s s e d .
M o d fi y S u m m e r m e n u ( M e n u O p it o n 4 3 ) h a s b e e n a c c e s s e d .
M o d fi y T i m e / D a t e m e n u ( M e n u O p it o n 4 2 ) h a s b e e n a c c e s s e d .
M o d fi y T i m e r s C o n t r o l m e n u ( M e n u O p it o n 4 5 ) h a s b e e n a c c e s s e d .
E-3
Event Log (cont’d)
Galaxy Programming Manual
+ P R T E N T R Y
– P R T E N T R Y
+ P R T F I N A L
– P R T F I N A L
P U S H S E T
R E A R M
R E M C A L L +
R E M C A L L –
R E M C O P Y
R E M O V R W R
R E M O V E D
R M A C C E S S
+ S E C F I N A L
– S E C F I N A L
S E T L O G
O M I T T E D
O V W R S I T E
P A
P A D E L / S L
P A D E L A Y
P A U N S E T
P A R E S E T
P A S I L E N T
P A R T S E T
P R E W A R N
P R I N T O C
P R I N T O L
K E Y P A D T E X T
N E W T / D
O M I T A T M 1
O M I T A T M 2
O M I T A T M 3
O M I T A T M 4
O M I T V I B S
O M I T Z O N E
D E S C R I P T I O N
N e w T i m e / D a t e a f t e r m o d i f i c a t i o n .
O m i t a ll A T M 1 z o n e s .
O m i t a ll A T M 2 z o n e s .
O m i t a ll A T M 3 z o n e s .
O m i t a ll A T M 4 z o n e s .
M a s s o m i t o f v i b r a t i o n z o n e s .
O m i t h a s
Z o n b e e n e s a m c c e e n u ( M s s e d .
e n u O p t i o n 0 ( i n t h e Q u i c k M e n u ) o r M e n u O p t i o n 1 1 ( i n t h e F u ll M e n u ) )
Z o n e h a s b e e n o m i t t e d .
R e m o t e O v e r w r i t e o f t h e S i t e ( s y s t e m ) h a s o c c u r r e d v i a G a l a x y G o l d o r t h e R S 2 3 2 M o d u l e .
P A z o n e a c t i v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
P A D e l a y e d S i l e n t z o n e a c t i v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
P A D e l a y e d z o n e a c t i v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
P A U n s e t z o n e a c t i v a t e d w h i l e g r o u p i n u n s e t c o n d i t i o n .
P A R e s e t h a s o c c u r r e d .
P A S i l e n t z o n e a c t i v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
P a r t S e t o f s y s t e m o r G r o u p ( s ) .
S y s t e m o r G r o u p ( s ) i n t h e A u t o s e t P r e w a r n i n g p e r i o d .
P r i n t O n C o m m a n d .
P r i n t o n il n
O e n L m e i n e s s
, t h e a g e a u t o f r o m m a a p t i c r i n p t e r i n r .
t i n g o f t h e E v e n t L o g .
N o t t o b e c o n f u s e d w i t h t h e p r i n t e r
P a r t E n t r y z o n e a c t i v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
P a r t E n t r y z o n e d e a c t i v a t e d ( c l o s e d ) .
P a r t F i n a l z o n e a c t i v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
P a r t F i n a l z o n e d e a c t i v a t e d ( c l o s e d ) .
P u s h S e t ( E x i t T e r m i n a t o r ) z o n e a c t i v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
R e a r m o f s y s t e m h a s o c c u r r e d .
R e m o t e d e v i c e c o n n e c t e d .
R e m o t e d e v i c e d i s c o n n e c t e d .
R e m o t e C o p y o f s i t e d e t a i l s v i a S I A h a s o c c u r r e d .
R e m o t e O v e r w r i t e v i a S I A h a s o c c u r r e d .
E n g i n e e r h a s R e m o v e d a m o d u l e f r o m t h e s y s t e m .
R e m o t e A c c e s s z o n e a c t i v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
S e c u r e F i n a l z o n e a c t i v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
S e c u r e F i n a l z o n e d e a c t i v a t e d ( c l o s e d ) .
S e t L o g z o n e a c t i v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) w h e n t h e s y s t e m o r G r o u p ( s ) i s S e t .
E-4
Galaxy Programming Manual
Event Log (cont’d)
K E Y P A D T E X T
+ S E C U R I T Y
– S E C U R I T Y
S O A K T E S T
S T A N D L O W
S Y S R E S E T
+ T A M P O / C
– T A M P O / C
T A M P R S T
+ T A M P S / C
– T A M P S / C
+ T A M P E R
– T A M P E R
T E S T O / P
T I M E O U T
T I M E R A +
T I M E R A –
T I M E R B +
T I M E R B –
T / O B U R G L
U N S E T
U R G E N T
U / S E A R L Y
V I B R A T I O N
V I D E O
V I D E X I T
W A L K T E S T +
W A L K T E S T –
W R O N G C D
2 4 H O U R S
D E S C R I P T I O N
S e c u r i t y z o n e a c t i v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
S e c u r i t y z o n e d e a c t i v a t e d ( c l o s e d ) .
Z o n e u n d e r S o a k T e s t ( M e n u O p t i o n 5 5 ) a c t i v a t e d w h e n t h e s y s t e m o r g r o u p ( s ) i s S e t .
S t a n d b y t i m e f o r t h e b a t t e r y i s L o w .
S y s t e m R e s e t h a s o c c u r r e d e v e n t .
Z o n e c h a n g i n g t o T a m p e r O p e n C i r c u i t ( g r e a t e r t h a n 1 2 , 0 0 0 O h m ) .
Z o n e c h a n g i n g f r o m T a m p e r O p e n C i r c u i t t o N o r m a l C l o s e d ( 1 2 0 0 t o 9 0 0 O h m ) .
T a m p e r R e s e t o f t h e s y s t e m h a s o c c u r r e d .
Z o n e c h a n g i n g t o T a m p e r S h o r t C i r c u i t ( l e s s t h a n 8 0 0 O h m ) .
Z o n e t o 1 2 0 c h
0 a n
O g i n g h m ) .
f r o m T a m p e r S h o r t C i r c u i t ( l e s s t h a n 8 0 0 O h m ) .
t o N o r m a l C l o s e d ( 9 0 0
T a m p e r
T e l e c o m o n a
M o d m o d u l e u l e o r R a
S c t i
2 3 v a
2 t e
M d o
( o p e d u l e .
n e d ) .
A m o d u l e i s e i t h e r a k e y p a d , G a l a x y R I O ,
T a m p e r
T e l e c o m o n a
M o d m o d u l e u l e o r R d
S e -
2 3 a c t
2 i v
M a t e d o d u l
( e .
c l o s e d ) .
A m o d u l e i s e i t h e r a k e y p a d , G a l a x y R I O ,
T e s t O u t p u t s m e n u ( M e n u O p t i o n 3 2 ) h a s b e e n a c c e s s e d .
T i m e o u t a l a r m a f t e r t h e E n t r y T i m e h a s e x p i r e d .
T i m e r A a c t i v a t e d ( o n ) .
T i m e r A d e a c t i v a t e d ( o f f ) .
T i m e r B a c t i v a t e d ( o n ) .
T i m e r B d e a c t i v a t e d ( o f f ) .
T i m e o u t a l a r m e v e n t ) .
a f t e r t h e E n t r y T i m e h a s e x p i r e d ( s a m e a s T I M E O U T b u t u s e d a s a S I A
U n s e t o f t h e s y s t e m o r G r o u p ( s ) .
U r g e n t z o n e a c t i v a t e d .
U n s e t E a r l y o f t h e s y s t e m o r G r o u p ( s ) .
V i b r a t i o n z o n e a c t i v a t e d .
V i d e o z o n e a c t i v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
V i d e o E x i t z o n e a c t i v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
W a l k T e s t h a s o c c u r r e d .
W a l k T e s t h a s f i n i s h e d .
W r o n g r e s e t .
C o d e a l a r m a c t i v a t i o n ( 6 c o n s e c u t i v e w r o n g c o d e s ) .
T h i s R e q u i r e s a s y s t e m
2 4 H o u r s z o n e a c t i v a t e d ( o p e n e d ) .
E-5
Galaxy Programming Manual
E-6
Galaxy Programming Manual
Index
A
Appendix A: Door Control
MAX (MX01)
Appendix B: Library
Appendix C: SIA and
A-1
B-1
Contact ID Event Codes C-1
Appendix D: SIA Event
Structure
Appendix E: Event Log
D-1
Messages E-1
B
C
Cancelling and Resetting
Alarms
Card Setting Options
D
Display Options
9
9
17
E
Engineer Mode
Engineer Unsetting
Engineer 1
Engineer 2
Ethernet Module
F
Full Menu
G
H
3
I
ISDN Module
J
M
Menu Access
Menu Options
Menu Options (11-19)
Modify Options
115
K
Keyswitch Setting Options 8
L
3
3
13
27
4
8
48
139
123
N
O
Option 11 - Omit Zones 13
Option 12 - Timed Set 15
Option 13 - Part Set
Option 14 - Forced Set
15
15
Option 15 - Chime
Option 16 - Instant Set
15
15
Option 17 - Instant Part 16
Option 18 - Home Set 16
Option 19 - All Set 16
Option 21 - Display Zones 17
Option 22 - Display log 18
Option 23 - System 19
Option 24 - Print 20
Option 25 - Access Doors 21
Option 31 - Walk Test
Option 32 - Outputs
25
26
Option 41 - Time/Date
Option 42 - Codes
Option 43 - Summer
Option 44 - Trace
Option 45 - Timer control 40
Option 47 - Remote Access 45
Option 48 - Engineer
Access
Option 49 - Datelock
46
47
Option 51 – Parameters 48
27
28
39
39
Option 52 – Program Zones 65
Option 53 – Program
Outputs
Option 54 – Links
81
96
Option 55 – Soak
Option 56 –
99
Communications 100
Option 57 – System Print 134
Option 58 – Keypad 135
Option 59 – Quick Menu 138
Option 61 - Diagnostics 139
Option 62 – Full Test 140
Option 63 – Options 141
Option 64 – Assemble Zone151
Option 65 – Timers
Option 66 - Pre-checks
155
161
Option 67 – Remote Reset 162
Option 68 – Menu Access 163
P
Programming Codes 31
Q
Quick Menu 3
R
RS232 Interface Module 113
Index
V
W
X
Y
Z
S
Setting Features
Setting Options
System Operation
T
Telecom Module
Test Options
U
Unsetting the System
10
7
3
101
25
8
1
2
Galaxy Programming Manual
Galaxy Programming Manual
3
Galaxy Programming Manual
Honeywell Security
2 Redwood Crescent
Peel Park Campus
East Kilbride
G74 5PA
IP1-0030 Rev 1.1
4
© Copyright Honeywell Security
Advertisement
Key features
- Customizable to meet your specific needs
- Advanced technology provides peace of mind and protection
- Easy to use and program
- Expandable to accommodate future needs
- Compatible with a variety of sensors and devices
- Backed by Honeywell's reputation for quality and reliability